SlideShare a Scribd company logo
ORACLE E-BUSINESS SUITE
RELEASE CONTENT DOCUMENT

Value Chain Planning
Releases 12.1 and 12.2 (inclusive of 12.0.2 – 12.0.7)




Prepared by the VCP Product Management and Strategy Teams



Last Updated:                April 5, 2011
Version:                     1.0




Copyright © 2011 Oracle Corporation
All Rights Reserved
Table of Contents


1.        Disclaimer                                                            1
2.        Introduction                                                          2
2.1.      Purpose of Document                                                    2
3.        New and Changed Features in Value Chain Planning                      3
3.1.      Collections                                                            3
          3.1.1. Release 12.1.1                                                  3
            3.1.1.1.  Backward Compatibility to 11i10                            3
3.2.      Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center                                3
          3.2.1. Product Overview                                                3
          3.2.2. Release 12.1.1                                                  4
            3.2.2.1.  Sales and Operations Planning Dashboard                    4
            3.2.2.2.  Supply Chain Analyst Dashboard                             5
            3.2.2.3.  Analytical Framework                                       6
            3.2.2.4.  Scenario Management                                        7
            3.2.2.5.  Supply Chain Planning Web Services                         7
            3.2.2.6.  Seeded BPEL Processes                                      7
            3.2.2.7.  Process Automation                                         8
            3.2.2.8.  Activity Management                                        8
          3.2.3. Release 12.1.2                                                  8
            3.2.3.1.  Compatibility with 11.5.10 Planning Server                 8
            3.2.3.2.  Integration to Third Party Planning Systems                9
            3.2.3.3.  Ability to Run APCC Standalone                             9
            3.2.3.4.  Rich User Interface Enhancements                          10
          3.2.4. Release 12.1.3                                                 10
            3.2.4.1.  Analysis of Inventory and Service Levels                  10
            3.2.4.2.  Analysis of Excess and Obsolescence                       10
            3.2.4.3.  Enhanced Sales and Operations Planning Dashboard          10
            3.2.4.4.  Supply Chain Risk Management Dashboard                    11
            3.2.4.5.  Revenue Gap Analysis                                      12
            3.2.4.6.  Collaboration Workspaces for Unstructured Collaboration   12
            3.2.4.7.  Enhanced Exceptions Analysis                              12
            3.2.4.8.  Integration with Rapid Planning                           13
            3.2.4.9.  Plan Versus Collected Data Comparison                     13
          3.2.5. Release 12.1.3.2                                               13
            3.2.5.1.  New Dimension – End Item                                  13
            3.2.5.2.  New Dimension – Parent Model                              14
          3.2.6. Release 12.2                                                   14
            3.2.6.1.  Plan-specific Forecasting Measures                        14
            3.2.6.2.  Custom Series from Demantra DM and RT S&OP                14
            3.2.6.3.  Support for Custom Demantra Product Hierarchy             15
            3.2.6.4.  Integration with Distribution Planning                    15
3.3.      Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning                                 16

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document          ii
3.3.1. Release 12.1.1                                                 16
            3.3.1.1.  Oracle Transportation Management Integration              16
            3.3.1.2.  Optimization Enhancements                                 16
            3.3.1.3.  Contiguous Processing                                     16
            3.3.1.4.  Minimum Remaining Shelf Life                              17
            3.3.1.5.  Distribution Planning Scalability Enhancements            17
            3.3.1.6.  End Item Substitution Enhancements                        17
            3.3.1.7.  Production Schedules as Inputs                            18
            3.3.1.8.  Safety Lead Time                                          18
            3.3.1.9.  Customization of Horizontal Plan                          18
            3.3.1.10. Supply Tolerancing Enhancements                           18
            3.3.1.11. Buy Order Processing Lead Time Backward Compatibility     19
          3.3.2. Release 12.1.2                                                 19
            3.3.2.1.  Release Recommendations for Internal Requisitions         19
            3.3.2.2.  Turn Off Planned Order Creation                           19
            3.3.2.3.  Consume Purchase Orders in First In, First Out Sequence   20
          3.3.3. Release 12.1.3                                                 20
            3.3.3.1.  Forecast Spreading Based on Shipping Calendar             20
            3.3.3.1.  Excluding Planned Orders from Supply Tolerancing          21
            3.3.3.2.  Maximize Use-Up of Substitute Components                  22
            3.3.3.3.  Distribution Planning Enhanced Order Modifier Support     23
          3.3.4. Release 12.1.3.2                                               23
            3.3.4.1.  Forecast Explosion Enhancements                           23
          3.3.5. Release 12.2                                                   24
            3.3.5.1.  Supplier Capacity Consumption Enhancement                 24
            3.3.5.2.  Enhanced Exception Management                             25
3.4.      Oracle Collaborative Planning                                         25
          3.4.1. Release 12.1.1                                                 25
            3.4.1.1.  Export Exception Details                                  25
            3.4.1.2.  Detailed Supply Commit Based on ASCP Pegging              25
            3.4.1.3.  Search Exceptions by Buyer and Planner                    25
          3.4.2. Release 12.1.2                                                 26
            3.4.2.1.  Rich User Interface Enhancements                          26
          3.4.3. Release 12.1.3                                                 26
          3.4.4. Release 12.2                                                   26
3.5.      Oracle Demand Planning                                                26
          3.5.1. Release 12.1.1                                                 26
            3.5.1.1.  Clear Data in Worksheets                                  26
            3.5.1.2.  Default Even Allocation Over Time                         26
            3.5.1.3.  Plan Security by Responsibility and Organization          26
            3.5.1.4.  Sort by Product in Planning Percentages Worksheet         27
            3.5.1.5.  Data Selection Tools for Region Copy Selector             27
            3.5.1.6.  Prevent Planners from Editing Measures in View Scope      27
          3.5.2. Release 12.1.2                                                 27
          3.5.3. Release 12.1.3                                                 27
          3.5.4. Release 12.2                                                   27
3.6.      Oracle Demand Signal Repository                                       27
          3.6.1. Product Overview                                               27
          3.6.2. Release 12.1.1                                                 28
            3.6.2.1.  Customer Organization Hierarchy                           28
            3.6.2.2.  Multiple Calendar Support                                 28
            3.6.2.3.  Customer Item Hierarchy                                   28
            3.6.2.4.  Manufacturer Item Hierarchy                               29
            3.6.2.5.  Multiple Currency Support                                 29
            3.6.2.6.  Alternate Units of Measure                                29
            3.6.2.7.  Authorized Distribution                                   29
            3.6.2.8.  Sales Allocation                                          30


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document         iii
3.6.2.9.  Sales Facts                                                  30
            3.6.2.10. Shipments                                                    30
            3.6.2.11. Orders                                                       30
            3.6.2.12. Inventory                                                    30
            3.6.2.13. Sales Forecasts                                              30
            3.6.2.14. Promotion Plans                                              31
            3.6.2.15. Category Sales Analysis Dashboard                            31
            3.6.2.16. Product to Category Coverage Reports                         31
            3.6.2.17. Category Growth Analysis Reports                             31
            3.6.2.18. Category Sales by Type Reports                               32
            3.6.2.19. Average Price Analysis Report                                32
            3.6.2.20. Top and Bottom Performers Reports                            32
            3.6.2.21. Ad-Hoc Reporting                                             32
            3.6.2.22. Sales Scorecard                                              33
            3.6.2.23. Supply Chain Scorecard                                       33
            3.6.2.24. Operations Scorecard                                         33
            3.6.2.25. Demantra Demand Management Integration                       33
            3.6.2.26. Retail Merchandising System (RMS) Integration                34
            3.6.2.27. Web Services Integration                                     34
          3.6.3. Release 12.1.2                                                    34
            3.6.3.1.  Exception Management Dashboard                               34
            3.6.3.2.  All Commodity Volume (ACV) / External Measures               35
            3.6.3.3.  TDLinx Store/Outlet Adapter                                  35
            3.6.3.4.  Scorecard Enhancements (Goals & Thresholds)                  36
            3.6.3.5.  Store Clusters                                               37
            3.6.3.6.  Item Clusters                                                37
            3.6.3.7.  Replenishment Rules                                          38
            3.6.3.8.  Allocation Rules                                             39
          3.6.4. Release 12.1.3                                                    39
            3.6.4.1.  Manufacturer Promotions                                      39
            3.6.4.2.  Manufacturer Shipments                                       40
            3.6.4.3.  Customer Shipment Facts                                      40
            3.6.4.4.  Third Party Distributors                                     40
            3.6.4.5.  Alternate Organization Hierarchy                             41
            3.6.4.6.  Forecast Type and Purpose Code                               43
            3.6.4.7.  User Defined Fields                                          43
            3.6.4.8.  Type 2 Slowly Changing Dimensions                            44
          3.6.5. Release 12.2                                                      44
3.7.      Oracle Demantra – All Products                                           44
          3.7.1. Release 12.2                                                      44
            3.7.1.1.  Calendar Month Support in Weekly System                      44
            3.7.1.2.  Import from Excel                                            45
            3.7.1.3.  Engine Performance Improvements                              45
            3.7.1.4.  General Engine Enhancements                                  45
            3.7.1.5.  Analytical Engine on Solaris 10                              45
            3.7.1.6.  Improved Multi-Language Support                              45
            3.7.1.7.  Technology Stack                                             46
            3.7.1.8.  Demand Variability Definition                                46
            3.7.1.9.  Configure Rolling Profile Groups                             46
            3.7.1.10. Integration Data Profile Hints                               46
            3.7.1.11. Database Performance Improvements                            46
            3.7.1.12. Asynchronous Workflow Support                                47
3.8.      Oracle Demantra Demand Management                                        47
          3.8.1. Release 12.2                                                      47
            3.8.1.1.  Enhanced Integration with Advanced Planning Command Center   47
3.9.      Oracle Demantra Real-time Sales and Operations Planning                  47
          3.9.1.    Release 12.2                                                   47


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document            iv
3.9.1.1.       Improved Cost Modeling                                        47
            3.9.1.2.       Enhanced Integration with Advanced Planning Command Center    48
3.10.     Oracle Demantra Predictive Trade Planning                                      48
          3.10.1. Release 12.2                                                           48
            3.10.1.1.  Enabling ‘Dynamic Open Link’ capabilities and Demantra Anywhere   48
3.11.     Oracle Demantra Trade Promotion Optimization                                   48
          3.11.1. Release 12.2                                                           48
            3.11.1.1.  Enabling Nodal Tuning                                             48
            3.11.1.2.  Enhancements to Optimization                                      49
3.12.     Oracle Global Order Promising                                                  49
          3.12.1. Release 12.1.1                                                         49
          3.12.2. Release 12.1.2                                                         49
          3.12.3. Release 12.1.3                                                         49
            3.12.3.1.  Enhanced Forward ATP                                              49
          3.12.4. Release 12.2                                                           50
3.13.     Oracle Inventory Optimization                                                  50
          3.13.1. Release 12.1.1                                                         50
            3.13.1.1.  Support for Intermittent Demands                                  50
          3.13.2. Release 12.1.2                                                         50
          3.13.3. Release 12.1.3                                                         50
            3.13.3.1.  Enhanced Budget Constraints                                       50
          3.13.4. Release 12.2                                                           50
3.14.     Oracle Production Scheduling                                                   51
          3.14.1. Release 12.1.1                                                         51
            3.14.1.1.  Units of Measure on Items                                         51
            3.14.1.2.  Enhanced Alerts                                                   51
            3.14.1.3.  Work Order Centric KPI Comparisons                                52
            3.14.1.4.  Access Operation and Routings from Operation Instances            53
            3.14.1.5.  Auto-create Work Orders Directly from Demands                     53
            3.14.1.6.  Find Functionality for Model Objects                              54
            3.14.1.7.  Visibility to Demand Fulfilled via Starting Inventory             55
            3.14.1.8.  Automatic Reconciliation of Schedule Backlog                      55
            3.14.1.9.  Batchable Resources                                               56
            3.14.1.10. Consistent Resource Assignment within a Portion of a Routing      57
            3.14.1.11. Resource-specific Cycle Times for Campaign Run Optimization       59
            3.14.1.12. Minimize Work Order Schedule Infeasibilities                      60
            3.14.1.13. Disable Units of Effort for Setup and Cleanup Operations          61
            3.14.1.14. Resource “All of” Sets                                            62
            3.14.1.15. Hard Links Between Work Orders                                    65
            3.14.1.16. Dynamic Throughput Rates on Resources                             67
            3.14.1.17. PS Data Connector Port to Sun, HP and AIX                         69
            3.14.1.18. Export Selected Model Data During Schedule Publish                69
            3.14.1.19. PS XML Model – Unique Extension                                   70
            3.14.1.20. Enhanced Auto-generated Routings                                  70
            3.14.1.21. Selective Work Order Release to Production                        71
          3.14.2. Release 12.1.2                                                         72
            3.14.2.1.  Resource Business Objectives                                      72
            3.14.2.2.  Production Scheduling as a Web Service Call                       73
            3.14.2.3.  Undo Functionality for Manual Scheduling                          73
            3.14.2.4.  Attribute Based Sequence Dependent Setups                         75
            3.14.2.5.  Visualization of Campaign Run Optimization Cycle Boundaries       76
            3.14.2.6.  New Alert Type and Drilldowns                                     77
            3.14.2.7.  Drilldowns from the Work Order Editor to the Gantt Charts         78
            3.14.2.8.  Mass Change on Items and Resources                                79
          3.14.3. Release 12.1.3                                                         80
            3.14.3.1.  Maintenance Work Order Scheduling                                 80


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                   v
3.14.3.2.  Disable Multiple Release from the Same Plan for the Same Order           84
            3.14.3.3.  User Defined Ideal Sequence                                              86
            3.14.3.4.  Supply Tolerancing                                                       88
            3.14.3.5.  Control Application of Purchase Item Order Multiples Beyond Lead Time    89
            3.14.3.6.  Improved Operation Status Logic in OPM integration                       91
            3.14.3.7.  Advanced Work Order Filtering                                            91
          3.14.4. Release 12.2                                                                  93
3.15.     Oracle Rapid Planning                                                                93
          3.15.1. Product Overview                                                              93
          3.15.2. Release 12.1.3                                                                94
            3.15.2.1.  Fast Simulation                                                          94
            3.15.2.2.  Flexible User Interface                                                  94
            3.15.2.3.  Simulation Sets                                                          94
            3.15.2.4.  Mass Edits                                                               95
            3.15.2.5.  Plan Comparisons                                                         95
            3.15.2.6.  Aggregate, Editable Material Horizontal View                             95
            3.15.2.7.  All-in-one Supply/Demand View                                            96
            3.15.2.8.  Integration with Advanced Planning Command Center                        96
            3.15.2.9.  Unconstrained Planning                                                   96
            3.15.2.10. Constrained Planning                                                     96
            3.15.2.11. Demand Forecasts                                                         97
            3.15.2.12. Respect Demand Priority Rules                                            97
            3.15.2.13. Demand and Supply Pegging                                                97
            3.15.2.14. Supply Chain Sourcing                                                    97
            3.15.2.15. Supplier Capacity                                                        98
            3.15.2.16. Bills of Material and BOM Effectivity                                    98
            3.15.2.17. By-products and Co-products                                              98
            3.15.2.18. Routing Operation and Resource Scheduling                                98
            3.15.2.19. End Item Substitution                                                    99
            3.15.2.20. Lead Times and Planning Time Fence                                       99
            3.15.2.21. Order Modifiers                                                          99
            3.15.2.22. Safety Stock Lead Time                                                  100
            3.15.2.23. Shipping, Receiving and Carrier Calendars                               100
            3.15.2.24. Planner Action: Firm Existing Supplies                                  100
            3.15.2.25. Planner Action: Firm Planned Supplies                                   100
            3.15.2.26. Release New Planned Orders and Reschedule Recommendations               100
            3.15.2.27. Exceptions                                                              101
            3.15.2.28. Embedded Analytics                                                      102
            3.15.2.29. Late Demand Diagnosis                                                   102
            3.15.2.30. Global Forecasting                                                      103
            3.15.2.31. Configure to Order                                                      103
            3.15.2.32. Default Order Sizing                                                    104
            3.15.2.33. Inventory Reservations                                                  105
            3.15.2.34. Clear to Build                                                          105
            3.15.2.35. Rapid Planning – Sales and Operations Planning Integration              105
            3.15.2.36. Rapid Planning – Global Order Promising Integration                     106
            3.15.2.37. Order Comparison                                                        106
            3.15.2.38. Multi-Planner Collaboration                                             106
            3.15.2.39. Functional and Data Security                                            106
          3.15.3. Release 12.1.3.3                                                             107
            3.15.3.1.  Demand Pull-In and Upside Processing                                    107
            3.15.3.2.  Favorite Lists                                                          108
            3.15.3.3.  Safety Stock Enhancements                                               109
            3.15.3.4.  Simulation Edits of Additional Item Attributes                          110
            3.15.3.5.  Simulation Edits of Approved Supplier Lists and Supplier Capacity       110
            3.15.3.6.  Simulation Edits of Processes                                           111
            3.15.3.7.  Mass Update Enhancements for Resource Availability                      111
            3.15.3.8.  Mass Update Enhancements for Firm Date on Demands and Supplies          111
            3.15.3.9.  Scheduling Rapid Planning Runs in Batch Mode                            112

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                         vi
3.15.3.10. Enhanced Search Capability                                     112
            3.15.3.11. Material Plan Display Order                                    112
            3.15.3.12. Display of Decimal Precision                                   112
            3.15.3.13. Last Saved Information for Plan Options                        113
            3.15.3.14. Blow Through Phantom Items in Clear to Build                   113
            3.15.3.15. Global Forecasting Display in the Material Plan                113
            3.15.3.16. Auto-release of Planning Recommendations                       113
            3.15.3.17. Natural Time Fence                                             114
          3.15.4. Release 12.2                                                        114
3.16.     Oracle Service Parts Planning                                               114
          3.16.1. Product Overview                                                    114
          3.16.2. Release 12.1.1                                                      114
            3.16.2.1.  Integrated Demand and Supply Planning                          114
            3.16.2.2.  Service Parts Planning Workbench                               114
            3.16.2.3.  Integration to Spares Management for External Repairs          115
            3.16.2.4.  Integration to Depot Repair for Internal Repairs               115
            3.16.2.5.  Support for Part Condition                                     115
            3.16.2.6.  Criticality Matrix                                             115
            3.16.2.7.  Support for Supersessions                                      116
            3.16.2.8.  Returns Forecasts                                              116
            3.16.2.9.  Minimize New Buys                                              116
            3.16.2.10. Life Time Buys                                                 116
            3.16.2.11. Planner Work Lists                                             116
            3.16.2.12. Integration with Collaborative Planning                        116
            3.16.2.13. Supersession Chain-Specific Replanning                         116
            3.16.2.14. Execution Net Change Planning                                  117
          3.16.3. Release 12.1.2                                                      117
            3.16.3.1.  Multi-process Inline Forecasting                               117
            3.16.3.2.  Intermittent Demand Flag                                       117
            3.16.3.3.  Planner Worklist Enhancement                                   118
          3.16.4. Release 12.1.3                                                      118
            3.16.4.1.  Re-order Point-based Parts Planning                            118
            3.16.4.2.  Import into a Simulation Set                                   119
            3.16.4.3.  Integration with Advanced Supply Chain Planning                119
            3.16.4.4.  Integration with APCC - Service Parts Planner Dashboard        119
          3.16.5. Release 12.1.3.2                                                    120
            3.16.5.1.  Fair Share                                                     120
            3.16.5.2.  Query-based Auto-release                                       121
            3.16.5.3.  Collect Installed Base under Contract                          121
            3.16.5.4.  Collect Field Replaceable Unit Bills of Material               121
            3.16.5.5.  Supersession Notes                                             122
          3.16.6. Release 12.2                                                        122
            3.16.6.1.  Support Multiple Move-in / Move-out Lines for a Repair Order   122
3.17.     Oracle Strategic Network Optimization                                       122
          3.17.1. Release 12.1.1                                                      122
            3.17.1.1.  Supply Chain Risk Management                                   122
            3.17.1.2.  Alerts                                                         123
            3.17.1.3.  Key Performance Indicators                                     125
            3.17.1.4.  Usability Enhancements                                         128
          3.17.2. Release 12.1.2                                                      129
            3.17.2.1.  Aggregate Assignment Set and Lane Definition                   129
          3.17.3. Release 12.1.3                                                      130
          3.17.4. Release 12.2                                                        130
            3.17.4.1.  Specify Scenario File in the Plan Options                      130
            3.17.4.2.  Solver Upgrade                                                 131




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                vii
1.        Disclaimer
                                    This Release Content Document (RCD) describes product features that are proposed for
                                    the specified release of the Oracle E-Business Suite. This document describes new or
                                    changed functionality only. Existing functionality from prior releases is not described. It
                                    is intended solely to help you assess the business benefits of upgrading to the specified
                                    release of the Oracle E-Business Suite.
                                    This document in any form, software or printed matter, contains proprietary information
                                    that is the exclusive property of Oracle. Your access to and use of this confidential
                                    material is subject to the terms and conditions of your Oracle Software License and
                                    Service Agreement, which has been executed and with which you agree to comply. This
                                    document and information contained herein may not be disclosed, copied, reproduced or
                                    distributed to anyone outside Oracle without prior written consent of Oracle. This
                                    document is not part of your license agreement nor can it be incorporated into any
                                    contractual agreement with Oracle or its subsidiaries or affiliates.

                                    This document is for informational purposes only and is intended solely to assist you in
                                    planning for the implementation and upgrade of the product features described. It is not
                                    a commitment to deliver any material, code, or functionality, and should not be relied
                                    upon in making purchasing decisions. The development, release, and timing of any
                                    features or functionality described in this document remains at the sole discretion of
                                    Oracle.

                                    Due to the nature of the product architecture, it may not be possible to safely include all
                                    features described in this document without risking significant destabilization of the
                                    code.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                            Purpose of Document     1
2.        Introduction

          2.1.      Purpose of Document
                                    This Release Content Document (RCD) communicates information about new or
                                    changed functionality introduced in Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2, and
                                    in subsequent Release Update Packs (RUPs) and off-cycle patches. For your
                                    convenience, it also includes new or changed functionality introduced in the RUPs for
                                    Release 12, including 12.0.2 through 12.0.7.

                                    The features and enhancements described in this document are grouped by product, and
                                    then by the release in which they first became available, for example, “Release 12.1.1”.
                                    Features released in an off-cycle patch have a special designation – for example, a
                                    feature released after 12.1.1, but before 12.1.2, is designated as “Release 12.1.1+”.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                          Purpose of Document    2
3.        New and Changed Features in Value Chain Planning

          3.1.      Collections
                    3.1.1.          Release 12.1.1

                                    3.1.1.1. Backward Compatibility to 11i10
                                    Oracle Advanced Planning Release 12.1.1 supports, through a Collections backward
                                    compatibility patch, the configuration where the source is E-Business Suite 11i10, and
                                    the destination (planning server) is Release 12.1.1. This backward compatibility applies
                                    to Advanced Supply Chain Planning, Distribution Planning (see exclusion below), Real-
                                    Time Sales and Operations Planning, Demand Management, Demand Planning,
                                    Inventory Optimization, Global Order Promising, Collaborative Planning, Advanced
                                    Planning Command Center, and Service Parts Planning.

                                    Specific capabilities not supported in this configuration are:
                                         •     Advanced Supply Chain Planning − Oracle Transportation Management
                                               Integration
                                         •     Distribution Planning − release of cancel requisition recommendations
                                         •     Service Parts Planning − integration to Spares Management
                                         •     Service Parts Planning − integration to Depot Repair



          3.2.      Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center
                    3.2.1.          Product Overview

                                    Most supply chain planning processes, considered in their entirety, consist of multiple
                                    decision-making sub-processes often performed by different groups that are chained
                                    together. For example, a typical sales and operations planning cycle consists of
                                    forecasting performed by different lines of business such as sales, marketing, finance and
                                    manufacturing and distribution, a consensus demand review, inventory planning and
                                    review, supply planning and review, and executive review. These sub-processes may be
                                    supported by different underlying supply chain planning applications (Demand
                                    Management, Inventory Optimization, Strategic Network Optimization, Service Parts
                                    Planning and Advanced Supply Chain Planning.) The overall planning processes are
                                    difficult to orchestrate because the planning data required are buried in multiple
                                    underlying supply chain planning applications and because the human stakeholders come
                                    from multiple organizations.

                                    Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center is a new product that pulls together
                                    planning outputs from multiple E-Business Suite supply chain planning applications and
                                    makes them available for reporting and analysis within a unified user interface based on
                                    Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition (OBIEE). The planning outputs are
                                    viewable via seeded role-based dashboards, and are also accessible to custom OBIEE
                                    reports and dashboards constructed by the user. Seeded dashboards support the Sales and
                                    Operations Planning and Supply Chain Plan Analysis business processes.


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                                  Collections     3
Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center offers an extensive list of web services that
                                    decompose Oracle Advanced Planning capabilities into atomic functional pieces (for
                                    example, run collections, generate a statistical forecast, run a supply chain plan, archive
                                    a plan.) These web services are leveraged by seeded Oracle Business Process Execution
                                    Language (BPEL) processes that can be used out of the box to automate Sales and
                                    Operations Planning and Forecast, Inventory and Supply Planning business flows. Users
                                    can also create an infinite variety of custom BPEL processes to automate and orchestrate
                                    their specific in-house planning flows (for example, hub and spoke planning).

                                    Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center provides extensive plan and scenario
                                    comparison capabilities. It also allows you to assign manual activities required for the
                                    evaluation and execution of alternative business scenarios and monitor and orchestrate
                                    the completion of those activities.

                                    Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center provides:

                                         •     a robust reporting and analysis framework for supply chain planning;

                                         •     the ability to automate, orchestrate, monitor and review the result of complex,
                                               inter-organizational and inter-disciplinary planning processes that span multiple
                                               supply chain planning applications (including external applications).

                    3.2.2.          Release 12.1.1

                                    3.2.2.1. Sales and Operations Planning Dashboard
                                    The Sales and Operations Planning Dashboard included with Advanced Planning
                                    Command Center provides all participants in the Sales and Operations Planning process
                                    with interactive access to summary and detailed data required when executing the
                                    demand review, supply review and executive review phases of an S&OP cycle.

                                    The Demand Review page answers questions such as:
                                         •     How have my sales, marketing, manufacturing/distribution, financial, and
                                               consensus forecasts changed over time?
                                         •     Is our backlog increasing?
                                         •     How are we tracking to forecast?
                                    The Supply Review page answers questions such as:
                                         •     Are we supply constrained?
                                         •     Where are our resource constraints?
                                         •     Are we producing to plan?
                                    The Executive Review page answers questions such as:
                                         •     Are we on plan financially?
                                         •     For which product categories are we revenue targets?
                                    Dashboard level reports provide easy comparison of S&OP scenarios.

                                    Reports in the Sales and Operations Planning Dashboard drill directly into underlying
                                    Demantra Real-Time Sales and Operations Planning worksheets, Advanced Supply
                                    Chain Planning (ASCP) plans and Strategic Network Optimization (SNO) plans for
                                    seamless extended analysis.



Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document              Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center   4
The following reports are available at the page level in the Sales and Operations
                                    Planning Dashboard:

                                    Executive Review
                                         •     Executive Summary
                                         •     Consolidated Analysis
                                         •     Profit and Loss
                                         •     Constrained Forecast Comparison
                                         •     Cumulative Budget Tracking
                                         •     Key Performance Indicators
                                         •     Forecast Accuracy
                                         •     Customer Service
                                         •     Inventory and Production KPI
                                         •     Top Difference - Operating Plan and Budget by Category
                                         •     Profitability KPI
                                         •     Cost Breakdown KPI
                                    Demand Review
                                         •     Forecast Comparison
                                         •     Forecast Accuracy
                                         •     Projected Backlog
                                         •     Top Forecast Attainment by Category
                                         •     Forecast – Scenario Comparison
                                         •     Top Abs Diff – Consensus Forecast and Budget by Category
                                         •     Consensus Forecast Difference by Customer
                                         •     Consensus Forecast Difference by Customer
                                    Supply Review
                                         •     Consolidated Analysis
                                         •     Demand Fill
                                         •     Production to Plan by Organization
                                         •     Production Plan
                                         •     Top Resource Utilization
                                         •     Top Supplier Capacity Utilization
                                         •     Consolidated Analysis – Scenario Comparison
                                         •     Bottom Demand Fill % by Customer
                                         •     Supply Change by Category
                                         •     Production Plan Comparison by Organization

                                    3.2.2.2. Supply Chain Analyst Dashboard
                                    The Supply Chain Analyst (SCA) Dashboard included with Advanced Planning
                                    Command Center provides easy access to summary and trend data for Advanced Supply
                                    Chain Planning and Strategic Network Optimization plans. It enables easy comparisons
                                    between plans.

                                    The SCA Dashboard has the following pages and reports:

                                    Plan Health
                                         •     shipment and production trends
                                         •     demand and supply summary
                                         •     resource summary

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document          Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center   5
•     exceptions summary
                                    Demand and Supply
                                         •     demand and supply summary
                                         •     demand change by customer
                                         •     supply change by category
                                         •     demand and supply trends
                                         •     demand by customer
                                         •     supply by category
                                    Resources
                                         •     resource summary
                                         •     most utilized resources
                                         •     least utilized resources
                                         •     resources with most change in utilization
                                         •     resource utilization trend
                                    Exceptions
                                         •     demand exceptions summary
                                         •     inventory exceptions summary
                                         •     alternate exceptions summary
                                         •     reschedule exceptions summary
                                         •     resource exceptions summary
                                         •     exceptions summary by category
                                         •     exceptions summary by organization
                                    Historical Performance
                                         •     key supply chain performance metrics (shipments to plan, production to plan,
                                               resource utilization, inventory value, days of cover)
                                         •     supply chain metrics trend
                                    Scenario Analysis

                                         •     This page is similar to the Plan Health page. It allows you to compare demand
                                               and supply summary information, resource information, and exceptions across
                                               scenarios instead of across plans. (A scenario is a grouping of plans whose
                                               results should be added together and viewed as a whole.)

                                    3.2.2.3. Analytical Framework
                                    APCC provides a central Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition (OBIEE)-based
                                    repository that automatically pulls plan data from a wide cross-section of Advanced
                                    Planning applications (Demand Management, Real-Time Sales and Operations Planning,
                                    Advanced Supply Chain Planning, Inventory Optimization and Strategic Network
                                    Optimization), as well as execution data (orders, shipments, inventory, WIP completions,
                                    etc.) from Oracle E-Business Suite. APCC contains more than 200 measures (both stored
                                    measures that are read into APCC and measures such as costed inventory that are
                                    derived), rationalized against a consistent set of dimensions. More than 20 dimensions
                                    are seeded.

                                    The APCC analytical framework repository allows completely user-configurable
                                    reporting against Advanced Planning data, serves as the foundation for the seeded Sales
                                    and Operations Planning and Supply Chain Analyst Dashboards, and allows you to view


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document            Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center   6
data from multiple underlying Advanced Planning applications simultaneously in a
                                    unified interface.

                                    3.2.2.4. Scenario Management
                                    You can group multiple plans of different types together into a scenario, and then use
                                    that scenario to group and filter data in APCC dashboards and reports. Typical scenarios
                                    might be: a Demantra Demand Management consensus forecast, an Inventory
                                    Optimization plan, and an Advanced Supply Chain Planning plan that together evaluate a
                                    sales and operations planning scenario; or one "hub" and a number of "spoke" ASCP
                                    plans whose outputs need to be fused together to provide visibility to planning results for
                                    the entire supply chain.

                                    Scenario Sets are groupings of related scenarios (for example, alternate supply/demand
                                    scenarios being evaluated within a particular sales and operations planning cycle). You
                                    can also use scenario sets to group and filter data in APCC dashboards and reports.

                                    3.2.2.5. Supply Chain Planning Web Services
                                    Many key Advanced Planning functions have now been made accessible via web
                                    services. These web services are callable from user-defined Business Process Execution
                                    Language (BPEL) flows, and therefore permit limitless automation of supply chain
                                    planning business flows.

                                    The specific web services that have been enabled are:
                                         •     Check concurrent program status
                                         •     Launch ASCP and Demantra batch collections
                                         •     Global Order Promising
                                         •     Launch plan management batch processes such as copy/purge plans
                                         •     Launch Strategic Network Optimization batch processes
                                         •     Manage planning process scenarios
                                         •     Launch Service Parts Planning batch processes
                                         •     Launch Inventory Optimization batch processes
                                         •     Launch Distribution Planning batch processes
                                         •     Launch Advanced Supply Chain Planning batch processes
                                         •     Upload external data into APS (forecasts, safety stock, planned supply)
                                         •     Launch Demantra process (launch Demantra workflow, assign alternative name
                                               to Demantra scenario in planning server)

                                    3.2.2.6. Seeded BPEL Processes
                                    Two seeded BPEL processes take leverage the supply chain planning web services
                                    offered by APCC to automate and orchestrate key supply chain planning flows.

                                    The Forecast, Inventory, and Supply Planning BPEL process automates a sequence of
                                    running collections, generating a forecast in Demantra Demand Management (DM),
                                    running an Inventory Optimization (IO) plan utilizing the DM output as input, running an
                                    Advanced Supply Chain Planning plan using the DM and IO plan outputs as input.

                                    The Sales and Operations Planning BPEL process runs collections, creates financial
                                    forecast review, sales forecast review, marketing forecast review, and demand forecast
                                    review activities and assigns them to key stakeholders, uploads the consensus forecast
                                    from Demantra Real-Time Sales & Operations Planning (RT S&OP) to the planning


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document          Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center   7
server, runs a Strategic Network Optimization (SNO) plan with the RT S&OP consensus
                                    forecast as input, pulls the SNO constrained forecast/production plan output back into
                                    RT S&OP, then creates consensus demand review and executive review activities and
                                    assigns them to the appropriate stakeholders.

                                    3.2.2.7. Process Automation
                                    You can create planning processes and attach to them seeded or custom BPEL processes.
                                    Planning processes allow you to launch or halt associated BPEL processes, to enable
                                    completely flexible planning automation. The Planning Process user interface allows you
                                    to specify input parameters such as plan names to the underlying BPEL processes, see
                                    the key steps of the underlying BPEL process, assign process steps to owners, and
                                    monitor the progress of the BPEL process as it runs.

                                    3.2.2.8. Activity Management
                                    Process automation steps can be assigned to individuals using the Planning Process user
                                    interface. Such assignments become system activities with owning individuals. You can
                                    also assign arbitrary manual activities to individuals, optionally tied to a scenario or
                                    scenario set. Activities support file attachments, to allow more complete descriptions of
                                    required steps or inclusion of supplemental information. Assigned activities can be
                                    updated with progress status by the assignees and can be flexibly queried within the
                                    APCC Activities screen for monitoring purposes. Planners working with APCC
                                    dashboards and reports benefit from an iBot that informs them of open activities assigned
                                    to them. They can drill from a display of activities in the APCC reporting layer directly
                                    into the APCC Activities screen for further detail. APCC thus provides a comprehensive
                                    way to stay on top of all the system and manual activities needed to complete complex
                                    supply chain planning processes and scenario evaluations.

                    3.2.3.          Release 12.1.2

                                    3.2.3.1. Compatibility with 11.5.10 Planning Server
                                    Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center Release 12.1.2 supports, through a
                                    Collections backward compatibility patch, the configuration where the Planning Server
                                    (where all the other APS modules are on) is 11.5.10, the source Oracle eBusiness Suite is
                                    also on 11.5.10 and only the Advanced Planning Command Center is on 12.1.2.) The
                                    deployment configuration is as shown below.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document         Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center   8
APS Operational Data Store
                                                                                                         11.5.10




                                                                                  APS 11.5.10
                                                                                                   Oracle Demantra 7.1/7.2


                                                                                                   Advanced Supply Chain
                                                                                                      Planning 11.5.10

                                                                                                                                     Out-of-box
                                                                                                                                     Integration.
                                        Multiple EBS (11.5.10)
                                       Multiple EBS (11.5.10)             Collect into both                                          User Option
                                        or Legacy instances               instances                                                  at Plan
                                       or Legacy instances                                                                           launch to
                                                                                                                                     “push”




                                                                                  APS 12.1
                                                                                                  APS Operational Data Store
                                                                                                            12.1

                                                                                                      Advanced Planning
                                                                                                     Command Center 12.1



                                    This deployment configuration will be subject to the following specific limitations.
                                    1. No Contextual Drilldowns from the Dashboards into the planning applications. This
                                       will be available only in the configuration where the planning server is upgraded to
                                       12.1.2 and APCC is deployed in the same instance.
                                    2. Need to collect into both APCC and APS instances. However, collections into APCC
                                       is only required for dimension keys. So the collection frequency could be less for
                                       APCC.
                                    3. No support for Strategic Network Optimization in APCC.
                                    4. The New Planning Web Services and BPEL Processes in APCC instance (in
                                       “Processes” tab in Advanced Planning Scenario Manager) cannot use Plans and
                                       Forecasts from APS 11.5.10 even if they are published to APCC. But users can still
                                       build scenarios from these plans and forecasts from 11.5.10.

                                    3.2.3.2. Integration to Third Party Planning Systems
                                    You can now deploy APCC against third party planning systems. The APCC OBIEE fact
                                    repository can be loaded either via a new flat file (.csv) upload user interface, or via a
                                    new Import Plan Summary concurrent program.

                                    3.2.3.3. Ability to Run APCC Standalone
                                    For 11.5.10 and R12.1.2 customers, APCC now provides a complete, out-of-box
                                    integration to a separate, standalone 12.1.2 APCC instance. The key
                                    assumptions/limitations here are:
                                         1. All dimensions are collected (or loaded using legacy uploads) into the APCC
                                            instance.
                                         2. The EBS source instance setups (including instance codes) are identical in the
                                            11.5.10 and 12.1.2 instances.
                                         3. The drill-downs into other applications (Advanced Supply Chain Planning /
                                            Inventory Optimization / Demand Management) will not work.
                                         4. This will be made available only for Demand Management, Advanced Supply
                                            Chain Planning and Inventory Optimization.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                         Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center         9
3.2.3.4. Rich User Interface Enhancements
                                    APCC incorporates new rich user interface capabilities of E-Business Suite 12.1.2. These
                                    include a redesigned applications home page with more efficient navigation, multi-level
                                    navigation menus with saved favorites, "look-ahead" lists of values that automatically
                                    complete partial user entries, and inline file attachments for process activities.

                    3.2.4.          Release 12.1.3

                                    3.2.4.1. Analysis of Inventory and Service Levels
                                    The current Supply Chain Analyst (SCA) dashboard in APCC has been enhanced with
                                    new measures and related reports to support Inventory Analysis workflows. The
                                    following new reports are included in a new tab in the SCA dashboard.
                                         o     Inventory Performance Summary
                                         o     Top N – Service Level Short Fall by Category
                                         o     Top N - Inventory Value
                                         o     Safety Stock – Postponement Analysis
                                         o     Inventory Measures Trend
                                         o     Inventory Measures Trend by Category-Organization
                                    Some of the new measures introduced as part of this include the following:
                                         o     Safety Stock (Days)
                                         o     Percent Safety Stock - Demand Variability
                                         o     Percent Safety Stock - Supplier Lead Time Variability
                                         o     Percent Safety Stock - Manufacturing Lead Time Variability
                                         o     Percent Safety Stock - Transportation Lead Time Variability

                                    3.2.4.2. Analysis of Excess and Obsolescence
                                    The current Supply Chain Analyst (SCA) dashboard in APCC has been enhanced with
                                    new measures and related reports to support analysis of Excess and Obselete inventory.
                                    The following new reports are included in the SCA dashboard.
                                         o     Excess and Obsolescence Summary
                                         o     Excess Details
                                         o     Obsolescence Details
                                         o     Excess Details across Plans
                                         o     Obsolescence Details across Plans
                                    Some of the new measures introduced as part of this include the following:
                                         o     Demand within Obsolescence horizon
                                         o     Demand within Excess Horizon
                                         o     Excess On-order in units and value in multiple currencies
                                         o     Excess On-hand in units and value in multiple currencies
                                         o     Obsolete On-order in units and value in multiple currencies
                                         o     Obsolete On-hand in units and value in multiple currencies
                                         o     Total Excess in units and value in multiple currencies
                                         o     Total Obsolescence in units and value in multiple currencies

                                    3.2.4.3. Enhanced Sales and Operations Planning Dashboard
                                    The Sales and Operations Planning (S&OP) dashboard is enhanced to include the
                                    following new measures:
                                         o     Shipment history - Lag by 52 week

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document            Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center   10
o     Operating Plan
                                         o     Financial Forecast
                                    In addition, the existing reports have been updated with new usability enhancements and
                                    new navigations to more drill-down reports. Also, a new tab called Financial Review has
                                    been added with the following reports
                                         o     Financial Summary
                                         o     Operating Plan and Financial Forecast Comparison
                                         o     Top % Difference - Operating Plan and Budget by Category
                                         o     Financial Trend Analysis
                                         o     Profit & Loss Monthly
                                         o     Margin Difference by Category
                                         o     Year-over-Year Financials
                                         o     Financial Forecast and Budget Comparison
                                         o     Top % Difference - Budget and Annual Plan by Organization
                                         o     Top Revenue
                                         o     Cost by Organization
                                         o     Bottom Margin
                                         o     Profitability KPI
                                         o     Cost Breakdown KPI
                                    This new Financial Review page enables planners and executives to answer questions
                                    like:
                                         o     Are we on plan financially?
                                         o     How are product categories performing financially?
                                         o     What has changed financially since last fiscal quarter/month?
                                         o     How/Where/Why has profitability changed?
                                         o     Is there any need to revise financial forecast?

                                    3.2.4.4. Supply Chain Risk Management Dashboard
                                    The Supply Chain Risk Management (SCRM) dashboard is a new dashboard and enables
                                    users to review and compare key metrics in a single interface, providing true Enterprise
                                    Planning capabilities to the SCRM discipline.

                                    It enables executives and planners to answer questions like:
                                         o     What is the impact to my margins if there is a sudden drop in demand?
                                         o     When do I return to profitability?
                                         o     What is the cost difference between sourcing strategies in the event of the
                                               demand drop?
                                         o     What impact does increased lead times have on my inventory strategy?
                                         o     What is the impact of off-shoring to my Total Delivered Cost?
                                         o     What is the impact of off-shoring to my Margins?
                                    The following new measures are introduced as part of this feature:
                                         o     Facility Startup/Shutdown Costs
                                         o     Fixed Costs
                                         o     Count of Sources
                                         o     Carrying Cost without Postponement
                                         o     Safety Stock without Postponement
                                         o     Inventory Budget
                                         o     Product Miles
                                    The dashboard contains four different tabs - Executive Review, Inventory Analysis,
                                    Supply Chain Sourcing and Glossary.

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document            Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center   11
3.2.4.5. Revenue Gap Analysis
                                    This feature enables Supply Chain Analysts and Sales and Operations Planners to do
                                    additional reporting and analysis to close gaps between the current shipment rate and the
                                    revenue targets established as part of the sales and operations plan. This is most critical
                                    as the end of a period or quarter approaches and gaps remain.

                                    The Supply Chain Analyst (SCA) dashboard has been enhanced to add the following
                                    reports in the Scenario analysis tab:
                                         o     Backlog Analysis – Units & Value
                                         o     Bookings Performance – Units & Value
                                         o     Current Shipment Plan
                                         o     Demand and Supply Summary
                                         o     Demand Utilization – Units & Value
                                         o     Demand Utilization Split – Baseline Plan
                                         o     Left to Book - By Quarter
                                         o     Sales Order Analysis – Units & Value
                                         o     Shipment Performance – Units & Value
                                         o     Supply Utilization – Units & Value
                                    The Sales and Operations Planning (S&OP) dashboard has also been enhanced to add /
                                    modify the following reports:
                                         o     Current Shipment Plan
                                         o     Supply Summary

                                    3.2.4.6. Collaboration Workspaces for Unstructured Collaboration
                                    This feature lets users to quickly band into ad-hoc, virtual groups for specific planning
                                    tasks and allows those groups to share structured and unstructured content. Each group
                                    has access to a single, flexible portal-like user interface that brings together components
                                    of various planning applications and the a variety of collaboration tools.

                                    These collaborative group spaces support customized Worklists, Group Calendars,
                                    Documents, Discussions, Tags, Issues and Notes. In addition, the group space home page
                                    has navigation links to applications such as Rapid Planning and Sales and Operations
                                    Planning, and to APCC dashboards.

                                    Each group space is linked to a Scenario created in Advanced Planning Command Center
                                    and users can choose to auto-create a group space when a scenario is created.

                                    3.2.4.7. Enhanced Exceptions Analysis
                                    The Supply Chain Analyst Dashboard has been enhanced to include additional measures
                                    and reports in support of improved exception analysis. Two new reports have been added
                                    as part of this feature:
                                         o     Item Exceptions Summary
                                         o     Resource Exceptions Summary
                                    In addition to the above, the following reports have been enhanced with additional
                                    page/report filters:
                                         o     Demand Exceptions Summary
                                         o     Inventory Exceptions Summary
                                         o     Alternate Exceptions Summary
                                         o     Resource Exceptions Summary

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document           Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center   12
o     Reschedules Exceptions Summary
                                         o     Exception Summary by Category
                                         o     Exception Summary by Organization

                                    3.2.4.8. Integration with Rapid Planning
                                    Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center now offers pre-built integration with Rapid
                                    Planning. Rapid Planning plans can be archived and published to Advanced Planning
                                    Command Center. These archived versions can then be viewed in all related reports and
                                    dashboards.

                                    The Advanced Planning Command Center’s Supply Chain Analyst dashboard supports
                                    drill-down directly into the Rapid Planning application.

                                    All Rapid Planning simulation plans can be used in the Process Automation functionality
                                    to build process flows in Advanced Planning Command Center.

                                    3.2.4.9. Plan Versus Collected Data Comparison
                                    Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center now offers a view of key supply and
                                    demand measures based on the latest transaction data collected into the Operational Data
                                    Store. These measures are available in the Supply Chain Analyst Dashboard under the
                                    plan name of "Collections". Users can compare them with Plans to get insights into the
                                    variances between what is in a Plan (including changes introduced due to plan
                                    recommendations and user changes) and the latest real-time transactional data. An
                                    example of this type of analysis may include a comparison of expected receipts of
                                    material in the next few weeks based on the Plan versus what is currently in the
                                    execution system (as brought over to Value Chain Planning via Collections).

                    3.2.5.          Release 12.1.3.2

                                    3.2.5.1. New Dimension – End Item
                                    This is a new one-level dimension that enables users to build reports for analysis by the
                                    Finished Good items as derived from the pegging generated in an ASCP plan. This
                                    feature is available for ASCP plans only, and is enabled for the following two measures
                                    only:

                                         •     Order Quantity

                                         •     Total Supply

                                    Using the Order Quantity measure and the Order Type filter, users can analyze all
                                    upstream component supplies (such as On Hand, Shipment Receipts, Purchase Orders,
                                    and Planned Orders) and see the breakdown by End Items (Finished Goods) that are
                                    driving the component demand.

                                    This dimension is available in the seeded Advanced Planning Catalog. There are no new
                                    seeded reports that use this new dimension.

                                    Note: This dimension is enabled only when the profile option "MSC: Enable Model and
                                    End Item Dimensions in APCC" is set to Yes.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document          Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center   13
3.2.5.2. New Dimension – Parent Model
                                    This is a new one-level dimension that enables users to build reports for analysis of
                                    Options in ATO models by the Parent Model based on forecast explosion in an ASCP
                                    Plan. This feature is available in ASCP plans only, and is enabled for the following two
                                    measures only:

                                         •     Order Quantity

                                         •     Total Supply

                                    Using the Order Quantity measure and the Order Type filter, users can analyze all option
                                    supplies (such as On Hand, Shipment Receipts, Purchase Orders, and Planned Orders)
                                    and see the breakdown by Parent ATO Models that are driving this option demand.

                                    This dimension is available in the seeded Advanced Planning Catalog. There are no new
                                    seeded reports that use this new dimension.

                                    In the case where the Options are manufactured assemblies, even their components will
                                    have the break-up by the Parent Model so that end users can analyze all upstream
                                    components and understand the source of their demand by viewing the break-up by the
                                    Parent Model.

                                    Note: This dimension is enabled only for those options and key components that are
                                    assigned to a special category set. The name of the category set is based on the profile
                                    option "MSC: APCC Key Component Category Set."

                                    Note: This dimension is enabled only when the profile option "MSC: Enable Model &
                                    End Item dimensions in APCC" is set to Yes.

                    3.2.6.          Release 12.2

                                    3.2.6.1. Plan-specific Forecasting Measures
                                    This feature enables all forecasting measures (not just Consensus Forecast) from
                                    Demantra Demand Management and Demantra Real-time Sales and Operations Planning
                                    to be analyzed in Advanced Planning Command Center, striped by “Demand Plan”.
                                    Users can analyze, compare or finally purge these plans like any other supply plan. This
                                    enhances the analysis that users can do in APCC, as it is now possible to easily compare
                                    sales forecast, projected backlog, and financial forecast measures across scenarios.

                                    You can provide a plan name as a parameter in the new Demantra workflow processes
                                    called “Publish S&OP-APCC Measures” (for RT S&OP) and “Publish DM-APCC
                                    Measures” (for DM). These serve the same purpose as the current workflow “Export
                                    OBI-EE Data” and the concurrent program “Assign Plan Name.”

                                    3.2.6.2. Custom Series from Demantra DM and RT S&OP
                                    You can configure the integration data profiles in Demantra to publish custom series
                                    created in either DM or RT S&OP to APCC. By default, this feature collects any 15
                                    measures (10 forecasting measures and 5 historical measures) that you choose. You can
                                    alter the mix or add more measures by running a new concurrent program, “Collect
                                    Demantra customization information to APCC”. The selected series must not have any
                                    complex calculations or client expressions in Demantra.

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document          Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center   14
3.2.6.3. Support for Custom Demantra Product Hierarchy
                                    You can now bring an additional product hierarchy from Demantra into APCC. For
                                    example, the product category hierarchy available in APCC as default is a two-level
                                    hierarchy. You can now create a new four-level hierarchy such as “Item < Product
                                    SubGroup < Product Group < Product Line” in Demantra and easily bring it into APCC
                                    for use in analysis. This is limited to one custom product hierarchy and supports a
                                    maximum of 10 levels.

                                    You must set the profile “MSC: Additional Demantra Item Hierarchy in APCC” to the
                                    name of the hierarchy in Demantra and then run the standard “Refresh APCC
                                    Materialized Views” concurrent program to make that custom hierarchy available in
                                    APCC. None of the seeded reports or dashboards use this custom hierarchy.

                                    3.2.6.4. Integration with Distribution Planning
                                    In Release 12.2, DRP plans can be published to Advanced Planning Command Center.
                                    This will enable DRP users to leverage APCC to analyze DRP plans through custom
                                    reports and dashboards. The concurrent program “Archive Plan Summary” will now
                                    support DRP plan types. There is no automatic publish of DRP plans to APCC at the
                                    time of DRP plan launch. Only the following DRP plan measures will be published to
                                    APCC:
                                         •     Order Quantity (all DRP order types)
                                         •     Exception Count (all DRP exception types)
                                         •     Exception Quantity/Value (reporting/functional currencies)
                                         •     Inventory Turns
                                         •     Scheduled Receipts
                                         •     On Hand
                                         •     Carrying Cost (reporting/functional currencies)
                                         •     Purchasing Cost (reporting/functional currencies)
                                         •     Total Supply Chain Cost (reporting/functional currencies)
                                         •     Revenues (reporting/functional currencies)
                                         •     Gross Margin (reporting/functional currencies)
                                         •     Gross Margin %
                                         •     Total Supply
                                         •     Total Demand
                                         •     Projected Available Balance (units, value and days of supply)
                                         •     Fill Rate
                                    The following measures are specific to DRP plans and will also be published to APCC:
                                         •     Maximum Inventory Level (Units)
                                         •     Maximum Inventory Level (Days of Supply)
                                         •     Target Inventory Level (Units)
                                         •     Target Inventory Level (Days of Supply)
                                    The seeded reports and dashboards in APCC are not designed for DRP plans or scenarios
                                    with DRP plans. You should build custom reports or dashboards for analyzing DRP
                                    plans. You can also use the spreadsheet file upload capabilities to load DRP plan data
                                    into APCC.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document           Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center   15
3.3.      Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning
                    3.3.1.          Release 12.1.1

                                    3.3.1.1. Oracle Transportation Management Integration
                                    Most planning systems have no visibility to delays in transportation and their impact to
                                    manufacturing utilization or customer service. With this release ASCP will:

                                         •     Leverage Oracle Transportation Management (OTM) Supply Chain Event
                                               Management to obtain real-time, projected material arrival dates

                                         •     Provide a Business Process Execution Language (BPEL) process and associated
                                               web services to consume events and generate planning exceptions to provide
                                               planners real time visibility to transportation delays

                                         •     Use the updated dates in ASCP interactive planning calculations to calculate the
                                               impact of transportation delays on downstream orders and take corrective action

                                    3.3.1.2. Optimization Enhancements
                                    Oracle ASCP enables planners to efficiently manage many products and supply chain
                                    locations by intelligently selecting alternate sources, manufacturing processes, bills of
                                    material, and substitute items. With this release, ASCP's automated decision-making
                                    capabilities have been enhanced in the following ways.

                                         3.3.1.2.1. Day-Level Planning

                                         A new "day-level" planning mode allows ASCP to automate the selection of
                                         alternates while generating planning results at the day level of granularity. This
                                         planning mode skips the final detailed scheduling solution phase that is now
                                         undertaken with any constrained or optimized plan run. For customers for whom
                                         day-level planning results are sufficiently detailed, this is a way to run plans in a
                                         shorter amount of time than was previously possible (due to the fact that the final
                                         detailed scheduling phase is skipped).

                                         3.3.1.2.2. More Accurate Offloading to Alternates

                                         It is often desired to offload to alternate sources or processes only once a primary
                                         source or process runs out of capacity. ASCP now does a more accurate job of
                                         offloading: it offloads primary sources and processes more fully before offloading to
                                         alternates, and planning results show fewer instances of primary source/process
                                         overloading before offloading to alternates.

                                    3.3.1.3. Contiguous Processing
                                    In the process industries, many products need to be processed contiguously from raw
                                    materials to finished goods, because intermediate products may be unstable or because
                                    intermediate products are transported from process to process without any provision for
                                    storage in between.

                                    With this release, ASCP respects Oracle Process Manufacturing standard and max delays
                                    between routings. This allows you to cap the maximum time duration between upstream


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document               Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning   16
and downstream make supplies and enforce contiguous processing. You can also enforce
                                    a minimum (standard) delay between make supplies in order to accurately reflect
                                    processing constraints such as cool-down periods.

                                    3.3.1.4. Minimum Remaining Shelf Life
                                    Products such as groceries and pharmaceuticals have limited shelf lives. Customers of
                                    such products typically impose rules that dictate that when such products arrive at the
                                    customer site, they must have a certain minimum duration of remaining shelf life, so that
                                    there will be enough time for the end consumer to buy and use the products. ASCP now
                                    supports minimum remaining shelf life (MRSL) constraints specified at the item-
                                    organization, item-customer site and sales order levels. Item-organization and item-
                                    customer site-level MRSLs are specified via item attribute simulation sets. Sales order-
                                    level MRSLs can only be entered via customization that populates a new column in the
                                    MSC_SALES_ORDERS table on the planning server.

                                    3.3.1.5. Distribution Planning Scalability Enhancements
                                    Distribution enterprises often need to manage large numbers of locations and items: the
                                    number of locations may be in the thousands; the number of items at each location may
                                    be in the tens of thousands or more. Planning in such an environment requires a focus on
                                    scalability.

                                    With this release, Distribution Planning incorporates the following scalability
                                    enhancements. First, the phase of planning that calculates the independent and dependent
                                    demands at each distribution location and allocates scarce supply to those demands has
                                    been made multi-process, in order to take advantage of the parallelization capabilities of
                                    multi-processor hardware configurations. Such a configuration can either be a single
                                    planning server with multiple processors, or multiple servers logically linked together via
                                    Real Application Clusters. The partitioning of the distribution planning problem into
                                    pieces that can be solved in parallel is done automatically.

                                    In conjunction with the above change, the load consolidation phase of Distribution
                                    Planning has been decoupled from the demand push-down and supply allocation phase
                                    mentioned above and is now also done concurrently in a multi-process fashion.
                                    Functionally, this may reduce how well Distribution Planning is able to consolidate loads
                                    relative to its base behavior in Release 12, because the consolidation calculations in
                                    downstream supply chain layers now no longer factor in the consolidation outputs from
                                    upstream layers. This is a trade-off that the user optionally makes for the sake of better
                                    performance.

                                    The above behavior is optional, and is enabled via profile options.

                                    3.3.1.6. End Item Substitution Enhancements
                                    Use-up of on hand inventory is critical to controlling storage and obsolescence costs at
                                    many companies. One way in which ASCP helps in this regards is to recommend the use
                                    of available substitute item supplies when the demanded item is not on hand. Prior to this
                                    release, such end-item substitution recommendations made by ASCP could not be
                                    automatically released back and implemented in Order Management. With this release,
                                    the ASCP sales order release process has been enhanced to support the passing back of
                                    ASCP substitute item recommendations back to the associated sales orders in Order
                                    Management.


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document             Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning   17
ASCP also supports an option to recognize explicitly modeled item substitution
                                    relationships only and thus turn off the inference of chained substitutions. If Item B is a
                                    substitute for Item A, and Item C is a substitute for Item B, it is now possible to
                                    configure ASCP to not infer that Item C is a substitute for Item A.

                                    When searching for end-item substitute supplies, ASCP can optionally search for them in
                                    ascending order of substitution relationship date effectivity. This provides a mechanism
                                    for dictating the item order of ASCP's search for end-item substitutes.

                                    This capability is not supported for R12.0.x source instances. It is supported for R12.1.1
                                    and 11i10 source instances.

                                    3.3.1.7. Production Schedules as Inputs
                                    You can now publish planned orders directly from Production Scheduling into an ASCP
                                    plan. Planned orders scheduled in PS come into ASCP as firm planned orders. This
                                    allows ASCP plans to remain consistent with short-term scheduling decisions made in
                                    PS.

                                    3.3.1.8. Safety Lead Time
                                    In lieu of generating supplies to meet target safety stock quantities, ASCP now offers the
                                    option of hedging against uncertain demand by generating supplies to meet demands
                                    ahead of time. The amount of time that demands are met ahead of time is the "safety lead
                                    time", and is specified via the Safety Stock Percent item attribute (100% per one day of
                                    safety lead time). This feature is turned on via the MSO: Use Safety Lead Time profile
                                    option.

                                    3.3.1.9. Customization of Horizontal Plan
                                    ASCP supports the ability to customize the row labels and numbers displayed in the
                                    horizontal plan. One typical application of this capability is to display demands and
                                    supplies in alternate units of measure.

                                    A new custom row in the horizontal plan allows a user to display a custom order type
                                    (for example, Projected Available Balance Dollar Value) and label it appropriately. The
                                    custom row can be selectively displayed, by user or by preference. The logic to calculate
                                    custom order type data values must be provided by the user via a custom PL/SQL
                                    program unit that is pointed to by the profile option MSC: Horizontal Plan Extension
                                    Program. The same mechanism can be used to customize data values in standard rows of
                                    the horizontal plan.

                                    3.3.1.10. Supply Tolerancing Enhancements
                                    In the process industries, process variability often creates supply output quantities that
                                    vary about a nominal amount. For example, a "10,000 pound" coil of aluminum sheet
                                    may actually come out to be 9,950 pounds or 10,035 pounds. The planning requirements
                                    are to be able to tolerate minor discrepancies between demand and supply so as to
                                    prevent unnecessary production and impractical supply splits. For example, a demand for
                                    10,000 pounds should be considered to be satisfied completely by a 9,950 pound coil.
                                    When the same demand is satisfied with a 10,035 pound coil, planning should not
                                    recommend that the extra 35 pounds be split off to be used to satisfy other demands.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document              Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning   18
ASCP supports the concept of supply tolerancing through Shortage Tolerance and
                                    Excess Tolerance Percent pegging controls that dictate when demands and supplies are
                                    considered to be fully pegged. In the example with the 9,950 pound coil above, ASCP
                                    will still generate a recommendation for an extra 10,000 pound coil to cover the supply
                                    deficit, but will peg that supply to excess so that it is moved to the end of the planning
                                    horizon. This prevents the planner from accidentally releasing unneeded work to the
                                    production floor.

                                    Supply tolerancing support where Shortage and Excess Tolerance Percentages are input
                                    as global profile option values is existing capability. New with this release is the ability
                                    for the user to optionally specify Shortage and Excess Tolerance Percentages (via
                                    customization) at the item-organization level in the staging table
                                    MSC_ST_SYSTEM_ITEMS. If these values are populated, ASCP will look at these
                                    staging table values in lieu of the profile option values.

                                    Also new is ASCP's ability to delay the satisfaction of 'small' demands until sufficient
                                    outstanding demand has accumulated to warrant the production of a standard-sized batch.
                                    'Small' is defined to be a percentage of the Fixed Lot Multiple order modifier. This
                                    percentage can be entered (via customization) in the planner server table
                                    MSC_SYSTEM_ITEMS.

                                    3.3.1.11. Buy Order Processing Lead Time Backward Compatibility
                                    In 11i9 the processing lead time for buy planned orders was offset based on the org
                                    manufacturing calendar. Starting in 11i10, the processing lead time for buy planned
                                    orders was offset based on the Supplier Capacity Calendar, if it was assigned on the
                                    Approved Supplier List. Otherwise the processing lead time was offset based on a 24x7
                                    calendar. In order to preserve behavior compatibility with 11i9 for customers who may
                                    have set their buy item processing lead times assuming org manufacturing calendar
                                    offsetting and are upgrading from 11i9 to R12.1.1, a new profile option MSC: Buy Order
                                    Processing Lead Time Calendar allows you to either revert back to the 11i9 behavior
                                    (when it is set to 'Org Manufacturing Calendar') or use the 11i10 behavior (when it is set
                                    to 'Supplier Capacity Calendar').

                    3.3.2.          Release 12.1.2

                                    3.3.2.1. Release Recommendations for Internal Requisitions
                                    You can now release reschedule in, reschedule out, and cancellation recommendations
                                    for internal requisitions. Previously, Oracle Purchasing did not support changes to an
                                    internal requisition after the corresponding internal sales order had been created in
                                    Oracle Order Management. This restriction has now been removed. ASCP's
                                    recommendations for internal orders can now be successfully released from the planner
                                    workbench. You can also release manual overrides of internal requisition date and
                                    quantity.

                                    3.3.2.2. Turn Off Planned Order Creation
                                    You can turn off planned order creation for an item via the new Item Mass Maintenance
                                    item attribute "New Planned Order Creation". The permissible values are: “Create New
                                    Planned Orders” (default) and “Do Not Create New Planned Orders”. Use cases for this
                                    capability are:



Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document              Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning   19
•     A by-product defined in the BOM can be used as downstream component. The
                                               requirement is to ensure that while all available supplies of the by-product are
                                               consumed, no supplies for this item are purchased. In addition, Sales Orders can
                                               be taken for the by-product and shipped as supplies are available, but no new
                                               supplies should be manufactured to meet Sales Order demand.

                                         •     To enable phasing out of item components and their replacement with newer
                                               ingredients, it is required that there be no new order or build for the phased out
                                               item. The existing supply of the phased out item is to be used up.

                                         •     No new supplies for certain products are to be made, but available stock can be
                                               distributed and sold.

                                    This features is only available in the Constrained (Without Scheduling) and Constrained
                                    (With Scheduling) planning modes. It is also available in Distribution Planning. It is not
                                    available in the Unconstrained, Constrained (Classic), Constrained (Classic) With
                                    Decision Rules and Optimized (Classic) planning modes.

                                    3.3.2.3. Consume Purchase Orders in First In, First Out Sequence
                                    Standard ASCP behavior matches supplies to demands in a way that minimizes
                                    inventory. For example, if within a week there is a demand of 1 on Friday, and purchase
                                    order supplies of 1 each on Monday and Thursday, ASCP would match the Thursday
                                    purchase order to the Friday demand and recommend the cancellation of the Monday
                                    purchase order.

                                    With this (optional) feature, ASCP would match the Monday purchase order to the
                                    Friday demand and recommend the cancellation of the Thursday purchase order. Use of
                                    existing purchase order supplies in this chronological fashion applies across substitute
                                    components: if the Monday and Thursday purchase orders in our example are in fact
                                    different items but substitute components, ASCP would still consume the Monday
                                    purchase order and cancel the Thursday purchase order.

                                    This feature is useful for minimizing the impact of purchase order change
                                    recommendations on suppliers.

                    3.3.3.          Release 12.1.3

                                    3.3.3.1. Forecast Spreading Based on Shipping Calendar
                                    Before this release ASCP supported forecast spreading based on only manufacturing
                                    calendar.

                                    In this release a new profile option “MSC: Forecast Spreading Calendar” enables users
                                    to spread forecasts based on the shipping calendar in addition to the manufacturing
                                    calendar. The list of values for this profile option includes:

                                    Organization Manufacturing Calendar – This is the default value. The system will use
                                    the organization manufacturing calendar for spreading the forecast.

                                    Organization Shipping Calendar – The system will use the organization shipping
                                    calendar for spreading the forecast.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning   20
Note – A forecast for a non-working day in the manufacturing calendar is moved to the
                                    previous working day.

                                    Example: Consider an organization with a manufacturing calendar that has both Saturday
                                    and Sunday as non-working days. On the other hand the shipping calendar has only
                                    Sunday as the only non-working day of the week. Based on the shipping calendar, a
                                    forecast of 480 units for period 3 (March) is spread evenly to daily buckets from Monday
                                    to Saturday (total of 24 buckets). That results in the daily forecast quantity of 20
                                    (480 / 24 = 20). Since Saturday is not a working day based on the manufacturing
                                    calendar, therefore ASCP moves and adds up the Saturdays’ forecasts to Fridays’
                                    forecasts (20 + 20 = 40). The result is shown in the following table:

                                                      Monday        Tuesday    Wednesda      Thursda        Friday     Saturday       Sunday
                                                                               y             y

                                        Date          3             4          5             6              7          8              9

                                        Forecast              20          20         20               20         40               0

                                        Date          10            11         12            13             14         15             16

                                        Forecast              20          20         20               20         40               0

                                        Date          17            18         19            20             21         22             23

                                        Forecast              20          20         20               20         40               0

                                        Date          24            25         26            27             28         29             30

                                        Forecast              20          20         20               20         40               0

                                    3.3.3.1. Excluding Planned Orders from Supply Tolerancing
                                    Before this release the Shortage Tolerance Percent and Excess Tolerance Percent were
                                    applied to all order types including planned orders.

                                    With this release ASCP provides a profile option called “MSC: Apply shortage and
                                    excess tolerance percentages to planned orders”. The list of values for this profile option
                                    includes:

                                    Yes – The shortage tolerance and excess percentages are applied to all supplies including
                                    planned orders. This is the default value.

                                    No – The shortage tolerance and excess percentages are applied only to existing supplies
                                    (such as On Hand, WIP).

                                    When this profile option is set to No, it allows ASCP to generate planned orders that
                                    satisfy 100% of demand, while matching existing supplies (which may have irregular
                                    quantities due to actual process yields) to demands using a supply tolerance.

                                    Example – Consider an item with 2 demands:

                                    Demand1= 10200 Demand2= 10200

                                    Fixed Order Quantity = 2000

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                   Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning       21
MSC: Demand Satisfied Percent Threshold for Pegging = 98

                                    Shortage Tolerance Quantity = 10200 × (100 – 98) / 100 = 204

                                    MSC: Minimum Supply/Demand Percent for Pegging = 0.0018

                                    Excess Tolerance Quantity = 10200 × 0.0018 = 1836

                                    If the profile option “MSC: Apply shortage and excess tolerance percentages to planned
                                    orders” is set to “No”, ASCP creates 6 planned orders of 2000 to satisfy Demand1 of
                                    10200. In this case Demand1 is satisfied completely and the excess of 1800 (12000 –
                                    10200) is used to satisfy Demand2 ignoring the excess tolerance percent even though
                                    1800 < 1836.

                                    On the other hand, if the profile option is set to “Yes”, then ASCP initially creates 6
                                    planned orders to satisfy Demand1, but it uses (pegs) only 5 of those to satisfy this
                                    demand since (10200 – 10000) < 204. In this case Demand1 is satisfied with an allowed
                                    shortage of 200. The other planned order of 2000 is used for satisfying Demand2.

                                    3.3.3.2. Maximize Use-Up of Substitute Components
                                    With this release ASCP provides a new profile option called “MSO: Use up existing
                                    supply of primary components before substitute” that allows you to maximize usage of
                                    substitute components. The list of values for this profile option includes:

                                    Yes – ASCP uses the existing supply of primary components before substitute
                                    components. This is the default value.

                                    No – ASCP uses the existing supply of substitute components before primary
                                    components.

                                    If this profile option is set to “No”, and there is no existing supply for substitute
                                    components, ASCP generates new planned orders for the primary components before
                                    substitute components.

                                    In addition to the above profile option, you need to set the following 2 profile options to
                                    use this feature:

                                    1 – MSO: Use Existing Supplies in Alternate BOM/Subs. Comp

                                    This profile option allows you to control how the existing supplies in substitute
                                    components / alternate BOM paths are used by ASCP. You need to set the value of this
                                    profile option to 0 (consider both existing substitute component supplies and existing
                                    alternate BOM component supplies) or 1 (consider existing substitute component
                                    supplies but not existing alternate BOM component supplies) to use this enhancement.
                                    Values 2 (consider neither existing substitute component supplies nor existing alternate
                                    BOM component supplies) and 3 (consider existing alternate BOM component supplies
                                    but not existing substitute component supplies) are not compatible with this feature.

                                    2 – MSO: Postpone Use of Alternates to Latest Possible Time

                                    This profile option enables ASCP to plan supplies with respect to the timing of
                                    alternates’ usage. You need to set the value of this profile option to “No” to use this
                                    feature.


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document              Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning   22
ASCP behavior with respect to this feature is summarized as follows:

                                    With the feature turned off (MSO: Use up existing supply of primary components before
                                    substitute = Yes):

                                    1. Use on hand and scheduled receipts of primary components

                                    2. Use on hand and scheduled receipts of substitute components

                                    3. Generate new planned orders for primary components

                                    4. Generate new planned orders for substitute components

                                    With the feature turned on (MSO: Use up existing supply of primary components before
                                    substitute = No):

                                    1. Use on hand and scheduled receipts of substitute components

                                    2. Use on hand and scheduled receipts of primary components

                                    3. Generate new planned orders for primary components

                                    4. Generate new planned orders for substitute components

                                    Note that the on hand of a substitute component will not be used if it is less than the
                                    Minimum Order Quantity, Fixed Order Quantity, or Fixed Lot Multiplier. The on hand
                                    of a substitute component may be partially used if it is greater than the order modifiers
                                    but it is not a multiple of them.

                                    This enhancement is only available with the Constrained (Without Scheduling) planning
                                    mode.

                                    3.3.3.3. Distribution Planning Enhanced Order Modifier Support
                                    Distribution planning now supports two more order modifiers: maximum order quantity
                                    and minimum order quantity. This is in addition to the currently supported fixed lot
                                    multiplier and round order modifiers. Users can specify maximum and minimum order
                                    quantity as an item attribute. Users can also choose to specify each newly supported
                                    order modifier on the supply allocation rule. Order modifiers specified on a supply
                                    allocation rule are applied to transfers between organizations.

                    3.3.4.          Release 12.1.3.2

                                    3.3.4.1. Forecast Explosion Enhancements
                                    The enhancements to the forecast explosion process in ASCP include:

                                         •     While exploding forecasts of ATO Models, ASCP traces the exploded forecasts
                                               of option classes and options to the top model forecast that is the source of the
                                               original demand. This information is used for reporting and analysis in
                                               Advanced Planning Command Center.

                                               Note: When using Demantra Demand Management to feed forecasts into
                                               Advanced Supply Chain Planning, the seeded data integration profile publishes
                                               both the Model forecasts and the exploded forecasts by default. When using this

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document               Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning   23
option to explode forecasts in ASCP, users will need to set up a custom profile to
                                               not publish the exploded forecast demand so that there is no double counting of
                                               dependent demand.

                                         •     The forecast explosion process will now be able to use the Planning percentages
                                               from Demantra Demand Management (if published). If the planning percentages
                                               from Demantra are not available, the explosion will use the usages on the Bills
                                               of Material as the default.

                                               Note: The Planning Percentages need to be published from Demantra using a
                                               custom data integration profile. The seeded profile does not publish this by
                                               default.

                                    These features are valid for local and global forecasts and also in both simple, single-
                                    organization models and multi-level, multi-organization models.

                                    Both these enhancements are available only when the plan option 'Explode Forecast' is
                                    turned on and the forecast control for the Options and Option Classes is set to Consume
                                    and Derive.

                    3.3.5.          Release 12.2

                                    3.3.5.1. Supplier Capacity Consumption Enhancement
                                    A new profile option is introduced to control supplier capacity consumption by purchase
                                    orders. This provides more flexibility for users to decide how supplier capacity should
                                    be consumed by purchase orders inside and outside the planning time fence. The profile
                                    also allows users to decide whether to consume supplier capacity with all purchase
                                    orders or only unacknowledged purchase orders.

                                    With this enhancement, the existing profile option “MSC: Purchase Order Dock Date
                                    Calculation Preference” does not affect supplier capacity consumption. The two choices,
                                    Promise Date and Need by Date, only determine which date is selected from the
                                    purchase order to use within planning as the suggested dock date.

                                    The new profile option “MSC: Supplier Capacity Consumption by Purchase Orders” has
                                    four settings. You can select “Yes” and all purchase orders consume supplier capacity or
                                    “No Consumption” (default) and then no purchase orders consume supplier capacity. If
                                    you select “Unacknowledged Purchase Orders Only” then this behavior is similar to
                                    current behavior where purchase orders without a promise date consume supplier
                                    capacity.

                                    The newest choice is “Purchase Orders outside Lead Time Only”. With this choice,
                                    ASCP does not consume supplier capacity with any purchase order which has a dock
                                    date inside of the item or supplier-item lead time. If the purchase order dock date is
                                    outside of lead time, then the purchase order consumes supplier capacity. Users can set
                                    supplier capacity to accumulate at lead time and only purchase orders outside of lead
                                    time consume supplier capacity. The supplier capacity horizontal plan is enhanced to
                                    display the supplier capacity consumption based on the new profile option.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document               Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning   24
3.3.5.2. Enhanced Exception Management
                                    Prior to this enhancement, ASCP generated all exceptions for all items and resources
                                    with attached exception sets. You can now control which exceptions ASCP generates,
                                    thus saving the computational burden of generating unneeded exceptions.

                                    A new window called Exception Group allows you to select specific exceptions from a
                                    list of available exceptions. You can save the Exception Group and attach it to plans
                                    using a new plan option field. When the plan is run, ASCP generates only the exceptions
                                    listed in the Exception Group.

                                    The Exception Group allows you to further limit the number of exceptions generated by
                                    restricting the generated exceptions to only selected
                                         •     Organizations
                                         •     Item Categories
                                    and to those with dates within a specified
                                         •     Exception Time Fence (Days)



          3.4.      Oracle Collaborative Planning
                    3.4.1.          Release 12.1.1

                                    3.4.1.1. Export Exception Details
                                    This enhancement enables the export of the Collaborative Planning Exceptions Detail
                                    screen to a .csv file that can be opened in spreadsheet and other external applications.
                                    Data can be exported for one user selected exception class at a time, or for all exception
                                    classes together. The structure of the exported data is similar to what is seen on the
                                    Exception Details screen.

                                    3.4.1.2. Detailed Supply Commit Based on ASCP Pegging
                                    ASCP will publish supply commits to Collaborative Planning based on how end item
                                    supplies are pegged to the end item demands in the ASCP plan. Earlier, ASCP published
                                    only a single supply commit record to Collaborative Planning on the date when the
                                    demand was completely satisfied. With the new behavior, if a demand is satisfied by
                                    pegging against on hand and also a planned production batch, two supply commit records
                                    will be published, corresponding to the individual pegging quantities and dates. This new
                                    behavior is enabled by the profile option MSC: Publish Supply Commit Based on
                                    Pegging Information.

                                    3.4.1.3. Search Exceptions by Buyer and Planner
                                    The search criteria in the exceptions detail screen have been enhanced to include "Buyer
                                    Code" and "Planner Code".




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Collaborative Planning   25
3.4.2.          Release 12.1.2

                                    3.4.2.1. Rich User Interface Enhancements
                                    Oracle Collaborative Planning incorporates new rich user interface capabilities of E-
                                    Business Suite 12.1.2. These include a redesigned applications home page with more
                                    efficient navigation, multi-level navigation menus with saved favorites, and "look-ahead"
                                    lists of values that automatically complete partial user entries.

                    3.4.3.          Release 12.1.3

                                    There are no new enhancements in Oracle Collaborative Planning in Release 12.1.3.

                    3.4.4.          Release 12.2

                                    There are no new enhancements in Oracle Collaborative Planning in Release 12.2.




          3.5.      Oracle Demand Planning
                    3.5.1.          Release 12.1.1

                                    3.5.1.1. Clear Data in Worksheets
                                    This feature allows the user to clear data from existing cells in a worksheet.

                                    The Fill Data dialog in the worksheet now allows a null entry. The data is replaced with
                                    a null/NA. A recalculate is required to reflect the change across all levels of the
                                    hierarchy.

                                    3.5.1.2. Default Even Allocation Over Time
                                    This feature gives the user the ability to allocate evenly down the time dimension and use
                                    "first" allocation for other dimensions when an allocation basis is not available.

                                    The profile MSD: Use Classic Even Allocation can now have three values, one of which
                                    signifies that the fallback default allocation for the time dimension will be even. The
                                    three valid choices for the profile are:
                                         •     Yes, use even allocation
                                         •     No, use first allocation
                                         •     No, use first allocation for all dimensions except Time

                                    3.5.1.3. Plan Security by Responsibility and Organization
                                    This feature prevents users from one Business Unit from accessing demand plans set up
                                    for another Business Unit. The Demand Planning System Administrator can now
                                    associate Demand Plan Responsibilities with specific Organizations. Organization(s) are
                                    selected during plan definition. Users can then access only plans defined for the
                                    Organizations associated with their Responsibility.

                                    By default a Responsibility is associated with all Organizations.


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                           Oracle Demand Planning   26
3.5.1.4. Sort by Product in Planning Percentages Worksheet
                                    This feature adds a sort capability for Product to the Selector for the Planning Percentage
                                    Worksheet. The user now has the ability to sort the Product dimension in ascending or
                                    descending order to facilitate selection of models and options.

                                    3.5.1.5. Data Selection Tools for Region Copy Selector
                                    This feature makes all the Selector tools available to the user when creating a Region
                                    Copy measure to facilitate data selection.

                                    3.5.1.6. Prevent Planners from Editing Measures in View Scope
                                    This feature allows you to prevent planners from changing worksheet values in measures
                                    in their view scope. Planners can continue to change worksheet values in measures in
                                    their assignment scope. Whether this feature is enabled or not, only values in a demand
                                    planner's assignment scope are passed back to the shared workspace during internal
                                    collaboration.

                    3.5.2.          Release 12.1.2

                                    There are no new enhancements in Oracle Demand Planning in Release 12.1.2.

                    3.5.3.          Release 12.1.3

                                    There are no new enhancements in Oracle Demand Planning in Release 12.1.3.

                    3.5.4.          Release 12.2

                                    There are no new enhancements in Oracle Demand Planning in Release 12.2.




          3.6.      Oracle Demand Signal Repository
                    3.6.1.          Product Overview

                                    The Oracle Demand Signal Repository (DSR) helps manufacturers collect detailed
                                    retailer and other demand data, analyze it to identify issues and opportunities, and
                                    respond via a SOA-enabled services library.

                                    Typical retail data sources include daily point-of-sale, on-hand inventory, store orders
                                    and receipts, returns, store promotions and sales/order forecasts. The DSR transforms
                                    retailer data into manufacturer terms – including manufacturer item identification,
                                    manufacturer hierarchies and calendars. A high-performance data loading facility
                                    cleanses the data and allocates it to a uniform set of dimension levels.

                                    The Demand Signal Repository data model is based upon the Oracle Data Warehouse for
                                    Retail (ODWR) data model, adapted to a manufacturer point of view. An extensive
                                    OBIEE metadata layer sits on top of the ODWR data model, and allows users to develop
                                    custom reports that combine the data in customer-specific ways.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                  Oracle Demand Signal Repository   27
DSR web services provide complementary applications such as Demantra Demand
                                    Management with cleansed retail point of sale, on-hand inventory and other data at daily
                                    store level, or aggregated to a higher level as needed.

                    3.6.2.          Release 12.1.1

                                    3.6.2.1. Customer Organization Hierarchy
                                    DSR captures customer organizational information as well as customer organizational
                                    hierarchy to allow CG Manufacturer’s to view customer data based on the customer’s
                                    perspective of their organization.

                                    The lowest level in the organization hierarchy is the Business Unit which is a single
                                    customer location. While business unit types are user-defined, the two most common
                                    types of business units are stores and customer distribution centers.

                                    DSR captures several business unit attributes such as address, general contact, and VAT
                                    information, as well as store-specific attributes such as store manager, physical
                                    properties (store size, number of window displays, restrooms, etc.). Additionally,
                                    business units can be associated with a distribution channel and/or a market area to allow
                                    analysis by channel or a market area (such as the Los Angeles market).

                                    Each business unit has a physical address. This enables the Business Unit to be analyzed
                                    by a geographic dimension, as well as the organization hierarchy.

                                    The other levels of the organization hierarchy (listed from top to bottom) include: Retail
                                    Group, Chain, Area, Region, District, and finally Business Unit. DSR allows you to
                                    aggregate fact data to any level of the customer’s organization hierarchy.

                                    The customer organization hierarchy supports the slowly changing dimension (SCD)
                                    type 2 feature. This feature keeps historical data (e.g., sales) associated with the
                                    hierarchical structure in effect at the time, to ensure proper analysis.

                                    3.6.2.2. Multiple Calendar Support
                                    In addition to the standard Gregorian calendar, DSR also provides additional calendars
                                    types including business, fiscal, advertising, and planning calendar type.

                                    The consumer goods manufacturer can use all calendar types, whereas the only calendar
                                    type that supports customer-specific calendars is the business calendar. By having a
                                    separate business calendar for each customer, the account team or category manager can
                                    view data in terms of the customer’s week, month, etc.

                                    3.6.2.3. Customer Item Hierarchy
                                    DSR captures customer item information as well as customer item hierarchy to allow
                                    consumer goods manufacturers to view customer data based on the manner in which the
                                    customer organizes their product groupings.

                                    The lowest level in the customer item hierarchy is the SKU. DSR captures several
                                    attributes at the SKU level including price, cost, size, color, style, variety, etc.
                                    Additionally, SKUs can be associated to a brand or group into item clusters to allow
                                    further analysis.



Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                  Oracle Demand Signal Repository   28
The other levels of the customer item hierarchy (listed from top to bottom) include:
                                    Company, Division, Group, Department, Category, Subcategory, Item and finally SKU.
                                    DSR allows you to aggregate fact data to any level of the customer’s item hierarchy.

                                    The customer item hierarchy supports the slowly changing dimension (SCD) type 2
                                    feature. This feature keeps historical data (e.g., sales) associated with the hierarchical
                                    structure in effect at the time, to ensure proper analysis.

                                    3.6.2.4. Manufacturer Item Hierarchy
                                    DSR captures the manufacturer’s item information as well as item hierarchy to allow
                                    consumer goods manufacturers to view data by the product categorization and
                                    descriptions used within their own company.

                                    The lowest level in the manufacturer item hierarchy is the SKU. DSR captures several
                                    attributes at the SKU level which can differ from the retailer’s SKU attribute values.

                                    The other levels of the manufacturer’s item hierarchy (listed from top to bottom) include:
                                    Company, Division, Group, Class, Subclass, Item and finally SKU. The manufacturer’s
                                    item hierarchy is seven levels deep, whereas the customer’s item hierarchy is eight levels
                                    deep (to accommodate the broad range of products carried by retailers).

                                    Like the customer item hierarchy, the manufacturer’s item hierarchy also supports the
                                    slowly changing dimension (SCD) type 2 feature. This feature keeps historical data
                                    (e.g., sales) associated with the hierarchical structure in effect at the time, to ensure
                                    proper analysis.

                                    3.6.2.5. Multiple Currency Support
                                    Monetary values within DSR can be represented in one of two currencies. The first is
                                    the retailer’s corporate currency, whereas each retailer can have a different currency.
                                    The second is the reporting currency of the manufacturer.

                                    DSR converts values from the retailer’s currency to the manufacturer’s reporting
                                    currency based upon a conversion table.

                                    By default, reports will use the manufacturer reporting currency. If needed, the reports
                                    can be customized to replace the reporting currency with the retailer currency.

                                    3.6.2.6. Alternate Units of Measure
                                    In DSR the typical base unit of measure is a saleable unit or “Each” (EA). DSR supports
                                    alternate units of measure (kilos, liters, stats) to address manufacturing, shipping or
                                    marketing requirements. For example, a beverage company might select volume in liters
                                    as their alternative UOM. Each SKU has a ratio to convert the primary UOM quantity to
                                    the alternate UOM quantity.

                                    3.6.2.7. Authorized Distribution
                                    A system parameter, called discovery mode, controls whether stores must be authorized
                                    to carry an item.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                   Oracle Demand Signal Repository   29
When discovery mode is off, items must be pre-associated with a valid business unit (aka
                                    store) in order to successfully process sales and forecast data for that business unit/item
                                    combination.

                                    When item discovery mode is on, the data loading process will create a new authorized
                                    item/store record the first time that it encounters a SKU at a business unit (store) where it
                                    has never previously been reported.

                                    3.6.2.8. Sales Allocation
                                    Fact data in Demand Signal Repository is always stored at the lowest level by
                                    SKU/Business Unit/Day. Data supplied at an aggregate level is allocated down to the
                                    day during the load process. For example, weekly, chain-level data must be allocated to
                                    a daily, business unit level (either store or DC).

                                    Organization and time-level allocation profiles define the percentage of the aggregate
                                    value to be allocated to each the day or location. Allocation preserves any fractional
                                    quantity, in order for a data value to be the same when re-aggregated to the level at
                                    which it was originally received.

                                    3.6.2.9. Sales Facts
                                    The DSR sales & return process flow loads units sold, units returned and their related
                                    monetary value and cost. Data can be reported at the business unit level (e.g., store) or at
                                    a higher level in the organization for a given day or week. Sales reported at an aggregate
                                    level are allocated to the lowest level (by business unit / day).

                                    3.6.2.10. Shipments
                                    The shipments process flow loads shipped units and monetary amount for a given
                                    business unit/item/day. Shipments are reported against a specific store or distribution
                                    center, no allocation logic is supported for shipment data.

                                    3.6.2.11. Orders
                                    The orders process flow loads order quantity and monetary amount for a given business
                                    unit/item/day. Orders (like Shipments) are reported against a specific store or
                                    distribution center, again no allocation logic is supported for order data.

                                    3.6.2.12. Inventory
                                    The item inventory process flow loads on-hand, received, in-transit, backordered, and
                                    quality hold quantities, net costs, and retail amounts for a given business
                                    unit/item/location/day. Item Inventory (like Shipments and Orders) are reported against
                                    a specific store or distribution center, so no allocation logic is supported for order data.

                                    3.6.2.13. Sales Forecasts
                                    The sales forecast process flow loads forecasted sales units and their related monetary
                                    value. Like the sales and returns process flow, data can be reported at the business unit
                                    level (e.g., store) or at a higher level in the organization for a given day or week. Sales
                                    forecasted at an aggregate level are allocated to the lowest level (by business unit / day).



Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                   Oracle Demand Signal Repository   30
3.6.2.14. Promotion Plans
                                    The promotions plan process flow loads information on what promotions are in effect at
                                    a store for an item during a given time period, as well as whether the promotion includes
                                    an associated price discount or not.

                                    3.6.2.15. Category Sales Analysis Dashboard
                                    The Category Management Dashboard displays key measures that are important to a
                                    Category Manager. This includes:
                                         •     Retailer Net Cost to Gross Margin is a quick reference into the profitability of
                                               each product category carried by the retailer.
                                         •     Category Coverage provides a breakdown of sales by retailer by product
                                               category.
                                         •     Product Mix provides a breakdown of sales by product category across retailers.
                                         •     Product Contribution to Profit lists the top performing products based on
                                               contribution to their respective product category.
                                         •     Category Sales by Type displays the breakdown by promotional versus non-
                                               promotional sales.
                                         •     Sales Growth Percent Change to Previous Period displays the growth (or
                                               decline) of this period’s sales to the prior period.
                                    Some of the key characteristics of the dashboard include:
                                         •     Displaying multiple KPIs, or measures, in a single dashboard
                                         •     Tracking performance relative to pre-defined thresholds
                                         •     Drill-down capabilities to view supporting data
                                         •     Ability to view by retailer or manufacturer hierarchy
                                         •     Automatic delivery of the underlying reports via MS Office tools.

                                    3.6.2.16. Product to Category Coverage Reports
                                    The Product to Category Coverage reports shows the percentage of category, brand or
                                    item penetration (by unit sales and monetary sales) into specific channels of distribution
                                    (e.g. grocery retail, mass merchandiser, drug, wholesale /club, etc.).

                                    Two separate reports are available: The “Product to Category Coverage by Quarter” and
                                    the “Product to Category Coverage by Period”.

                                    The available filters include:
                                               •    Time (year, quarter month).
                                               •    Channel (grocery retail, mass merchandiser, etc.)
                                               •    Product Category or Item
                                               •    Item Type (manufacturer item or retailer items)

                                    3.6.2.17. Category Growth Analysis Reports
                                    The Category Growth Analysis reports measure category’s growth by sales volume and
                                    monetary value, across time and to the brand and item levels.

                                    Two reports are available: The “Category Growth Analysis by Volume” report and the
                                    “Category Growth Analysis by Sales” report

                                    The available filters include:
                                         •     Time (year, quarter, month).

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Demand Signal Repository   31
•     Channel (grocery retail, mass merchandiser, etc.)
                                         •     Product Category
                                         •     Item Type (manufacturer item or retailer items)
                                         •     Market Area

                                    3.6.2.18. Category Sales by Type Reports
                                    The Category Sales by Type report shows category sales units and monetary sales by
                                    promotion type. Promotion Sales are sales from the retail POS system that are priced
                                    and/or based on a promotion. Regular Sales are sales from the retail POS system that are
                                    priced at standard Non-Promotion periods or pricing.

                                    Two reports are available: The “Category Sales Volume by Type: and the “Category
                                    Sales Value by Type” report.

                                    The available filters include:
                                         •     Time (year, quarter, month).
                                         •     Channel (grocery retail, mass merchandiser, etc.)
                                         •     Product Category
                                         •     Item Type (manufacturer item or retailer items)

                                    3.6.2.19. Average Price Analysis Report
                                    The Average Price Analysis report compares unit sales and average retail sales price to
                                    the same period last year.

                                    The available filters include:
                                               •    Time (year, quarter, month).
                                               •    Product Category
                                               •    Item Type (manufacturer item or retailer items)

                                    3.6.2.20. Top and Bottom Performers Reports
                                    The top and bottom performers reports provide an immediate view of the top performers
                                    and bottom performers by profit or sales amount.

                                    Four reports are available:
                                         •     Top Performers by Profit
                                         •     Bottom Performers by Profit
                                         •     Top Performers by Sales
                                         •     Bottom Performers by Sales
                                    The available filters include:
                                         •     Top Performer (which is the number to display, the default if left blank is 10)
                                         •     Time (year, quarter, month).
                                         •     Product Category
                                         •     Item Type (manufacturer item or retailer items)
                                         •     Customer

                                    3.6.2.21. Ad-Hoc Reporting
                                    Demand Signal Repository leverages native OBIEE functionality to produce ad-hoc
                                    reports. This includes:


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Demand Signal Repository   32
•     Flexible creation of ad hoc/new reports by end users which can then be
                                               published to a wider audience
                                         •     Ability to view data in multiple formats, including pivot table, graph, chart, etc.
                                         •     Ability to drill down to lowest level of detail, based on existing dimensions, like
                                               retail or manufacture item or organization hierarchy
                                         •     Seamless integration with MS Office tools to export to Excel, PowerPoint, etc.
                                         •     And the ability to integrate geographic visualization. For example, to show sales
                                               by store, zip code, etc. on a map.

                                    3.6.2.22. Sales Scorecard
                                    The sales scorecard is divided into four sections which the users can filter by customer
                                    and/or date. The four sections are:
                                         •     “Latest Results” for the selected company (aka customer).
                                         •     “Latest Results” broken down by product category
                                         •     “Overall Company” YTD results.
                                         •     “Overall Company” YTD results broken down by product Category
                                    The measures displayed in each of the four quadrants include Monetary Sales, Unit
                                    Sales, Category Sales, Category Share, Retailer Gross Margin, Gross Marting Percent,
                                    and Forecast Accuracy.

                                    3.6.2.23. Supply Chain Scorecard
                                    The Supply Chain scorecard shows results against goal comparisons for seven supply-
                                    chain oriented measures. Like the Sales Scorecard, it is divided into four panels, with the
                                    left panels showing the latest results and the right panels showing values summarized by
                                    year. Also like the Sales Scorecard, the top two sections show company performance;
                                    however, the bottom two sections show performance across all manufacturer products at
                                    the customer organization’s “region” level.

                                    The measures for each of the four sections of the supply chain scorecard include Service
                                    Level, Order Cycle Time, and On-Time Delivery, Inventory Cover, On-hand Inventory,
                                    In-Stock %, and Percent returns

                                    3.6.2.24. Operations Scorecard
                                    The operations tab is divided into two panels. Operational measures are only available at
                                    supply chain level, not at a more granular level (such as category or region).

                                    All seven measures (Perfect order %, Order change %, Invoice accuracy %, Payment
                                    days, Deduction amount, Item data synchronization % and Item data accuracy %) are
                                    external measures imported into DSR through the ETL process.

                                    3.6.2.25. Demantra Demand Management Integration
                                    Demand Signal Repository has a pre-built outbound integration of aggregated demand
                                    signals to Demantra. Data sent from DSR to Demantra includes:
                                         •     Retailer Point of Sale Sales and Forecast
                                         •     Retailer On-Hand Inventory, Orders, Shipments, and Promotions
                                         •     Distribution Center On Hand-Inventory, Forecast, Shipments




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Demand Signal Repository   33
3.6.2.26. Retail Merchandising System (RMS) Integration
                                    The Retail Merchandising System (RMS) Integration provides an out-of the box
                                    integration of EDI 852 data coming from Oracle’s RMS system into Oracle’s Demand
                                    Signal Repository (DSR) module. The EDI 852 file from RMS populates DSR’s sales
                                    and return data, as well as on-hand inventory.

                                    3.6.2.27. Web Services Integration
                                    If you desire outbound integration with other Oracle or Non-Oracle applications,
                                    Demand Signal Repository includes a standards-based web services integration to
                                    support most common access scenarios including:
                                    •    Store POS, Orders, Forecasts, Shipments, and Promotions
                                    •    On-Hand and In-Transit Inventory, Backorders, and Receipts

                    3.6.3.          Release 12.1.2

                                    3.6.3.1. Exception Management Dashboard
                                    The Exception Management Dashboard automatically sifts through vast amounts of
                                    customer data to quickly detect potential problems in key business processes. Using
                                    OBIEE’s iBot functionality, pre-built queries can be run periodically, as needed, to
                                    locate issues and create exceptions.

                                    Once exceptions have been created, the Exception Management Dashboard aggregates
                                    and displays exceptions by customer and product category, listing them in order from
                                    highest to lowest number of exception so users can address the most critical areas first.

                                    The exception types analyzed within the Exception Management Dashboard include:

                                         •     Out of Stock Exception where on-hand quantity was reported as zero

                                         •     Imputed Out of Stock Exception where sales are significantly below expected
                                               sales and the probability is very high that the product is out of stock.

                                         •     Sales Forecast Accuracy Exception where sales forecast accuracy varies
                                               significantly from the average.

                                         •     Reorder Point Exception where inventory levels (on-hand plus back order
                                               quantity) are below the customer’s reorder point.

                                         •     Overstock Exception where on-hand inventory levels are above the customer’s
                                               reorder point.

                                         •     New Item Not Selling Exception which reports on items introduced at the store
                                               within the last 30 days which have no sales.

                                         •     In-flight Promotional Lift Exception which reports on promoted items whose
                                               sales is less than 110% of average sales.

                                         •     Promotional Price Deviation Exception which reports where promotion price
                                               is discounted more than 10% of average selling price




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                  Oracle Demand Signal Repository   34
From each one of these exception types users have the option to view one of the
                                    following reports to get more information.

                                         •     The Forecast Accuracy report shows actual versus forecasted sales, deviation
                                               between the two for the selected week as well as prior week.

                                         •     The Inventory Position report shows the previous week’s ending balance,
                                               receipts, sales and both an expected ending balance and an actual ending
                                               balance. The customer’s replenishment information (min, max, reorder point,
                                               etc.) is also displayed.

                                         •     The Item Distribution report shows the number of authorized stores and the
                                               number of authorized stores not selling, in addition to the average sales per store
                                               selling.

                                         •     The Price Deviation report shows average sales price, promotional price,
                                               quantity sold, actual revenue and expected revenue.

                                    Exception history is retained to allow users to track trends on whether exceptions are
                                    increasing or decreasing.

                                    3.6.3.2. All Commodity Volume (ACV) / External Measures
                                    Many companies using Demand Signal Repository purchase consumption data from
                                    syndicated data providers to analyze market penetration by retailer, geography, product
                                    and time. The set of syndicated consumption data includes pre-calculated ACV
                                    measures as well as other measures such as sales by promotion type, baseline sales, and
                                    coupon sales. Syndicated consumption data can be purchased at various levels of the
                                    product hierarchy and customer organization hierarchy, as well as geographic region or
                                    sub-region.

                                    DSR provides an initial set of 100 generic measures which are renamed during
                                    implementation to match the measures purchased. In addition, the number of measures
                                    can be extended, if needed.

                                    When loading the external measures the product and geography keys supplied by the
                                    syndicated data provider are translated into the appropriate organization, product or
                                    geography hierarchy levels.

                                    A sample set of measures along with an out-of-the-box report is available to use as is, or
                                    rename and revise based on specific customer needs.

                                    3.6.3.3. TDLinx Store/Outlet Adapter
                                    Demand Signal Repository has created an adapter to load AC Nielsen TDLinx
                                    store/outlet data. As a result, the existing set of business unit (store) attributes were
                                    enhanced to include additional data elements, such as status, sub-channel code, retail
                                    group, as well as other attributes.

                                    The TDLinx store/outlet adapter maps data from the AC Nielson source CSV file to the
                                    Organization Business Unit Interface table. From there the existing Organization
                                    Hierarchy ETL process flow can be used to update the Organization Business Unit
                                    (DDR_R_BSNS_UNIT) target table.



Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Demand Signal Repository   35
3.6.3.4. Scorecard Enhancements (Goals & Thresholds)
                                    The sales, operations and supply chain scorecards have been enhanced to improve
                                    usability (see illustration below). These enhancements include:

                                         •     Driving performance indicators (red, yellow green indicators) based on
                                               externally-loaded goals and thresholds.

                                         •     Monitoring weekly performance results as opposed to daily performance

                                         •     Color-coded performance indicators which are based on the loaded goals and
                                               thresholds.

                                         •     “Latest Results” are now based on weekly results, goals and thresholds.
                                               Previously, the latest results displayed daily values, which was too granular.

                                         •     “Overall Results” are now based on YTD results. Previously, the scorecard
                                               compared a yearly goal against the associated measure (e.g., unit sales) for a
                                               given year. This allows users to monitor performance throughout the year
                                               (rather than waiting until the end of the year).

                                    In addition, the following enhancements were made to improve readability:

                                         •     Both the measure value and the color-coded performance indicator are displayed
                                               on the main scorecard pages

                                         •     When drilling down from the scorecard, the year filter criteria is passed to the
                                               underlying report. In addition, the associated chart is displayed first (before any
                                               table data)

                                    On the operations scorecard, the Deduction Balance measure has replaced the Deduction
                                    Amount measure.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Demand Signal Repository   36
3.6.3.5. Store Clusters
                                    DSR supports the ability to group “like” stores (or distribution centers) together to
                                    execute strategies related to specific store formats, consumer demographics, weather
                                    zones, or other characteristics. Each business unit (store or distribution center) may be
                                    associated to one or more store clusters.

                                    The example below illustrates how stores from different retailers can be assigned to store
                                    clusters based on average income, lifestyle and geographic location. A store cluster
                                    report is available to analyze sales by store cluster type (e.g., Average income, Lifestyle,
                                    Coastal) to see breakdown of sales by each unique cluster.

                                    3.6.3.6. Item Clusters
                                    Similar to store clusters, DSR supports the ability to group “like” SKUs together to
                                    evaluate sales strategies and promotional activities.

                                    The example below illustrates how SKUs from different product categories can be
                                    assigned to item clusters based on average container material, primary shopper and brand
                                    perception.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                  Oracle Demand Signal Repository   37
3.6.3.7. Replenishment Rules
                                    DSR supports the loading of customer replenishment rules to provide visibility into the
                                    criteria used by the store or distribution center when reordering products. This
                                    information can be used to determine whether out-of-stocks or overstocks are being
                                    caused by an inappropriate inventory management policy, or to anticipate future order
                                    volumes.

                                    The replenishment rules are used by the exception management workbench to display
                                    over and under stock conditions. The replenishment rules are also accessible to the end
                                    user when building ad-hoc queries.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                 Oracle Demand Signal Repository   38
3.6.3.8. Allocation Rules
                                    DSR has the ability to allocate POS and sales forecast facts received at an aggregate
                                    level to the business unit / day level. The time allocation and organization allocation
                                    percentages have been exposed in the BI Answers catalog, so end users can view the
                                    percentages that were used when allocating sales facts to the business unit or day level.

                    3.6.4.          Release 12.1.3

                                    3.6.4.1. Manufacturer Promotions
                                    Oracle Demand Signal Repository has been extended to include the capture and analysis
                                    of Manufacturer Promotions. The functionality within this feature includes:

                                         •     The ability to load manufacturer promotion information using out of the box
                                               generic interface tables and Oracle Warehouse Builder process flows

                                         •     The ability to associate sales to a manufacturer promotion to report promoted vs.
                                               non-compliant sales (e.g., sales that should have been promoted)

                                         •     A new Manufacturer Promotion Dashboard which shows:
                                                    o    Weekly sales compliance trend broken down by promoted and non-
                                                         compliant sales
                                                    o    Manufacturer promotion compliance by product category which displays
                                                         promoted and non-promoted sales by product category
                                                    o    Expected vs. actual promotion sales
                                                    o    Expected vs. actual ACV % by manufacturer promotion



Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                        Oracle Demand Signal Repository   39
o    Expected vs. actual sales by promotion type (e.g., display, feature, etc.)
                                                         to analyze results by promotion tactic
                                                    o    Promotion compliance by promotion type
                                         •     Context sensitive drilldowns are available from the manufacturer promotion
                                               dashboard to display:
                                                    o    Manufacturer Promotion Summary Results which compare actual
                                                         promotion results against expectations at the promotion/customer level.
                                                    o    Manufacturer Promotion Detail Results which compare actual promotion
                                                         results against expectations at the promotion/customer/SKU level.
                                    3.6.4.2. Manufacturer Shipments
                                    Manufacturers need visibility into products as they move downstream in the supply chain
                                    to the consumer. In previous releases, Oracle Demand Signal Repository provided
                                    visibility of products at customer locations (either distribution centers or retail stores),
                                    but did not have visibility into shipments leaving the manufacturer’s facilities.

                                    Oracle Demand Signal Repository has been enhanced to capture manufacturer shipments
                                    to provide end to end visibility of products as they leave the manufacturer’s site all the
                                    way to the store and ultimate sale to the consumer. The functionality within this feature
                                    includes:

                                         •     The ability to load the manufacturer’s organization hierarchy to define locations
                                               from where product is shipped

                                         •     The ability to load manufacturer shipment information using out of the box
                                               generic interface tables and Oracle Warehouse Builder process flows

                                         •     A new Shipment Dashboard which shows:
                                                    o    Manufacturer shipment trend
                                                    o    Customer sales trend (to compare against manufacturer shipments)
                                                    o    Actual vs. forecasted customer shipments
                                                    o    Customer shipments vs. receipts (by product category and business unit)
                                                         to spot potential product diversion issues
                                                    o    Customer shipment throughput of inbound shipments vs. outbound
                                                         shipments
                                    3.6.4.3. Customer Shipment Facts
                                    As part of the manufacturer shipments enhancements, customer shipment facts were also
                                    enhanced to capture ship-to location and shipment cost information.

                                    3.6.4.4. Third Party Distributors
                                    Manufacturers may ship product to customers via third party distributors. In previous
                                    releases of Oracle Demand Signal Repository distributors were not distinguishable from
                                    other organizations (e.g., retailers). To provide better visibility into third party
                                    distributors, a new organization type has been created specifically for distributors. In
                                    addition, a new distributor dashboard has been created. The functionality within this
                                    feature includes:

                                         •     Creation of a new Organization Type for distributors

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                       Oracle Demand Signal Repository   40
•     The ability to load distributor reference information using out of the box generic
                                               interface tables and Oracle Warehouse Builder process flows. This includes
                                               loading:
                                                    o    Distributor organization hierarchy
                                                    o    Distributor item hierarchy
                                                    o    Distributor business calendar
                                                    o    Distributor replenishment rules
                                         •     The ability to load distributor fact information using out of the box generic
                                               interface tables and Oracle Warehouse Builder process flows. This includes
                                               loading:
                                                    o    Distributor shipments
                                                    o    Distributor inventory
                                                    o    Distributor shipment forecast (see Forecast Type and Purpose Code
                                                         enhancement)
                                         •     Creation of a new Distributor dashboard which shows:
                                                    o    Manufacturer shipments by distributor
                                                    o    Distributor shipments by customer
                                                    o    Weekly manufacturer shipment trend
                                                    o    Forecast accuracy by distributor
                                                    o    Distributor inventory by product category
                                                    o    Customer shipments by distributor
                                                    o    Distributor throughput (inbound and outbound shipments) by product
                                                         Category
                                                    o    Weekly distributor throughput trend

                                    3.6.4.5. Alternate Organization Hierarchy
                                    Since its inaugural release, Oracle Demand Signal Repository has had the ability to
                                    capture and analyze facts based on the customer’s view of their organization structure.
                                    Manufacturers and their supply chain partners (e.g., syndicated data providers) may have
                                    their own view of how the customer’s organization is structured for purposes of account
                                    management, promotion planning, collecting and aggregating consumption data, etc.
                                    This view is oftentimes different from how the customer views its organization structure.

                                    The Alternate Organization Hierarchy feature allows alternate views of the customer’s
                                    organization to co-exist within DSR along with the original customer organization
                                    hierarchy. Facts can be inquired upon using the original customer organization
                                    hierarchy, or one or more alternate organization hierarchies.

                                    The Alternate Organization Hierarchy provides a flexible organization structure, which
                                    can vary depending on the source of the data, or the type of analysis performed. For
                                    example:

                                    Example 1 – Syndicated Data Provider. Manufacturers who subscribe to a syndicated
                                    data provider service for account information can load this information into the alternate
                                    organization hierarchy and leave the original customer organization hierarchy untouched,

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                       Oracle Demand Signal Repository   41
so that account team’s can still talk to customers in terms of the customer’s view of their
                                    organization.

                                    Example 2 – Customer Buying Organization / Planning Hierarchy. The manufacturer’s
                                    own view of the customer’s organization may be based on how the customer’s buying
                                    organization is structured. When performing activities, such as promotion planning and
                                    execution, the promotion may apply to a level within the retailer’s organization, which
                                    represents the area for which a buyer is responsible. For example, a retail department
                                    (e.g., giftware, jewelry, etc.) or buying region (e.g., east, west, etc.). One or more of
                                    these views of the customer organization can be loaded to the alternate organization
                                    hierarchy.

                                    The business benefits to having alternate organization hierarchies include:

                                         •     Ability to view customer data at aggregate levels that represent the various ways
                                               in which the manufacturer conducts business with the customer.

                                         •     Ability to analyze fact data at a level that is equivalent to other systems in use by
                                               the Manufacturer. For example, to analyze and report on DSR retail demand data
                                               by planning account (i.e., a level in an alternate organization hierarchy), which
                                               would be equivalent to the planning account used in Demantra Predictive Trade
                                               Planning or Siebel Consumer Goods.

                                    The functionality within this feature includes:
                                         •     The ability to define the types of alternate organization hierarchies to be used
                                               (e.g., AC Nielsen, Buying Organization, etc.)
                                         •     The ability to configure the DSR repository to expose additional hierarchies
                                               and/or levels and name each level according to desired use (see additional
                                               information below)
                                         •     The ability to load alternate organization hierarchy information using out of the
                                               box generic interface tables and Oracle Warehouse Builder process flows.
                                               Information loaded includes:
                                                    o    The types of alternate organization hierarchies in use
                                                    o    The attributes associated with each account within an alternate
                                                         organization hierarchy, including a set of 20 user-defined attributes
                                                         which can be customized, and the parent account to which each child
                                                         account belongs.
                                                    o    The association between a business unit (e.g., store or distribution
                                                         center) and an account in the alternate organization hierarchy.
                                         •     The ability to associate syndicated consumption data to any account within an
                                               alternate organization hierarchy.
                                         •     A sample report, called Sales Performance by Account, has been made available
                                               to illustrate how the alternate organization can be used to build other reports.

                                    Additional Information

                                    DSR ships with a sample alternate organization hierarchy exposed in the Answers web
                                    catalog which has four levels exposed. To use additional alternate organization
                                    hierarchies, the DSR repository must be modified to define the number of levels being
                                    used and the names of each level to be exposed. Up to ten levels within an alternate

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                       Oracle Demand Signal Repository   42
organization hierarchy can be exposed without requiring any physical data model
                                    changes.

                                    3.6.4.6. Forecast Type and Purpose Code
                                    Prior to this release of Oracle Demand Signal Repository, forecasts were assumed to be
                                    sales related. In addition, there was no way to distinguish baseline from incremental
                                    forecast. As of this release, Oracle Demand Signal Repository has enhanced the forecast
                                    facts to provide additional types of forecast, as well as defining baseline vs. incremental
                                    forecast. The functionality within this feature includes:

                                         •     The ability to capture different types of forecasts coming from the
                                               retailer/customer. In one case, the forecast may represent projected store sales,
                                               while in other cases; the forecasts may represent projected orders or shipments
                                               for the distribution centers.

                                         •     To differentiate the types of forecasts provided by the retailer, the forecast data
                                               contains two additional attributes.

                                                    o    Forecast Purpose. The forecast purpose code indicates whether a
                                                         forecast represents a projected sales quantity (for stores), order quantity
                                                         (for distribution locations), shipment quantity (for distribution locations)
                                                         or a projected receipt quantity (for either stores or DCs).

                                                    o    Forecast Type. The forecast type code indicates whether the forecast
                                                         quantity includes only base demand (without promotional volumes),
                                                         promotional demand only, or "total" demand (including both base and
                                                         promo).

                                         •     Existing out of the box reports and dashboards were modified to specify that the
                                               forecast data being displayed had a Forecast Purpose code of SALES and a
                                               Forecast Type of TOTAL. This is to maintain parity with the original intent of
                                               the reports.

                                    3.6.4.7. User Defined Fields
                                    To provide flexibility in capturing additional attributes within Oracle Demand Signal
                                    Repository, without requiring changes to the physical data model, a set of 20 user-
                                    defined attributes (10 alphanumeric, 10 numeric) have been added to the entities listed
                                    below:
                                         •     Manufacturer Item Hierarchy (all levels)
                                         •     Organization Hierarchy (all levels)
                                         •     Retailer Item Hierarchy (all levels)
                                         •     Item Cluster Definition
                                         •     Retailer Cluster Definition
                                         •     Customer Promotion Plans
                                    Manufacturer’s needing to capture additional attributes against these entities can
                                    leverage the out of the box interface tables and Oracle Warehouse Builder process flows
                                    without needing to make any customizations.



Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                       Oracle Demand Signal Repository   43
3.6.4.8. Type 2 Slowly Changing Dimensions
                                    By default, Oracle Demand Signal Repository supports Type 2 Slowly Changing
                                    Dimensions (SCD) on the following dimensions:
                                         •     Organization
                                         •     Manufacturer Item Hierarchy
                                         •     Customer (Retail) Item Hierarchy
                                    Historically, the Type 2 SCD feature is always turned on for these three dimensions.
                                    With this release, Type 2 SCD functionality can be turned off at implementation time to
                                    give customers the option whether to use this feature or not.




                    3.6.5.          Release 12.2

                                    There are no new features in Oracle Demand Signal Repository in Release 12.2.




          3.7.      Oracle Demantra – All Products

                    3.7.1.          Release 12.2

                                    3.7.1.1. Calendar Month Support in Weekly System
                                    Each Oracle Demantra implementation has a core time resolution definition. This
                                    definition drives the resolution of data kept in the system, which in turns drives the


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                    Oracle Demantra – All Products    44
granularity of data available to users, as well as key Demantra processes. Currently this
                                    data granularity serves as the smallest building block upon which all time management
                                    and display is done.

                                    If a customer’s business requirements include support of both weeks and calendar
                                    months they cannot achieve this using a weekly system, as weeks do not aggregate
                                    wholly into calendar months. Currently the only way to support this requirement is to
                                    have a system where the lowest time resolution is daily.

                                    This release will enhance the Demantra data model to enable supporting week-to- month
                                    calendar rollups. Functionality supported:
                                         •     Pre-configured Calendar Months time aggregation
                                         •     View Weekly data via Calendar Months, Quarters and Years
                                         •     Update data in Calendar Months, Quarters and Years

                                    3.7.1.2. Import from Excel
                                    This release enables customers to import data directly from a file (tab-delimited Unicode
                                    format only; can be named as .xls file) into a compatible worksheet. This will enable
                                    users to quickly import data such as customer forecast, or data they have manipulated in
                                    Excel for mass updates (such as planning percentages). A template for import can be
                                    generated via an enhanced version of the Export to Excel feature.

                                    3.7.1.3. Engine Performance Improvements
                                    This release sets engine pass through as the default configuration for the analytical
                                    engine. With this configuration, the Sales_Data_Engine will not be created for every
                                    engine branch but instead the data will be retrieved from the Sales_Data table directory.

                                    This will reduce configuration time needed to apply this configuration at key customers,
                                    improve implementation delivery times and maintain or improve engine run times.

                                    3.7.1.4. General Engine Enhancements
                                    This release enables control of combination life-cycle parameters to be configured
                                    locally or globally. Dying_time, mature_age and hist_glob_prop will support a global
                                    configuration with local overrides. As an example of the business justification, some
                                    SKUs are promotional and are only sold every few years. In order to keep them active,
                                    dying time could be set to a very high number while in other SKUs a shorter time could
                                    be used to trigger deactivation.

                                    3.7.1.5. Analytical Engine on Solaris 10
                                    In this release, we extend our operating system support of the analytical engine to
                                    include Solaris 10.

                                    3.7.1.6. Improved Multi-Language Support
                                    As a further improvement on language support, Demantra 12.2 includes support for
                                    multiple languages within a single instance. This will enable users to select from a list of
                                    supported languages at login, and review and collaborate in their selected language.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                    Oracle Demantra – All Products   45
3.7.1.7. Technology Stack
                                    Demantra 12.2 aligns with the EBS Technology Stack, including the following
                                    extensions and version upgrades above existing supported technologies:
                                         •     Oracle Weblogic 11g
                                         •     CPLEX 12 for Trade Promotion Optimization
                                         •     Oracle Connection Manager 11g (OCM)
                                         •     Oracle Access Manager 11g (replaces SSO)
                                         •     Internet Explorer 9
                                         •     Firefox 4
                                         •     Safari 5
                                         •     Applications Middle Tier JDK: Java 6.0
                                         •     Applications Client Runtime Java: 6.0
                                    In addition, we will support the following version upgrades:
                                         •     IBM WebSphere or WebSphere Express 7.0
                                         •     Tomcat 6.x and 7.0

                                    3.7.1.8. Demand Variability Definition
                                    The user interface for standard error (currently erroneously labeled ‘Safety Stock’) is
                                    relocated from the Business Logic Engine (BLE) to the Business Modeler and renamed
                                    to ‘Demand Variability’. This will better consolidate all system administrator tasks into
                                    one administrative application.

                                    Further, performance of the procedures that calculate standard error is improved by
                                    implementing multi-threading.

                                    3.7.1.9. Configure Rolling Profile Groups
                                    A new user interface is provided to define Rolling Profile Groups in the Business
                                    Modeler. This new option, as well as the definition of Rolling Data Profiles, is moved
                                    under the ‘Configuration’ menu in the Business Modeler. Previously, the configuration
                                    of Rolling Data Profiles was found under the ‘Engine’ menu.

                                    3.7.1.10. Integration Data Profile Hints
                                    Integration Interface hints are defined in the Business Modeler for Data Profiles. System
                                    administrators will be able to define both data and population hints within the Data
                                    Profile wizard.

                                    3.7.1.11. Database Performance Improvements
                                    Database performance can decline due to out-of-order tables or incorrectly defined
                                    primary keys. In this release we provide standard mechanisms for performing database
                                    ‘health checks’(both a quick and thorough version) and procedures to rebuild key data
                                    tables like SALES_DATA and MDP_MATRIX if necessary. This procedure will be
                                    dynamically created in Demantra and can be run either while the application server is
                                    live or during a period when the application server is down. The key focus of this design
                                    is to provide a means of assessing and addressing declines in database performance due
                                    to out-of-order tables.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                   Oracle Demantra – All Products   46
3.7.1.12. Asynchronous Workflow Support
                                    Currently, workflow steps in Demantra workflows operate in a synchronous mode (i.e.,
                                    they wait for the step to complete before proceeding to the next step in the workflow).
                                    This mode of operation works well for most types of workflow steps currently supported
                                    in the workflow editor. However, there are certain types of workflow steps for which an
                                    asynchronous mode of operation would be useful. Asynchronous mode of operation
                                    means the workflow will not be required to wait for the current step to complete in order
                                    to proceed to the next step in the workflow.

                                    Asynchronous support is provided for the following types of workflow steps:
                                         •     Launch Workflow Step
                                         •     User Step
                                         •     Group Step
                                         •     Exception Step
                                    Many of these steps are simply used to notify users of data to review or exceptions to
                                    take note of. Once the notification has been sent, the workflow should proceed to
                                    completion rather than wait for the user to mark as ‘Done’.



          3.8.      Oracle Demantra Demand Management

                    3.8.1.          Release 12.2

                                    3.8.1.1. Enhanced Integration with Advanced Planning Command Center
                                    Demand Management seeds integration with Oracle Advanced Planning Command
                                    Center. Demand plan measures can be published to the Advanced Planning Command
                                    Center (APCC) and used in dashboard reports. These measures are archived by plan for
                                    immediate scenario comparison to facilitate faster development of profitable demand
                                    shaping strategies.

                                    There is support for publishing custom demand series to APCC forecasting measures.
                                    For example, if customer forecasts are maintained in a Demand Management series then
                                    this forecast data can be published to a seeded, generic APCC measure.

                                    Integration is also available for a limited item hierarchy mapping between Demand
                                    Management and APCC. For example, if a custom item hierarchy has been defined in the
                                    Business Modeler (e.g. Item < Product SubGroup < Product Group < Product Line) then
                                    this structure can be replicated automatically in APCC.


          3.9.      Oracle Demantra Real-time Sales and Operations Planning

                    3.9.1.          Release 12.2

                                    3.9.1.1. Improved Cost Modeling
                                    Detailed supply cost modeling is available in S&OP. Supply cost breakdown is by
                                    transportation, storage, purchase, and manufacturing costs. Seeded integration with
                                    Strategic Network Optimization brings planning costs at the item, organization and time
                                    level by plan scenario rather than deriving total cost using standard costs in S&OP. This

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document             Oracle Demantra Demand Management   47
enables our customers to understand the cost trade-offs between plan scenarios for a
                                    more profitable response. For example, a SNO plan scenario may indicate higher
                                    transportation and supply costs due to outsourcing whereas an alternative plan scenario
                                    that increases resource capacity may reflect higher manufacturing and storage costs. This
                                    enhancement improves decision support through more detailed cost analysis.

                                    3.9.1.2. Enhanced Integration with Advanced Planning Command Center
                                    Prior to this release, nearly all of the Forecasting measures from S&OP were plan
                                    independent in APCC and publishing overwrote the previous set of values. This
                                    diminished the utility of the APCC for demand data analysis. For example, there was no
                                    ability to compare sales forecast, projected backlog, and financial forecast measures
                                    between scenarios to evaluate plan differences. All Forecasting measures published from
                                    S&OP (excluding historical data series) are now striped by plan name, and can be
                                    archived and are therefore comparable between scenarios. S&OP leverages the same
                                    integration enhancements as in DM.

                                    These enhancements to S&OP-APCC integration include:
                                         •     Streamlined publish process for Forecasting measures: All Forecasting measures
                                               are published in a single workflow thereby eliminating manual steps.
                                         •     Publish custom measures: Support for publishing custom S&OP series to
                                               APCC. This includes both forecast and historical measures.
                                         •     Item Hierarchy Mapping: Provide limited mapping of item hierarchy between
                                               the Business Modeler and APCC. For example, if a custom item hierarchy has
                                               been defined in the Business Modeler (e.g. Item < Product SubGroup < Product
                                               Group < Product Line) then this structure can be replicated automatically in
                                               APCC.


          3.10. Oracle Demantra Predictive Trade Planning

                    3.10.1.         Release 12.2

                                    3.10.1.1. Enabling ‘Dynamic Open Link’ capabilities and Demantra Anywhere
                                    Previously, Dynamic Open Link (DOL) and Demantra Anywhere (DA) were available
                                    only if the Sales and Operations Planning component was installed. In this release,
                                    customers who have licensed Predictive Trade Planning are able to use DOL to export
                                    promotion data from Demantra into third party reporting tools such as Microsoft Excel.
                                    They will also be able to leverage the thin client of DA for promotions planning.




          3.11. Oracle Demantra Trade Promotion Optimization

                    3.11.1.         Release 12.2

                                    3.11.1.1. Enabling Nodal Tuning
                                    Previously, nodal tuning was only available to Advanced Forecasting and Demand
                                    Modeling (AFDM) customers. In this release, we enable this advanced analytical

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document           Oracle Demantra Predictive Trade Planning   48
functionality for Predictive Trade Planning customers who purchase Trade Promotion
                                    Optimization. This enables more granular control of the analytical engine.

                                    3.11.1.2. Enhancements to Optimization
                                    A number of enhancements are introduced:
                                         •     Exclusion rules: Users will be able to define a set of conditions that should not
                                               occur together in a solution. For example, you should not run a TPR
                                               simultaneously with an Ad, and discount should exclude discounts in a certain
                                               range.
                                         •     Optimized buydown: Buydown is now optimized like other variables in the
                                               optimizer. In previous releases, the buydown calculation was deterministic and
                                               calculated using the minimum retailer margin constraint. In this version,
                                               buydown is now part of the optimization problem and the value is selected by the
                                               optimization process.
                                         •     Vehicle cost overrides: The vehicle_cost expression has been changed to allow
                                               cost event overrides per causal and per transpose.
                                         •     Control over impact of financial constraints: Provide the ability to turn off
                                               financial constraints such as minimum manufacturer or retail margins.
                                         •     Define baseline: If a manual override was done to the baseline forecast,
                                               customers might require that value be used as the baseline for the promotion
                                               when calculating Revenue and Profit. In this release, we provide control over
                                               the expression denoting baseline.



          3.12. Oracle Global Order Promising
                    3.12.1.         Release 12.1.1

                                    There are no new features in Oracle Global Order Promising in Release 12.1.1.

                    3.12.2.         Release 12.1.2

                                    There are no new features in Oracle Global Order Promising in Release 12.1.2.

                    3.12.3.         Release 12.1.3

                                    3.12.3.1. Enhanced Forward ATP
                                    Prior to this enhancement, during forward scheduling (when there is insufficient supply
                                    to promise a demand on its requested date, due to which GOP searches for supply later
                                    than the requested date), GOP would consider sources in rank order and select the first
                                    source that yielded a promise date less than or equal to the latest acceptable date. This
                                    did not guarantee that the source with the best promise date would get selected.

                                    With this enhancement, GOP returns the best possible promise date by combining
                                    availability across all sources. The enhancement is enabled by enabling the profile
                                    “MSC: Use Enhanced Forward ATP”. With this enhanced behavior, GOP uses iterative
                                    search logic to determine the most optimal promise date during forward scheduling. This
                                    feature increases the computation burden of the order promising calculation, and may
                                    impact GOP performance, especially in very constrained supply scenarios.


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                      Oracle Global Order Promising   49
3.12.4.         Release 12.2

                                    There are no new features in Oracle Global Order Promising in Release 12.2.




          3.13. Oracle Inventory Optimization
                    3.13.1.         Release 12.1.1

                                    3.13.1.1. Support for Intermittent Demands
                                    Inventory Optimization now explicitly supports forecasts that represent intermittent
                                    demands. Forecasts that are fed into IO from Service Parts Planning that have been
                                    generated using a statistical method designated as being for intermittent demands, or
                                    forecasts that are designated via plan options to be of the intermittent demand variety,
                                    will now be assumed by IO to have a more appropriate Poisson error distribution about
                                    the forecasted mean. In addition, IO intelligently distributes small calculated total safety
                                    stock targets across multiple echelons of a supply chain so that the location-specific
                                    targets are integer numbers.

                    3.13.2.         Release 12.1.2

                                    There are no new features in Oracle Inventory Optimization in Release 12.1.2.

                    3.13.3.         Release 12.1.3

                                    3.13.3.1. Enhanced Budget Constraints
                                    Prior to this release, IO did not have the ability to ensure integer valued safety stock
                                    solutions within input budget constraints. A new heuristic ensures integer valued safety
                                    stocks while respecting input budget constraints. This new heuristic is enabled by setting
                                    the profile option “MSR: Budget Heuristic” to Yes (the default value is No).

                                    A few points about the new heuristic:

                                         •     It is applicable only for a single level supply chain

                                         •     It is applicable only for plan level and organization level budgets

                                         •     It is applicable for both intermittent and non-intermittent demand streams

                    3.13.4.         Release 12.2

                                    There are no new features in Oracle Inventory Optimization in Release 12.2.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                         Oracle Inventory Optimization   50
3.14. Oracle Production Scheduling
                    3.14.1.         Release 12.1.1

                                    3.14.1.1. Units of Measure on Items
                                    A “Unit Of Measure” has been added
                                    as an explicit attribute of every item.
                                    This enhancement provides improved
                                    visualization throughout the model
                                    and schedule views.
                                         o     A global “Unit Of Measure”
                                               tab has been added to the
                                               scenario properties where
                                               users can visualize / define
                                               units of measure.
                                         o     Integration processes
                                               automatically populate this
                                               list when PS is run in an
                                               integrated manner


                                    3.14.1.2. Enhanced Alerts
                                    In PS, Alerts have been broken down into four distinct categories (Work Order, Demand,
                                    Inventory and Resource) and various types within each.

                                    These alert categories and types are added to the Model Workspace in the form of a tree
                                    control for easier navigation and summary data visualization




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                   Oracle Production Scheduling   51
The alert view is now tab based and summarized by category / type and is context
                                    sensitive to selection within the Model Workspace for easier navigation




                                    3.14.1.3. Work Order Centric KPI Comparisons
                                    The KPI comparison view can now be viewed as either Demand centric or Work Order
                                    Centric. Via a new dropdown option, you can now understand the impact on the work
                                    order schedule when comparing scenarios.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                   Oracle Production Scheduling   52
3.14.1.4. Access Operation and Routings from Operation Instances
                                    This usability enhancement allows the user to perform a right click on a given operation
                                    in any of the schedule Gantt charts and easily drill down to the operation and/or routing
                                    diagrams. This avoids the user having to navigate back through to the model workspace
                                    or the “where used” properties of a resource to in order to be open an operation.




                                    3.14.1.5. Auto-create Work Orders Directly from Demands
                                    For schedule prototyping purposes, scenario simulation purposes and/or product
                                    demonstrations, users sometimes create Work Orders directly in the PS in Work Order
                                    Editor using standard functionality. (i.e. Right click | Add Production Work Order).
                                    Once the work order is created, users usually peg these back to a given sales order.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                    Oracle Production Scheduling   53
This works well, but if there are many sales orders and the user wishes to create a work
                                    order for each demand / line item combination this could potentially take quite a bit of
                                    time.

                                    A new feature has been added to PS that allows users to automatically create Work
                                    Orders for a given sales order without even navigating to the Work Order Editor.

                                    A simple right click on a demand or a folder or a subset / mixture of folders and demands
                                    (via multi-select) allows users to automatically create a work order per demand.

                                    3.14.1.6. Find Functionality for Model Objects
                                    Find functionality is now available in PS using “CTRL-F” via the PS toolbar by selecting
                                    Edit | Find. This will launch a “Find” dialog box which provides text based searching in
                                    the PS model and the ability to drilldown to the “found” objects. You can limit the
                                    search to the following (by chosen scenario):

                                    o    All (will search all model objects listed below and their description fields as well)
                                    o    Supplies and Demands only
                                    o    Work Orders only
                                    o    All Resources
                                    o    Crews only
                                    o    Machines only
                                    o    Tools only
                                    o    Items only
                                    o    Operations only
                                    o    Routings only

                                    Selecting and double
                                    clicking the result (or
                                    selecting the “Open
                                    button) will drilldown
                                    to the selected object.
                                    For example, double
                                    clicking the operation
                                    code will open the
                                    operation diagram




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                       Oracle Production Scheduling   54
3.14.1.7. Visibility to Demand Fulfilled via Starting Inventory
                                    In previous versions of PS, if an order was fulfilled from both production and either
                                    starting inventory or a supply event, the starting inventory was not simultaneously
                                    displayed in the Production Pegging view (only the Production). This release addresses
                                    this by explicitly detailing each of the pegging relationships.

                                    This applies to materials, WIP and finished goods. The demand for “Item A” shows a
                                    green diamond at the start of horizon indicating some of the order is taken from
                                    inventory. The production below it indicates the remaining quantity is from
                                    manufacturing activities. “Material 1” is consumed in operation A and pegged to both an
                                    on-hand quantity and a purchase recommendation.




                                    “Material 2” is pegged to starting inventory and an incoming purchase order, each
                                    represented with a diamond representing incoming supply

                                    3.14.1.8. Automatic Reconciliation of Schedule Backlog
                                    It is common to see shop floor backlog in the schedule views to notify the scheduler that
                                    the shop floor is behind and action should be taken to reconcile the situation. There are
                                    a variety of different scenarios which cause backlog in the schedule for example:
                                         o     Work order operations having a Firm Start Date, Firm End Date, or Firm Date
                                               Range in the past,
                                         o     >1 work order operations having an Active Status on the work order routing
                                               operation step which conflicts with another work order
                                         o     >1 work order operations with a “firm” status with overlapping date ranges
                                    For example, in the screen capture below, the area shaded in yellow indicates a point in
                                    time that occurs prior to the horizon start.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Production Scheduling   55
While this provides excellent feedback to users, it also introduces another issue – the
                                    operations can not actually be run in the past. Prior to this release of PS, reconciling the
                                    schedule was primarily performed by using Cut | Paste in the Resource Gantt.

                                    While this method worked well, it could potentially be somewhat cumbersome to do
                                    when there are many operations running behind and/or many resources in the model.

                                    This release of PS provides the user with a right click menu item “Enforce Horizon
                                    Start” on resources. Enabling this flag (or setting it in the data model) and performing a
                                    repair solve will “push forward” all operations on that resource to the start of the horizon
                                    while maintaining operation sequence and at the same time respecting upstream /
                                    downstream precedence constraints. Enabling this flag (or setting it in the data model)
                                    and performing a coldsolve will accomplish the same thing without user intervention (i.e.
                                    Auto-reconciliation).

                                    For example, in the diagram below, the operations running on Die Bonder 2 are running
                                    behind. The user selects Die Bonder 2, performs a right click, selects “Enforce Horizon
                                    Start” and performs a
                                    repair solve (or cold
                                    solve). (Users are also
                                    able to multi-select and
                                    enable this flag for all
                                    highlighted resources).
                                    The operations on the
                                    applicable resource are
                                    “pushed forward”,
                                    maintaining the original
                                    sequence. This can also
                                    be persisted in the data
                                    model for a given
                                    resource as well.

                                    Operations running in the past will be pushed to start at the beginning of the horizon.
                                    The sequence of operations on the resource will not be changed. In many cases, the
                                    operations running behind will be one of several operations that are contained within a
                                    routing. Since routings have precedence constraints between operations, moving
                                    operations from the past to horizon start may have consequences on other operations in
                                    the routing. Any upstream or downstream pegged operations of this operation will be
                                    pushed forward (if precedence constraints dictate).

                                    3.14.1.9. Batchable Resources
                                    A “Batchable” resource can be described as a machine / oven / kiln (or similar) that can
                                    process one or more items simultaneously, but
                                    only if they share 1 or more similar “Attributes”
                                    (such as Temperature, Color, Duration etc) and
                                    “Attribute Value” such as 1 Hour @ 400 Degrees

                                    Typically, these resources have several “spots” or
                                    something equivalent in them. Items when
                                    processes within these resources consume 1 or
                                    more of these spots.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                      Oracle Production Scheduling   56
This enhancement to PS enables the following behavior:
                                         o     Allows users to explicitly define a given resource as “Batchable” along with a
                                               minimum and maximum spot capacity
                                         o     Define a pull forward window to allow a resource to be filled to it’s minimum
                                               spot capacity
                                         o     Allow users to explicitly associate 1 or more user defined attributes and attribute
                                               values to an item. T
                                         o     Automatic grouping of operations on a batchable resource by attribute
                                         o     If this is 1 attribute (such as temperature), all operations will be grouped
                                               together of the same temperature up to the max capacity of the resource.
                                         o     If the user groups by more than 1 attribute (for example temperature and
                                               duration), this implies that all operations sharing the same duration and
                                               temperature will be run together to the max capacity of the resource.
                                         o     Manually move operations between batches if desired or manually move an
                                               entire batch. For example, if a sequence on a resource is scheduled to be 10
                                               Hours at 500 Degrees followed by 12 Hours at 400 Degrees, the user can switch
                                               the order (via cut/paste, drag/drop, re-sequence in the resource gantt).

                                    For example, the Resource Gantt below illustrates several ovens (CC4101 -> CC4105).
                                    Each of these ovens constrain a variety of operations which are running at the same time
                                    and grouped by temperature and duration. The summary colour at the oven level
                                    indicates spot utilization. Bubble help indicates the attributes of the batch and one can
                                    utilize an option in the Toolbar which allows you to highlight only certain batches if you
                                    wish (in orange).




                                    Batches are of course applicable to regular manual scheduling activities. You can cut,
                                    paste entire batches between ovens, move operations from batch to another, resequence
                                    batches and even manually move operations into another batch which does not share the
                                    same attributes (you will be provided with a warning…).

                                    3.14.1.10. Consistent Resource Assignment within a Portion of a Routing
                                    Alternate resources in a given manufacturing operation are very common amongst most
                                    Production Scheduling customer models. These alternate resources are modeled via the
                                    use of resource sets. In many cases, this resource set recurs in an upstream or
                                    downstream operation(s). In many cases, it is imperative that once a resource is chosen in

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                        Oracle Production Scheduling   57
an upstream operation, it must also be chosen in a downstream operation. This works
                                    well in PS and previously was a routing wide configurable option known as “Consistent
                                    Resource Assignment”. Users expressed the desire to be able to perform consistent
                                    resource assignment within only a selected group of operations within this routing - for
                                    example, operation steps 10, 20 and 30 must run on the same resource but steps 40,50
                                    and 60 even though share a common resource with their preceding operations can run on
                                    the alternate. This enhancement in PS allows users to be able to configure PS to do just
                                    this.

                                    Consider the following manufacturing routing. To make item “A”, it must through a
                                    setup, run and cleanup operation where it is then cooled. The item passes through a
                                    recursive process - Setup(2), Run(2), and Cleanup(2). With the exception of the
                                    Cooling operation, all operations run on either M1 or M2, as illustrated for the first Run
                                    operation.




                                        When the first setup operation occurs on either M1 or M2, resource assignment
                                         must be the same for the following 2 operation steps.
                                        If M1 is chosen in the setup operation, it must also be chosen in the run and cleanup.
                                         (You don’t want to cleanup a machine that you didn’t run on).
                                        The cooling process occurs in a staging area. However, after the cooling operation
                                         takes place, the same logic occurs for the next recurrence of the setup, run and
                                         cleanup operations, but a different alternate can be chosen.
                                        The first three steps must run on the same machine and the last three steps must also
                                         run on the same machine.

                                    The user opens up the properties of the routing and creates 2 distinct group and assigns
                                    the first 3 operations to the first group and the last 3 operations to the second group as
                                    illustrated.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                      Oracle Production Scheduling   58
The user performs a solve. The first three operations are run on M1. After the cooling
                                    operation, the remaining three operations are run on M2. This could of course all be on
                                    M1 or all of M2 or in reverse order. The point is the operations in the groups share the
                                    same resource.




                                              If operations are not assigned to groups, they are permitted to be run on any
                                               given resource.
                                              If the user is using All of Sets (i.e. >1 Resource such as a Machine1 and Tool1
                                               OR a Machine2 and Tool2), consistent resource assignment applies to the group.
                                               i.e. The group must be the same.
                                              When migrating a model from previous versions, the import will detect if a
                                               routing has consistent resource assignment selected and auto-create a group and
                                               assign all operations to it.

                                    3.14.1.11. Resource-specific Cycle Times for Campaign Run Optimization

                                    PS provides the ability to define:

                                                    o    Minimum cycle times in various bucket sizes. In a previous release of
                                                         PS, cycle size was either a Shift, Day or a Week. Cycle sizes are now
                                                         flexible. For example, a cycle can be 2 weeks, 4 days etc.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                        Oracle Production Scheduling   59
If the resource specific cycle size checkbox is selected, planners can enable this flag
                                         by CRO resource. Therefore, different lines in the plant can be on their own cycle
                                         times rather than having to adhere to global cycle.




                                    3.14.1.12. Minimize Work Order Schedule Infeasibilities
                                    As Production Scheduling is a finite capacity scheduling application, some situations can
                                    occur which would result in an infeasible production schedule. These situations are
                                    always being monitored and resolved through improved data validation, alerting and
                                    solver handling of problematic inputs, and has drastically improved throughout the past
                                    several releases. This release continues to improve on this theme. For example, it is
                                    quite common and sometimes unavoidable to have:

                                                    o    >1 work order operation firmed on a same single capacity resource with
                                                         overlapping date / times.
                                                    o    A firm date range on a work order operation which is shorter than total
                                                         operation run / elapsed time

                                    In prior versions of PS:
                                                    o    If the dates fell within the fixed time fence, PS would reconcile the
                                                         infeasibility and alert the planner that shop floor backlog exists
                                                    o    If these work order operations were outside of the fixed time fence this
                                                         resulted in an infeasible schedule.
                                                    o    In this release there is an added capability for the solver to resolve
                                                         conflicts of this type outside of the fixed time fence if necessary to avoid
                                                         this situation.
                                    For example, take the following 2 work orders which are both firmed at the same time
                                    outside of the FTF:




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                          Oracle Production Scheduling   60
Solved in a previous version – the schedule was infeasible and the planner was provided
                                    with an error message indicative of such.

                                    In this release, the schedule is feasible. The highest priority work order is moved to start
                                    earlier in the horizon.

                                    Supporting alerts are also provided to the user to indicate the firm date violation.

                                    3.14.1.13. Disable Units of Effort for Setup and Cleanup Operations
                                    PS has a differentiating feature introduced several releases ago which provides the ability
                                    to schedule Work Orders according to their individual “unit of effort.”

                                    This feature cross references the routing template to “break down” work order operations
                                    into the lot multiples specified on the routing. The feature can be enabled as either a
                                    global option applying to all routings, or the user can specify the feature for specific
                                    routings. For example, if this feature is leveraged, a work order is scheduled to
                                    release inventory according to every lot multiple. In the example below, inventory is
                                    moved between operations in 25 unit increments – the work order has only 3 operations
                                    listed on it, but PS will break it down according to the routing lot multiple.




                                        Inventory Production and Consumption is accurate
                                        Makespan is accurate
                                        Resource usage is accurate
                                    In some cases, it is quite possible that the first operation may be a setup operation and
                                    the last operation may be a cleanup operation.


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                      Oracle Production Scheduling   61
In this case, the setup & cleanup operations only need to be executed once as opposed to
                                    three times. This release of PS has the ability to specify an operation of type “Setup,
                                    Production or Cleanup”.




                                    Setup and Cleanup operations will not be broken down to their units of effort.




                                    3.14.1.14. Resource “All of” Sets
                                    PS provides excellent resource offloading functionality within an operation (e.g.
                                    Machine 1 can be substituted for Machine 2, Crew 1 for Crew 2, etc.) via the use of
                                    “Resource Sets”. This type of set can be referred to as a “one of” type of set, meaning
                                    one of the resources within the set must be used. This release adds a new set type on
                                    operations that support resource replacement “groups” within PS ( an “All of” type of
                                    set).

                                    This means that resource exclusivity relationships can now be defined directly within a
                                    given operation as opposed to having to use Operation Sets.

                                    For example, Operator 1 can only run Line 1 and Line 3. Operator 2 can only run Line 3
                                    and Line 2. The new operation structure within PS is depicted below.



Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                    Oracle Production Scheduling   62
The work order editor has a new column to indicate the name of the “all of” set. This is
                                    where manual overrides can be made to which set is attached to the work order. If an
                                    alternate set has a different number of resources, rows will be added / subtracted as
                                    appropriate.




                                    Paste targets in the Gantt charts are consistent with previous versions of PS. Offloading
                                    to an alternate set will show the target in orange. Pasting to a different time on the same
                                    set will be highlighted in light blue.




                                    A “1 of” resource set can contain a mixture of “All of” sets, plus single resources.

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Production Scheduling   63
The “All of Sets” are shown in the Production Pegging View. The operations on the
                                    solver selected “All of Set” is summarized on the set name, so the user will have
                                    visibility into which “All of” set has been chosen without expanding all of the sets.




                                    From an offloading perspective, The overall approach is virtually the same as previous
                                    versions of PS, but the offloading calculation must be applied to all members of the set.
                                    If any one of the resources within an “All of” set have their threshold violated, all
                                    resources will be offloaded. If any one of the resources in the target “All of” set have
                                    their offload thresholds violated prior to the offloading taking place, the operation will
                                    not be offloaded to that set. At this point, an additional alternate will be evaluated - if
                                    no alternates have available capacity, no offloading should take place. If the primary is
                                    significantly overloaded, offloading will still occur to less loaded (but still overloaded)
                                    alternates. This effectively spreads the load and will help get orders met as quickly as
                                    possible.

                                    The PS “Consistent Resource Assignment” feature is also impacted by this enhancement.
                                    Prior to this release, Consistent Resource Assignment across routing steps was based on
                                    a single resource. If “Line 1” was chosen in Step 1 of a routing, it must also be chosen
                                    in a subsequent step. In this release, Consistent Resource Assignment applies to
                                    members of the “all of” set.



Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Production Scheduling   64
3.14.1.15. Hard Links Between Work Orders
                                    This enhancement allows a “many to many” relationship amongst Work Orders along
                                    with the ability for the user to specify precedence constraints between these Work
                                    Orders. This is handy if a specific sequence is required between several work orders.

                                    The business requirements for this enhancement are best explained with a simple
                                    example. Assume the following manufacturing process.

                                    To make Item A, the following routing steps take place. The lot multiple across the
                                    manufacturing routing is 25 units. Item A is produced by Operation C.




                                    Operation A consumes an inventory “Material A”.




                                    Material A is a subassembly also manufactured in the plant as per the following process.
                                    The lot multiple across this routing is also 25 units. The material is produced by
                                    Operation C1.




                                    Assume the user creates a work order for the finished good and the material (50 units
                                    each).




                                    These Work Orders are related through inventory, so will generally schedule JIT and
                                    have some degree of overlap as illustrated below.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                    Oracle Production Scheduling   65
If the user wishes to explicitly relate these Work Orders to one another (for example for
                                    lot control, quality reasons etc), they can specify the relationship in the work order editor
                                    in the new “Related Work Orders” tab. Precedence relationships (to facilitate a cooling
                                    process, inspection etc) can also be specified, along with min / max separation
                                    constraints.




                                    Assume the user populates “Starts After End” with a minimum separation time of 5
                                    Hours. When “Units of Effort” is used, the 5 hour minimum separation is applied to the
                                    pegged work order routing instances. In this case, the Work Orders are for 50 units each
                                    (remember, the routing has a lot multiple of 25 units), therefore there are 2 routing
                                    instances and separation is applied twice.




                                    The relationships between the Work Orders can be “many to many”.
                                         •     A given work order can be linked to many “next” work orders
                                         •     A given work order can have many “previous” work orders.
                                    Manual Scheduling within PS will have all appropriate precedence relationships
                                    respected.

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                      Oracle Production Scheduling   66
3.14.1.16. Dynamic Throughput Rates on Resources
                                    Some customers vary their production rates fairly dynamically and frequently. For
                                    example, the speed of a line can change daily or weekly based on available labor. The
                                    net effect of dynamic rate changes is simple – they make a given manufacturing
                                    operation take more or less time to complete in a given time interval.

                                    There are various reasons why the speed of a production line may change which may
                                    include (but by no means are limited to) areas such as:
                                         •     trial manufacturing
                                         •     process changes
                                         •     line improvements
                                         •     labour constraints
                                         •     new product development
                                         •     temperature / humidity variations
                                    This release of PS provides the user with the ability to specify dynamic rates on a
                                    resource (crew, machine, tool).

                                    For example, Packing Line #1 produces items, A, B, C and D. At “normal” speeds, it
                                    produces product at a rate of 100 units per hour. In this example, Item D is produced in
                                    runs of 1700 units per week.




                                    Assume due to a labour constraint, the packer now runs at the following throughput
                                    rates:
                                         •     80% in the 1st week
                                         •     100% in the 2nd week
                                         •     150% in the 3rd week
                                    The user navigates to the Packer resource properties to the “Throughput tab” and defines
                                    the appropriate dynamic percentages.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Production Scheduling   67
The speed at which the items are produced can clearly be seen in Gantt chart by the
                                    operation length as well as by looking at the steepness of the slope of the item graph for
                                    a given item.




                                    If >1 resource on the operation also has a dynamic throughput range, the “lowest” value
                                    for a given time interval “wins”. For example, if an operation requires both “Packer 1”
                                    and “Tool 1” and they have competing dynamic throughput rates and effective ranges.




                                    In a resource set, resources can have different throughput rates for different date ranges.
                                    If production is offloaded to an alternate resource with a different throughput, the
                                    operation duration on the alternate resource will reflect the new throughput.


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                      Oracle Production Scheduling   68
If an operation is moved to a timeslot via manual scheduling (Cut | Paste, Resequencing,
                                    Remove Idle etc) that has a different throughput rate defined, the operation duration
                                    should change according to the throughput in effect.

                                    If the user offloads an operation manually to a different resource with a different rate, the
                                    operation duration will change according to the throughput in effect.

                                    If the user changes the rate on a resource and runs a repair solve, the repair solve will
                                    recognize and change the duration of the operation accordingly.

                                    3.14.1.17. PS Data Connector Port to Sun, HP and AIX
                                    The PS SCBM / Oracle EBS data connector now runs on the following platforms:
                                                 Windows (previously supported)
                                                 Linux (previously supported)
                                                 Sun (New)
                                                 HP (New)
                                                 AIX (New)
                                    This allows for the PS connector to be deployed on a central server apart from PS if
                                    desired. All command syntaxes stays the same

                                    3.14.1.18. Export Selected Model Data During Schedule Publish
                                    As part of the File | Publish process, users now have the ability to publish the PS model
                                    or chosen objects of the data model in XML format. (i.e. changeover rules, groups,
                                    crews, machines, tools, operations etc).

                                    This is useful if PS is to be the system of record for any data that is not available within
                                    the ERP system.
                                              The next time a model is imported into PS, integration processes could be
                                               extended to reference the various data model elements exported from the
                                               previous scheduling session which could amend to the new model prior to import
                                    A new tab in the Publish Profiles allows users to define which data objects to publish

                                    Whenever the Publish Process is called (whether in batch or interactively), the chosen
                                    data will be exported to a user named XML file.
                                              Interactively, the published model is based off of the approved schedule
                                               Since the schedule publish process batch file points to a named scenario, you
                                               can export the model from any given scenario which may or may not be the
                                               approved schedule.
                                    Aspects of the model can be output to a user defined filename – any object within the
                                    model can be output to this specific file.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                       Oracle Production Scheduling   69
3.14.1.19. PS XML Model – Unique Extension
                                    The PS XML data files which can be imported and exported now have an additional
                                    extension available. The PS XML non compressed file can be the standard .xml
                                    extension or uniquely to PS as an .ops. The .ops file is still standard XML format, but
                                    will launch PS directly upon being double clicked. The PS XML compressed file can be
                                    the standard .xml.gz extension or uniquely to PS as an .opz. The .opz file is still standard
                                    compressed XML format, but will launch PS directly upon being double clicked. The
                                    icon for either is the PS standard icon.




                                    3.14.1.20. Enhanced Auto-generated Routings
                                    The list below outlines a few typical scenarios that cause “Auto-Generation” of
                                    Operations and Routing templates based on work order structure within Production
                                    Scheduling:
                                         Work orders which were generated in a “Configurator” program. Essentially,
                                             Work Orders are dynamically created and passed to PS. No corresponding
                                             routing exists in PS.
                                         Non-standard crews, machines or tools included on the work order bill of
                                             resource.
                                         Contrary to the above, sometimes the work order would be missing crews,
                                             machines or tools on work order operations.
                                         Non-standard items included on the work order bill of material.
                                         Missing items on the work order bill of material
                                         Additional operations included on the work order routing.
                                         Missing operations on the work order routing (for example, Oracle EBS does not
                                             pass “Closed” work order operations to PS).
                                         Operation Sets specified on the work order routing


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Production Scheduling   70
In a previous release of PS, a new feature was added to PS which removed the PS
                                    dependency on having a routing template pre-created in the model for every work order
                                    in the application. For those scenarios outlined, PS dynamically cross references the
                                    work order routing against the routing template during the import process. If a work
                                    order meets on of the problematic scenarios outlined earlier, one can expect to see a
                                    newly created routing which directly corresponds to the work order in question. If
                                    operations differ from their standard templates, a newly created operation will be present
                                    in the routing as well.

                                    When PS was generating this routing and operation templates, it was not reading the
                                    precedence constraints on the work order routing between the operations, nor were the
                                    resource sets being constructed. This release of PS has enhanced logic in the import
                                    process which addresses these 2 issues. When generating the precedence constraints for
                                    the auto-generated routing, the import now looks at the operation codes and cross
                                    references the precedence constraints on the routing. If the work order has different
                                    precedence constraints than the routing template, the precedence constraints as specified
                                    on the work order routing will be used when the auto-generated routing is created.
                                    Similarly for resource sets - the operation template is reference to reconstruct the
                                    resource sets.

                                    3.14.1.21. Selective Work Order Release to Production
                                    After a user approves a schedule within PS, the general business process is to publish the
                                    schedule back to ERP. The publish process within PS uses a “Release” timefence to
                                    filter out work orders from the release process. If a work order starts before the end of
                                    this timefence, it will be included in the release. If the user wishes to include / exclude
                                    individual work orders from this process (regardless of start time), this was not possible
                                    prior to this release. This new release provides a new mechanism for the user to be able
                                    to individually select which work orders are released back to ERP.

                                    For example, after analyzing the schedule, the user approves the schedule he/she is
                                    happy with. The user then performs a right click on the scenario name and selects a new
                                    option “Edit Work Order Release”.




                                    This launches a new dialog view which lists all work orders and their various attributes.
                                    The Publish Profile selected has a Release Horizon. Any Work Orders starting within
                                    this release horizon will be auto-selected. The user can override this if desired.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Production Scheduling   71
3.14.2.         Release 12.1.2

                                    3.14.2.1. Resource Business Objectives
                                    From a resource perspective, Production Scheduling generically considers all crew,
                                    machine, tool capacity and calendar constraints simultaneously when sequencing
                                    operations. Focusing and resolving the most critical constraints in the scheduling
                                    horizon has been regarded as the most effective scheduling strategy to resolve multi-
                                    stage floating bottleneck problems when sequencing operations. Addressing the most
                                    critical constraints first breaks down sequencing problems into smaller sub-problems
                                    which are generally “easier” to resolve.

                                    However, it sometimes is desirable for users to be able to dictate to the Production
                                    Scheduling solver which resources to focus on first.

                                    Currently in Production Scheduling, users can dictate to the solver engine which
                                    resource or group of resources should be focused on and in what order - essentially
                                    enabling scheduling in an incremental fashion via some simple configuration in the
                                    application. However, solver objectives cannot be set changed each stage – they are set
                                    at a global level.

                                    The scope of this enhancement is to allow different solver objectives by solve stage. For
                                    example, one may wish to optimize changeovers on the injection molder, then mix the
                                    upstream materials JIT, then immediately pack the kits and assemblies from the molding
                                    using a prebuild solve strategy. This approach optimizes the bottleneck stage while
                                    minimizing WIP between upstream / downstream stages.

                                    This enhancement will allow users to:

                                    1) Set solver objectives by group of resources (i.e. a Stage)

                                    2) Insert breakpoints where the user can review solve progress at any given stage (and
                                       even refine the schedule as appropriate via manual scheduling and then resume the
                                       larger solve process).

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Production Scheduling   72
3) Setup Multi-stage Campaign Run Optimization (CRO) – users will have the ability
                                       the utilize the CRO algorithm in a multi-stage fashion provided the stages have
                                       decoupling inventory and the CRO resource is not recursive.




                                    This enhancement will have many benefits including:
                               •    Increase PS market applicability
                                    • Address business where multi-stage strategies are necessary
                                    • Minimization of Work In Progress Inventory (Directly address make | store | pack
                                        requirements)
                               •    Reduce cost of ownership for our customers
                                    • Directly enabling user scheduling strategy this eliminating potential complex
                                        workarounds to achieve desired results
                               •    Allow multi-stage use of the Campaign Run Optimization Algorithm which also
                                    provides:
                                    • Multi-stage routing offloading
                                    • Improved alternate resource selection
                                    • Multi-level SDS minimization and min run length

                                    3.14.2.2. Production Scheduling as a Web Service Call
                                    Production Scheduling has been enhanced to be able to be called as a service - the solver
                                    and application have been decoupled such that the import and solve process can
                                    optionally be run on the server – this includes Linux, Sun Solaris, HP-UX, and AIX
                                    platforms. The user interface continues to run on the planners windows client (includes
                                    support for Vista).

                                    This enables Production Scheduling users to have their models presolved on the server –
                                    saving time and improving efficiency. It also allows for batch solving of multiple plans
                                    (i.e. Automation of the “what if” process).

                                    The server side functionality creates a deployable solved model which includes import
                                    and solver statistics in log files which are all downloaded to the client desktop on planner
                                    request. This enhancement also includes improved application status logging and
                                    filtering - including access to various event statuses and solver statistics log from within
                                    Production Scheduling for events which took place on the server.

                                    3.14.2.3. Undo Functionality for Manual Scheduling

                                    Manual Scheduling in Production Scheduling includes a variety of activities such as:

                                        Cut/Paste
                                        Resequence

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Production Scheduling   73
    Remove idle
                                        Change durations of operation instances
                                        Change start or end times of operations
                                        Change calendar events in the Gantt charts (add / remove / change)
                                        Change resource assignment (i.e. manually offload)
                                        Fixing / Unfixing operations (single or multiple operations)
                                        Change lead times for Purchase Order Recommendations.

                                    Following each of these actions, there is a repair based solve action to institute the
                                    change and “repair” any upstream / downstream ramifications this change may have
                                    caused. However it is possible that the user may not accept the repaired schedule or
                                    simply made a mistake when implementing this change.         This enhancement to
                                    Production Scheduling provides the ability to “Undo” these changes. The Undo action
                                    reverts back to the previous “solve state” prior to the change. Examples include:

                                    Action: {manual change} | UNDO
                                    Result: Will undo the manual change

                                    Action: {manual change} | Repair | UNDO
                                    Result: Will undo the repair and manual change

                                    Action: {manual change} | {manual change} | UNDO | …
                                    Result: Will undo both manual changes

                                    Action: {manual change} | {manual change} | Repair | UNDO
                                    Result: Will undo the repair and manual changes

                                    Action: {manual change} | Repair | {manual change} | Repair | UNDO
                                    Result: Will undo the 2nd repair and 2nd manual change

                                    Action: {manual change} | Repair | {manual change} | Repair | UNDO | UNDO
                                    Result: Will undo the both repairs and both manual changes

                                    Undo also applies to another new feature in Production Scheduling (Resource Business
                                    Objectives). Included in this feature is the ability to solve groups of resources in a
                                    “Stage” and perform manual scheduling activities between stages (i.e. At a breakpoint) in
                                    the solve process. Undo can be performed within this context as well. This includes
                                    the ability to undo manual changes in the stage itself as well as to completely undo a
                                    given “stage” of the solve process - upon which the solution will revert back to the
                                    previous solved “stage”.

                                    For example:

                                    Action: {solve stage | breakpoint} | manual change | Repair | Undo
                                    Result: Will undo the manual change

                                    Action: {solve stage} | {solve stage | breakpoint} Undo
                                    Result: Will undo the 2nd solve stage – result will revert back to the first solve stage




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                      Oracle Production Scheduling   74
3.14.2.4. Attribute Based Sequence Dependent Setups

                                    This enhancement to Production Scheduling is two-fold:

                                    1) Improves the current sequence dependent setup rule representation to be Attribute
                                       based rather than having to specify rules by operation code or group. Users will
                                       now have the ability to specify changeover rules by attribute type / value. For
                                       example, providing the ability to specify a Flavour Changeover (Attribute) which
                                       includes Apple -> Blueberry (Attribute Values) etc. The Production Scheduling
                                       integration to Oracle EBS will use Setup Type as an attribute and various values
                                       associated with Setup Type as the appropriate Attribute Values.




                                    2) Extend sequence dependent setups to Batchable resources, which currently do not
                                       have these setups either represented or optimized.




                                    Operations and Groups will have attributes assigned to them. Changeover rules specified
                                    by attribute will automatically associated all operations sharing the same attribute.


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                   Oracle Production Scheduling   75
This enhancement to Production Scheduling also allows the user to specify if
                                    changeovers can be concurrent or sequential if multiple attributes are specified and can
                                    be performed at once. For example – if I am performing a size changeover, can the
                                    flavor changeover be performed at the same time or does it have to follow the size
                                    changeover?




                                    3.14.2.5. Visualization of Campaign Run Optimization Cycle Boundaries

                                    This enhancement allows users to explicitly visualize manufacturing cycle boundaries
                                    when using Campaign Run Optimization. This provides for improved visibility to
                                    changeover patterns in and across manufacturing cycle boundaries.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                    Oracle Production Scheduling   76
CRO Manufacturing Cycle
                                                                          Boundaries shown in brown.



                                    3.14.2.6. New Alert Type and Drilldowns

                                    A new “Resource Utilization” alert has been introduced to indicate when resources
                                    which are not part of a bottleneck resource group have capacity violations (when
                                    capacity constraints are relaxed) Drilldowns to the Gantt charts from all resource alerts
                                    are included this new alert as well.




                                    When using Batchable resources, drilldowns are also now provided from the “Minimum
                                    Batch Violation” alerts as previous versions did not allow this.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Production Scheduling   77
3.14.2.7. Drilldowns from the Work Order Editor to the Gantt Charts

                                    Additional drilldowns introduced in the application make finding work orders in the
                                    Gantt charts much easier. The drilldown from the work order editor which is launched
                                    via right click in the editor from the operation code takes the user directly to either the
                                    Production Pegging view, the Resource or Operation Gantt views. Drilldown from the
                                    Work Order Editor highlights the selected operation and performs a context sensitive
                                    zoom as well.




                                    Drilldown zooms and highlights the application operation:




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                         Oracle Production Scheduling   78
3.14.2.8. Mass Change on Items and Resources

                                    For mass change simulations, Production Scheduling now provides the ability to mass
                                    edit item and resource properties. All item properties and resource properties can easily
                                    be changed simply by multi-selecting the appropriate items or resources in the model
                                    workspace and invoking the “change” function. Change is specific to the scenario and
                                    session only for simulation and scenario comparison purposes (changes are not sent back
                                    to ERP)

                                    Changing Item Data via right click on >1 items and selection of “Change” in the menu:




                                    Mass Change of Resource Data:




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                    Oracle Production Scheduling   79
3.14.3.         Release 12.1.3

                                    3.14.3.1. Maintenance Work Order Scheduling

                                    The scheduling of maintenance resources at a maintenance depot can be quite complex.
                                    Several new constructs have been introduced into PS to allow for this:

                                    Visits – This new data construct allows users to associate one or more work orders,
                                    where the work orders will fall inside Visit envelope dates such as the anticipated
                                    aircraft arrival into a maintenance depot and the request date associated with the
                                    completion of the Visit.

                                    Milestones – These provide the ability to specify logical groupings of work orders within
                                    a Visit. The combination of Visits and Milestones provides a capability to define task
                                    hierarchies that flexibly group work orders together in both concurrent and sequential
                                    patterns where work can diverge and converge.

                                    Work Breakdown Structure – Several new key attributes have been added to work orders
                                    which can be used for organizing and filtering work orders.

                                    The scheduling of visits must take into consideration numerous constraints. It must
                                    account for:

                                         •     Visit start / end dates
                                         •     Visit milestones
                                         •     Task hierarchies
                                         •     Crew, machine, tool, and material constraints
                                         •     Operation / work order precedence constraints
                                         •     Grouping of work based on work breakdown structure

                                    To support these requirements, the following key capabilities are now available in Oracle
                                    Production Scheduling:

                                    Collection of Oracle cMRO Work Orders
                                    Production Scheduling now optionally collects Oracle CMRO maintenance work orders.

                                    New Operational Data Store Tables for Data Augmentation
                                    Six new tables, housing information such as visits, work breakdown structure, work
                                    order relationships, and milestones, have been added into the Operational Data Store
                                    (ODS) as this information is required to properly schedule cMRO work orders.
                                    Currently, this information is not available to standard planning collections from cMRO.
                                    An API into these new tables to augment collected data has been added to complement
                                    the existing collections framework as PS requires this information to generate a
                                    maintenance schedule.

                                    The overall architecture is represented in the following diagram.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                    Oracle Production Scheduling   80
Support for Visits, Milestones, and Complex Task Hierarchy Relationships
                                    Visits have been added to Oracle Production Scheduling to allow for scheduling,
                                    tracking, and grouping of tasks in the form of work orders and milestones. Visits and
                                    milestones are presented in various views in Production Scheduling and allow the
                                    planner to leverage the rich set of existing functionality to review and refine the
                                    schedule. Visits and milestones also present new constraints which govern the
                                    production schedule that is generated.




                                    Advanced Work Order Filtering
                                    Work order filters can be used to facilitate the review and analysis of the schedule and
                                    allow the planner to “slice and dice” the data in the various Gantt, Utilization, and Work
                                    Order views. This feature allows the planner to hone in on specific tasks and answer
                                    questions such as “show me all work orders in stage 3a from July 2-July 4 utilizing the
                                    Advanced Airframe and Power crew which are firm”. While this feature has been added
                                    to facilitate cMRO workflows, it will benefit many of our existing manufacturing
                                    customers as they will also be able to filter on many of the existing constructs already
                                    available in work orders.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                    Oracle Production Scheduling   81
Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document   Oracle Production Scheduling   82
Representation of Work Breakdown Structure
                                    The logical grouping of work can be accomplished by leveraging the Work Breakdown
                                    Structure constructs in PS. A Display Parameter tab has been augmented in the Plan
                                    options screen with new data that can be used to create logical groupings of work orders.




                                    The work breakdown structure is populated as work order attributes and can be viewed
                                    in the work order editor. This allows for advanced filtering in Work Order Filters where
                                    they can be used to group work orders in the various views when analyzing the schedule.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                    Oracle Production Scheduling   83
Once the model is reviewed and analyzed in Production Scheduling, work order dates
                                    generated by the schedule and can than be released back to cMRO for execution.




                                    The solution may be applicable for other industries with similar requirements, but focus
                                    has been on solving aircraft short term maintenance scheduling problems.

                                    3.14.3.2. Disable Multiple Release from the Same Plan for the Same Order
                                    This enhancement allows Production Scheduling to keep track of work orders which are
                                    sent back to source as “Released” and disable subsequent release from the same plan to


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                    Oracle Production Scheduling   84
prevent creating duplicate supplies in the ERP system. This process functions per the
                                    procedure below:

                                    •    The user generates a plan and downloads to the client per standard procedures.
                                    •    The user solves the model (if not already solved on the server).
                                    •    The user then saves the schedule as a .dxt file (PS persistence for solved models).
                                         This is a key step, as re-importing from XML source will not preserve this
                                         information.
                                    •    Once the scheduler is happy with the plan, the user will then approve or “Release”
                                         selected Work Orders to source and publish to ASCP as she/he deems appropriate
                                         (no change to existing functionality).
                                    •    After this action, the user will not be able to release the same work orders from the
                                         application as the checkbox indicating which work orders to release will be grayed
                                         out. The user is also free to close the model and reopen the .dxt file as necessary.

                                         Illustration:
                                         The user selects the first four work orders for release:




                                         The user “releases” back to source:




                                         On subsequent navigation to the Release View, the Work Order Release Checkbox is
                                         no longer selectable for those work orders:




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                       Oracle Production Scheduling   85
•    If the user does want to release the same work orders again for some reason,
                                                    they can open the original XML file that was downloaded from integration.
                                               •    Any work orders not previously marked as released will still be available for
                                                    release or publish (as planned orders) into ASCP.


                                    3.14.3.3. User Defined Ideal Sequence

                                    Production Scheduling natively provides the ability to dynamically calculate an ideal
                                    operation sequence for Campaign Run Optimized Resources per manufacturing cycle.
                                    This is based on changeover cost or time (user specified) in the Scenario / Solver
                                    Options. The changeover matrix contains the applicable penalty factors of moving
                                    between different operations producing different items. The solver performs an
                                    evaluation of these penalties and computes the ideal sequence on this resource. CRO
                                    then optimally computes the tradeoff between carrying inventory, stocking out, incurring
                                    changeovers, using alternate machines, alternate routings or violating safety stock in and
                                    across manufacturing cycles and may optionally pull work forward to delay operations
                                    appropriately.
                                    In many environments, users simply wish to dictate this order of operations to the solver
                                    in lieu of having to construct a penalty matrix to influence this. While this is possible to
                                    configure using costs, this enhancement allows users to specify the sequence operations
                                    should be scheduled in CRO according to attribute. This is an alternate sequencing
                                    strategy compared to the current CRO sequencing strategies of Cost or Time, and is
                                    available for CRO resources only.
                                    Solver options are enhanced to indicate the Run Sequence as User Defined (by solve
                                    stage, as illustrated, or in the global solver options):




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                        Oracle Production Scheduling   86
The mechanism in which the “ideal” sequence is defined is by selecting and sorting of
                                    associated attributes and their attribute values on CRO resources in the model.
                                    For example, take attributes “Size” and “Grade”. Within “Size” there are 1/4 Inch, 1/3
                                    Inch and 1/4 Inch as attribute values. Within the “Grade” attribute, there are Grades A
                                    and B.
                                    Assume the user defined Ideal Sequence is to cycle by size and grade within the size, as
                                    outlined in the following example:
                                    1/4 Inch-Grade A -> 1/4 Inch Grade B -> 1/3 Inch-Grade A -> 1/3 Inch Grade B -> 1/2
                                    Inch-Grade A -> 1/2 Inch Grade B.
                                    This would be setup in Production Scheduling in the Attributes tab where attributes are
                                    associated to resources.


                                    E
                                    s
                                    s
                                    e
                                    n
                                    t
                                    i
                                    a
                                    l
                                    l
                                    y
                                    ,

                                    t
                                    h
                                    e
                                     “order” in which the selected attributes and attribute values in the right column are
                                    structured in the UI dictates the ideal sequence of operations (the operations must be
                                    associated to these attributes). If Grade was more important than size, then the user
                                    could move the Grade above the Size Attribute. The sequence would then cycle by
                                    Grade and then Size within the Grade.

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Production Scheduling   87
This is a very powerful tool to help make sequencing decisions and reduce changeovers
                                    in the model.

                                    3.14.3.4. Supply Tolerancing

                                    The Production Scheduling integration infrastructure to Oracle EBS and JD Edwards
                                    EnterpriseOne uses “Work Orders” as the vehicle to communicate production
                                    requirements and schedules between systems. When a PS plan is created, it will have
                                    Work Orders as a source of supply. Demands are created via Sales Orders, Transfer
                                    Orders Out, Forecasts, and Internal Sales Orders, etc.

                                    Since PS is a scheduling application, typically one would assume there are sufficient
                                    supply quantities generated in the form of work orders to meet the stated demand
                                    requirements for the organization being scheduled by the time you are actually
                                    scheduling your facility.

                                    However, in some cases it is acceptable for demands to be shorted by a certain quantity
                                    or percentage without the generation of additional supply requirements. For example, if
                                    you have supply (say an on-hand inventory of 134,999) and have an order quantity of
                                    135,000 (finished good or intermediate), there may not be an additional work order
                                    created for the extra 1 unit in ASCP (lot sized of course) due to a supply tolerancing
                                    feature it has (this can be at any level in the bill of material).

                                    However, PS does not have this explicit supply tolerancing feature. The net result is
                                    that PS may recommend extra production as PS sees the need to balance supply and
                                    demand down to the unit. PS naturally uses the routing lot size to recommend new
                                    production - in some cases, this could be very large (such as 100,000lbs per run) and
                                    completely unnecessary as it is perfectly acceptable to ship 1lb less than order size.
                                    Instantiating net new production disrupts other production runs, steals capacity and
                                    materials – schedule quality is inevitably diminished.

                                    A feature has been added to Production Scheduling to be able to essentially “shut off”
                                    any PS created net new production suggestions to avoid these situations.

                                    This exists in Tools | Options | Global Settings:




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                    Oracle Production Scheduling   88
With this flag enabled, there will be no net new production recommendations generated
                                    at any level in the BOM (i.e. only work order supply production will be scheduled). If
                                    there is insufficient work order supply, inventory will be automatically added to prevent
                                    levels from falling below zero (i.e. Demand is permitted to be shorted). A PS log
                                    message is generated to indicate what inventory quantity adjustments were made.
                                    Utilizing this feature assumes work order supply is sufficient to meet demand.


                                    3.14.3.5. Control Application of Purchase Item Order Multiples Beyond Lead Time
                                    Items marked as “Purchased” in Production Scheduling must be associated with a source
                                    of supply (i.e. a Supplier) and a corresponding order multiple must be modeled. It is key
                                    to note that Production Scheduling is not intended to plan procurement specifically, but
                                    to be constrained by lead time only. Beyond lead time, supply for these purchased items
                                    is essentially unconstrained – therefore the purchase item multiple is not especially
                                    relevant. However, customers do find these order multiples to be useful for various
                                    types of modeling approaches.

                                    A feature has been added to be able to control whether or not purchase item multiples are
                                    respected beyond supplier lead time or not. Keeping these “relaxed” helps solve
                                    performance and is generally recommended.

                                    In the PS Plan Solver Options, there is a flag entitled “Relax Purchase Items Beyond
                                    Lead Time”. Default is set to ‘Yes”.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                    Oracle Production Scheduling   89
When this flag is enabled, the order multiple is internally set to a very large value and
                                    effectively ignored beyond lead time – one will see the addition of a new red line in the
                                    item graph to represent the time of the item. Beyond the lead time, the item graph is
                                    shaded to indicate infinite supply.




                                    If the flag is set to “No”, the item graph is displayed taking into account the order
                                    multiples.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                      Oracle Production Scheduling   90
3.14.3.6. Improved Operation Status Logic in OPM integration

                                    If an OPM Batch Operation has a “firm start” resource but is still in pending state, the PS
                                    integration code was previously interpreting this operation as Active when importing into
                                    Production Scheduling.

                                    In order to address this, VCP collections introduced a new column entitled
                                    “operation_status”. The OPM system will populate the operation status as Pending, WIP
                                    or Closed.

                                    The corresponding PS integration code has been modified to read this new status from
                                    this new column to set an operation as Open, Active or Closed in Production Scheduling.

                                    3.14.3.7. Advanced Work Order Filtering

                                    This release provides new work order filtering capabilities which allows planners to
                                    further “slice and dice” data in the various Gantt, Utilization, and Pegging views in a
                                    multi-dimensional fashion and filter the content of these views. This feature allows the
                                    planner to hone in on specific areas of the schedule only – for example “show me all
                                    work orders in from October 25 – November 5 running on Resource (or Group) which
                                    have a Firm Start status”. The results are previewed in the bottom of the filtering view
                                    and planners can drill-down to the Work Order Editor directly from here as well if
                                    desired.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Production Scheduling   91
A new “Work Order Filter” view has been added to PS which is accessible off of the
                                    toolbar.




                                    Selecting the icon launch the filtering window. The user then inputs criteria. Selecting
                                    “OK” will filter out the various Gantt Charts.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                    Oracle Production Scheduling   92
You can create as many filters as you like which are specific for various analysis
                                    purposes and even save them locally as a file (and send to your colleagues).




                                    This is a very useful feature which provides a very advanced level of filtering capability
                                    into an already rich user interface.
                    3.14.4.         Release 12.2

                                    There are no new features in Oracle Production Scheduling in Release 12.2.



          3.15. Oracle Rapid Planning
                    3.15.1.         Product Overview

                                    Oracle Rapid Planning is a fast, heuristic based engine that generates supply chain plans
                                    that span the enterprise manufacturing and distribution networks covering the supply
                                    chain from supplies to customers. Rapid Planning delivers fast, comprehensive plans
                                    that respect material and resource capacity constraints.



Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                           Oracle Rapid Planning   93
Oracle Rapid Planning provides users an ability to simulate and quickly evaluate impacts
                                    of various changes in demand and supply conditions. It allows planners to evaluate the
                                    consequences of these changes and also compare and contrast various alternative courses
                                    of action based upon user configurable metrics.

                                    Rapid Planning leverages the integration capabilities of the Value Chain Planning suite
                                    which means it can be deployed and integrated out-of-the-box with Oracle E-Business
                                    Suite or with heterogeneous back-end systems. Rapid Planning is integrated with Oracle
                                    E-Business Suite R12.1 and R11i10. Rapid Planning utilizes the proven Advanced
                                    Planning collections architecture to integrate your source system reference and
                                    transaction data to the Rapid Planning engine.

                    3.15.2.         Release 12.1.3

                                    3.15.2.1. Fast Simulation
                                    Oracle Rapid Planning uses an in-memory engine that can very quickly react and
                                    recompute the impacts of any user changes and report, in real time, the consequences
                                    across the supply chain. It also re-calculates the exceptions, key performance indicators
                                    to reflect these impacts.

                                    Rapid Planning supports input of simulation changes to master data like items, resources,
                                    bills of materials, routing operations in two ways:
                                         •     Change the master data inside a particular plan and re-solve
                                         •     Change the master data in a simulation set for repetitive use in more than one
                                               plan
                                    The planning engine can be invoked in three different modes
                                         •     With snapshot and complete replan
                                         •     Without snapshot, but complete replan
                                         •     Without snapshot, but replan only incremental changes

                                    3.15.2.2. Flexible User Interface
                                    This application enables a completely new rich-client user interface built using 11gR1
                                    Fusion Middleware technologies and supports configurable workspaces, flexible layouts,
                                    dynamic tabs, etc. to make the user experience very productive as well as easy to use.

                                    3.15.2.3. Simulation Sets
                                    Oracle Rapid Planning makes simulations very easy through the powerful feature of
                                    simulation sets. A simulation set is a collection of changes to the attributes of any of the
                                    following master data entities.
                                         •     Items
                                         •     End Item Substitution relationships
                                         •     Resources
                                         •     Routings and operations
                                         •     Routing Operation Networks
                                         •     Bill of Materials, components and substitutes
                                         •     Resource Availability
                                         •     Manufacturing Order Resource Requirements
                                         •     Manufacturing Order Operation Networks
                                         •     Calendars

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                            Oracle Rapid Planning   94
•     Supplier capacity
                                    This feature enables planners to do “what-if” analysis without having to make these
                                    changes permanent or without the need to make these changes in the source ERP systems
                                    and re-collect to see their impacts. This saves a lot of time and effort for the planners.

                                    These simulation sets can then be referenced in different plans through a plan option.

                                    3.15.2.4. Mass Edits
                                    Users can make quickly make updates on a large number of rows (for example, increase
                                    the post-processing leadtime of all items in category ‘ABC’ by 10%) through the mass-
                                    edit feature.

                                    This feature is supported for almost all entities like items, resources, supplies, demands,
                                    etc. Users can update using various operators like “set value to”, “increase by”,
                                    “decrease by”, “increasy by %”, “decrease by %”, etc.

                                    Users can undo the simulation changes at an attirbute-level by using “set value to
                                    original” operator to revert to the original value.

                                    3.15.2.5. Plan Comparisons
                                    Oracle Rapid Planning allows users to quickly make multiple copies and then use them
                                    as alternatives for corrective actions. Once the plans are run, users can compare any two
                                    plans (or one plan with its previous run) inside any of the following four views:
                                         •     All analytics - reports and graphs
                                         •     All exception views
                                         •     Supply and Demand view
                                         •     Material and Resource horizontal plans
                                    In addition, users can use order-by-order comparison view where they can compare any
                                    two plans (or a single plan with its previous run) and make the following comparions:
                                         •     Was on-time, but now late
                                         •     Was late, but now on-time
                                         •     Was late, but now less late
                                         •     Was late, but now more late

                                    3.15.2.6. Aggregate, Editable Material Horizontal View
                                    The application supports a material plan with a layout wizard that lets the users to
                                    customize the layout including the measures displayed, time granularity, etc. Users can
                                    also specify two aggregation levels from a choice of Organization, Product Cateogry,
                                    Product Family and Item.

                                    The aggregations are done real-time and take into account all current user changes,
                                    firming, etc.

                                    Users can also update the aggregate level horizontal plans. For example, users can update
                                    forecast quantity at the product category or even at a period level. The system will
                                    allocate the updates to individual items and days.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                           Oracle Rapid Planning   95
3.15.2.7. All-in-one Supply/Demand View
                                    Oracle Rapid Planning enables an integrated view of supply/demand orders and their
                                    associated pegging. In a single view, users can drill either upstream or downstream to
                                    view the supply chain from a single order. This enables for a consolidated view of the
                                    entire tree without having to switch between multiple views.

                                    Users can also focus an a single order upstream or downstream and then reverse
                                    direction to look at the “where-used” or the opposite views. They can then retrace the
                                    steps back to original state of the supply/demand view

                                    3.15.2.8. Integration with Advanced Planning Command Center
                                    Oracle Rapid Planning comes with pre-built integration with Advanced Planning
                                    Command Center. Rapid Planning plans can be archived, published to Advanced
                                    Planning Command Center. These archived versions can then be viewed in all the related
                                    reports and dashboards.

                                    The Advanced Planning Command Center’s Supply Chain Analyst dashboard supports
                                    drill-down directly into the Rapid Planning Application.

                                    All Rapid Planning Simulation plans can be used in the Process Automation
                                    functionality to build process flows in Advanced Planning Command Center.

                                    3.15.2.9. Unconstrained Planning
                                    Planners can run Rapid Planning in an unconstrained mode. The unconstrained option
                                    allows planners to see the required material availability and resource capacity to find
                                    what needs to be arranged in order to meet all demands on time. The unconstrained plan
                                    output can optionally respect the planning time fence to allow planners to freeze the plan
                                    for the initial period. Rapid Planning unconstrained planning can also calculate resource
                                    requirements to generate resource usage and resource overload data..

                                    Rapid Planning unconstrained plans produce a full complement of exception messages to
                                    alert the planner to critical constraint violations. These exception messages include
                                    “Orders with Insufficient Lead Time”, “Resource Overloaded”, and “Supplier Capacity
                                    Violated”. In addition, problems with specific demands are highlighted by the exception
                                    messages for sales orders and forecasts at risk due to material shortages or resource
                                    shortages.

                                    3.15.2.10. Constrained Planning
                                    Rapid Planning offers a full set of constrained planning features. Rapid Planning
                                    performs simultaneous material and resource capacity constraint based planning. Rapid
                                    Planning output is constrained by purchasing, distribution and transit lead times, by
                                    resource calendars and capacities, and by supplier capacity. Rapid Planning calculates
                                    the capacities consumed by existing WIP schedules and purchased supplies and allocates
                                    the remaining capacity to new planned orders.

                                    Constrained planning allows planners to automate many types of planning decisions and
                                    focus on the critical issues. Rapid Planning constraint based planning includes the
                                    ability to search among many alternate supply types. Rapid Planning can automatically
                                    search for and find alternates and substitutes across the supply chain and create planned
                                    orders to meet demands on time. When the primary supply source is late, Rapid Planning
                                    searches for the entire supply chain for item substitutes, alternate organizations, alternate

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                            Oracle Rapid Planning   96
suppliers, alternate BOM and routing, alternate resources and substitute components to
                                    locate the supply source that provides the delivery date closest the demand due date.

                                    3.15.2.11. Demand Forecasts
                                    Rapid Planning utilizes forecast and demand data from Oracle Demantra. Oracle
                                    Demand Planning integration to Oracle Rapid Planning is not supported. Rapid Planning
                                    performs forecast consumption and allows the planner to optionally explode forecasts.

                                    The forecast consumption features allow the planner to include both forecasts and actual
                                    sales orders without double counting demand. Planners can select the enforce demand
                                    time fence plan option and forecasts inside the demand time fence are not included as
                                    demands in the plan.

                                    During plan definition, the planner can select forecast spreading option. For example, if
                                    the forecast is a weekly forecast, the planner can choose to spread the forecast to daily
                                    buckets and also optionally set the forecast consumption forward and backward day
                                    controls. This allows the planner to accept aggregate (weekly or period) forecasts and
                                    more accurately plan supplies in daily buckets.

                                    3.15.2.12. Respect Demand Priority Rules
                                    Demand priority rules can be specified at the plan level, allowing the planner to easily
                                    compare results from two different plans using different demand prioritization
                                    approaches. Demand priority rules control the sequence of demand priorities assigned to
                                    all demands. The most urgent demands have the best chance of being satisfied on time.
                                    Alternatively, Rapid Planning can use externally specified demand priorities for sales
                                    orders and forecasts.

                                    3.15.2.13. Demand and Supply Pegging
                                    Rapid Planning pegging links supplies to demands so that the planner can easily identify
                                    demand impacts when supply dates change. The planner can use pegging to trace
                                    component or resource problems up to the affected sales orders. Pegging also enables
                                    the planner to identify which supplies are linked to critical demands and ensure that
                                    those supplies remain on schedule.

                                    3.15.2.14. Supply Chain Sourcing
                                    Rapid Planning is compatible with the sourcing rules, bills of distribution and
                                    assignment sets used by Oracle Purchasing or upload supply chain sourcing definitions
                                    via file loaders. Sourcing rules and bills of distribution determine the movement of
                                    materials between organizations in your global enterprise; these organizations include
                                    your suppliers and the materials include those items made at the manufacturing
                                    organizations.

                                    Sourcing rules and bills of distribution specify date–effective sourcing strategies,
                                    combining replenishment sources with source rankings. Users can flexibly assign
                                    sourcing rules to individual items, categories, organizations and regions to define the
                                    complete supply chain from suppliers to customers.

                                    Rapid Planning can select primary or alternate sources depending on supply constraints
                                    to provide the best demand satisfaction dates. If Rapid Planning selects an alternate


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                           Oracle Rapid Planning   97
organization to source an order, then the selection is reported by the exception message
                                    “Order Sourced from Alternate Facility”.

                                    3.15.2.15. Supplier Capacity
                                    You can specify time–phased capacity of individual suppliers to specific items in Oracle
                                    Purchasing or upload supplier capacity via file loaders. Rapid Planning can allocate
                                    planned orders based the constraints of the suppliers. Planned orders are assigned
                                    supplier sources in respect to their capacity. Rapid Planning uses the ranking
                                    information you specify in sourcing rules and first attempts to source the planned orders
                                    with the primary sources. If the capacity to fulfill the demand is not available, alternative
                                    sources are used. If the order is sourced from an alternate supplier, then the selection is
                                    reported by the exception message “Order Sourced from Alternate Supplier”.

                                    You can specify item-supplier lead times and supplier capacity calendars. Rapid
                                    Planning recognizes the item-supplier specific parameters and applies them as sources of
                                    supply are evaluated to find supply that meets a demand on time. Users can also enter
                                    item-supplier specific order modifiers.

                                    The supplier capacity calendar governs how supplier capacity is accumulated over a
                                    period of time. Supplier capacity is only accumulated on the working days according to
                                    the supplier capacity calendar. The supplier capacity calendar also governs how the
                                    supplier processing time is calculated.

                                    3.15.2.16. Bills of Material and BOM Effectivity
                                    Rapid Planning is integrated with Oracle BOM or you can upload bills of material and
                                    routings via file loaders. It supports single-level and multi-level bills of material. Rapid
                                    Planning recognizes and recommends substitute components when primary components
                                    are delayed or not available. Substitute component selections are reported by the
                                    exception message “Planned Order uses Substitute Component”.

                                    If alternate bills of material are specified, then the alternate bill may be recommended if
                                    there are supply constraints on the primary bill of material and routing. Alternate bills of
                                    material selections are reported by the exception message “Planned Order uses Alternate
                                    BOM/Routing”.

                                    Rapid Planning respects BOM effectivity dates. The planning engine will calculate
                                    component requirements based on the BOM effectivity date and also considering
                                    component effectivity dates. Rapid Planning evaluates the engineering change orders as
                                    of their scheduled effective date. You can order material and plan resources that you
                                    need for new revisions ahead of time.

                                    3.15.2.17. By-products and Co-products
                                    By-products and co-products specified on the BOM are evaluated by Rapid Planning.
                                    New planned orders include by-products and co-products which can be used as supply
                                    available on the completion dates. Rapid Planning also uses existing WIP standard and
                                    non-standard job by-products and co-products as available supply.

                                    3.15.2.18. Routing Operation and Resource Scheduling
                                    Rapid Planning constrained planning respects resource capacity and schedules new
                                    planned orders and existing discrete jobs to avoid resource capacity overloads. You can

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                            Oracle Rapid Planning   98
define routings, resources and resource capacity in Oracle BOM or upload via file
                                    loaders.

                                    You can specify simultaneous resources and set the maximum assigned units for each
                                    resource requirement to control scheduling results. Rapid Planning respects prior and
                                    next operation scheduling controls. Resource efficiency and utilization are used by
                                    Rapid Planning resource requirement calculations.

                                    If you can specify alternate resources, Rapid Planning selects alternates and schedules
                                    around constraints on primary resources to meet demands on time. Rapid Planning also
                                    chooses alternate routings when required because of constraints on the primary BOM
                                    and routing. Alternate selections reported with the exception messages “Planned Order
                                    uses Alternate Resource” and “Planned Order uses Alternate BOM/Routing”.

                                    Rapid Planning respects routing effectivity dates. Resource requirements are generated
                                    using routings which are effective on the start date of the planned order.

                                    Planners can select certain bottleneck resources to perform constrained planning. Other
                                    resources are planned in an unconstrained mode using the resource lead time during
                                    scheduling. Rapid Planning creates schedules that do not overload the selected
                                    bottleneck resources and reports overloads on the non-bottleneck resources. This allows
                                    the planner to focus on the critical bottleneck resources.

                                    3.15.2.19. End Item Substitution
                                    Rapid Planning uses end item substitution rules to find acceptable substitute item
                                    supplies when the requested item is not available for the demand request date.
                                    Substitution is based on user-defined rules that can be effective either in one direction or
                                    in both directions; defining a chain of substitution relationships. Customer specific item
                                    substitution rules can also be specified which are respected by Rapid Planning when
                                    searching for supplies for that customer’s demands. When item substitutes are selected,
                                    Rapid Planning alerts the planning with the exception message “Demand Satisfied Using
                                    End Item Substitution”.

                                    3.15.2.20. Lead Times and Planning Time Fence
                                    Rapid Planning respects manufacturing and purchasing lead times. Users can set pre-
                                    processing, processing and post-processing lead times. Rapid Planning constraint based
                                    planning respects these lead times. Rapid Planning respects planning time fences
                                    defined at the item organization level which allows the user to freeze the schedule during
                                    the initial periods of the plan.

                                    3.15.2.21. Order Modifiers
                                    Rapid Planning includes the user specified order modifiers at the item organization level
                                    and creates new planned orders respecting the order modifiers. Order modifiers
                                    respected include minimum order size, maximum order size, fixed order quantity, fixed
                                    lot multiplier and round order quantity. Additionally, users can specify supplier specific
                                    order modifiers which are respected by Rapid Planning when creating new planned
                                    orders sourced from the supplier.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                           Oracle Rapid Planning   99
3.15.2.22. Safety Stock Lead Time
                                    Rapid Planning considers safety stock lead time that is user controllable at the item
                                    organization level. Safety stock lead time is a lead time that you add to the normal lead
                                    time of make and buy items. You use it to instruct the planning engine to schedule
                                    supplies in advance of the demand due dates that peg to them. This creates an inventory
                                    buffer to protect against fluctuations in lead time, demand (for example, forecast error),
                                    and supply (for example, variable supplier lead times and irregular operation yields)

                                    3.15.2.23. Shipping, Receiving and Carrier Calendars
                                    Rapid Planning plans a variety of supply chain activities like manufacturing, inter facility
                                    shipments, purchases, and shipment to customers. Each of these activities is controlled
                                    by a set of calendars. Manufacturing, supplier, and customer facilities may be able to
                                    ship or receive goods on specific days. Rapid Planning schedules each type of supply or
                                    demand considering the working and non working days in the appropriate set of
                                    calendars.

                                    The shipping calendar indicates the valid working days for shipment activities
                                    originating from suppliers and organizations. The planning engine does not recommend a
                                    shipment out from those facilities if the date is a non-working day.

                                    The receiving calendar governs the receiving activities at the organizations or customer
                                    sites that receive goods. The planning engine allows organizations to receive shipments
                                    only on a working day.

                                    The carrier calendar indicates the working and non-working days and times for material
                                    that is in transit using different means of transport. For example, certain methods of
                                    shipment such as parcel carriers may not work on weekends. This may cause the transit
                                    time to be stretched over the weekends.

                                    3.15.2.24. Planner Action: Firm Existing Supplies
                                    Planners can review existing WIP jobs and purchase orders while comparing to the
                                    pegged demands. When required, the planner can pull in or push out the existing supply
                                    and firm it. Rapid Planning respects the firm flag by not changing the schedule dates and
                                    by consuming material and resource capacity before scheduling non-firm supplies.
                                    Rapid Planning reports any overload situations caused by firm supplies.

                                    3.15.2.25. Planner Action: Firm Planned Supplies
                                    Planners can review new planned make and buy orders while comparing to the pegged
                                    demands. When required, the planner can pull in or push out the new planned orders and
                                    selectively firm the planned orders. Rapid Planning respects the firm flag by not
                                    changing the schedule dates and by consuming material and resource capacity before
                                    scheduling non-firm supplies. Rapid Planning reports any overload situations caused by
                                    firm planned orders.

                                    3.15.2.26. Release New Planned Orders and Reschedule Recommendations
                                    Planners can easily release recommendations from Rapid Planning to execution systems.
                                    Planners can selectively release planning recommendations or choose to release all
                                    recommendations. Planners can adjust recommendation due dates and then release the
                                    new planned orders or the reschedule of existing planned orders


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                           Oracle Rapid Planning   100
New planned make orders are released with an alternate BOM/Routing recommendation.
                                    If Rapid Planning selects substitute components and alternate resources, these selections
                                    are also be released as part of the make order.

                                    Rapid Planning allows the user to specify the auto-release of planned orders within the
                                    release time fence. Users can set the release time as the item organization attribute.
                                    Auto-release of planned orders occurs immediately after the Rapid Planning plan
                                    processes complete.

                                    Rapid Planning release processes are fully integrated with Oracle Purchasing and Order
                                    WIP. The release processes also allow for integration to third party systems.

                                    3.15.2.27. Exceptions


                                    Rapid Planning generates the following 24 exception types, and are displayed within the
                                    "Exceptions" view in Rapid Planning.
                                         •     Past Due Sales Orders
                                         •     Late Replenishment for Sales Order
                                         •     Late Replenishment for Forecast
                                         •     Demand Quantity Not Satisfied
                                         •     Resource Overloaded
                                         •     Exception: Supplier Capacity Overloaded
                                         •     Items with a Shortage
                                         •     Items below Safety Stock
                                         •     Items with Excess Inventory
                                         •     Past Due Orders
                                         •     Orders to be rescheduled out
                                         •     Orders to be cancelled
                                         •     Orders to be rescheduled in
                                         •     Order with Insufficient Lead Time
                                         •     Sales Order/Forecast at Risk due to a resource shortage
                                         •     Sales Order/Forecast at Risk due to material shortage
                                         •     Late Supply pegged to Forecast
                                         •     Late supply pegged to Sales Order
                                         •     Planned Order uses alternate BOM/Routing
                                         •     Planned Order uses Substitute Component
                                         •     Planned Order uses Alternate Resource
                                         •     Order Sourced from Alternate Facility
                                         •     Order sourced from Alternate Supplier
                                         •     Demand Satisfied Using End Item Substitution
                                    Exceptions are generated only when a plan run has completed, and are not regenerated
                                    when manual edits are made to a plan.

                                    Users can choose to enable or disable the display of specific exception types, and specify
                                    their arrangement within the Exceptions view through a configuration mechanism.

                                    Within an exception type, users can specify search criteria or filters to specify the
                                    exceptions that must be displayed. Search criteria can be saved with a user specified
                                    name for future use.



Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                            Oracle Rapid Planning   101
From an exception, navigation to other related Rapid Planning views has been provided
                                    in context of the exception’s attributes (Item, Org, Resource, etc). Exceptions generated
                                    in Rapid Planning can be exported to MS Excel for further analysis.

                                    When Plan Comparison is enabled in Rapid Planning, exceptions for the base plan and
                                    compared plan for an exception type are displayed in adjacent tabs. The name of the
                                    exception type also has the name of the associated plan to easily identify which plan the
                                    listed exceptions belong to.

                                    3.15.2.28. Embedded Analytics
                                    KPI’s/Metrics are displayed in Rapid Planning in a separate “Analytics” view. Rapid
                                    Planning can display the following plan metrics:


                                         •     Stock Outs (in days)
                                         •     Fill Rate (%)
                                         •     Inventory Turns
                                         •     Safety Stock violations (in days)
                                         •     Revenue
                                         •     Gross margin (%)
                                         •     Manufacturing Cost
                                         •     Purchasing Cost
                                         •     On Time Orders (%)
                                         •     Resource Utilization (%)
                                         •     Supplier Capacity Utilization (%)
                                         •     Clear to Build (% of orders)
                                         •     Clear to Build Component Availability(%)
                                         •     Ready to Build (%)
                                         •     Top N Shortage Components (%)


                                    In addition to the above metrics, Rapid Planning can also display different facts (Count,
                                    Quantity, Value, etc) for the supported exception types as metrics.

                                    Selection of the metrics that must be displayed, their display levels, associated filter
                                    conditions, and their layout within the Analytics view can be configured at a user level.

                                    In a Plan Comparison mode, values from both the base and the compared plans are
                                    shown together for easy visibility and comparison.

                                    The Analytics view also enables the comparison of end order satisfaction across two
                                    plans within an Order Comparison region. To easily compare end demands planned
                                    differently across the base and compared plans, seeded comparison mechanisms (e.g.
                                    “Was On Time, Now Late”) are provided. Search capabilities are also provided to
                                    restrict the comparison to a user defined selection.

                                    3.15.2.29. Late Demand Diagnosis
                                    Rapid Planning generates, for each late demand, root cause information that can be
                                    viewed in a new Constraints view. The view tells the planner what material and resource
                                    constraints caused the demand to be satisfied late, as well as an assessment of how
                                    severe each constraint is.


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                          Oracle Rapid Planning   102
For every late demand, Rapid Planning will report the following types of constraints:
                                         •     Material Constraint
                                                  o Lead Time Constraint
                                                  o Planning Time Fence Constraint
                                                  o Date Effectivity Constraint
                                                  o WIP Window Constraint
                                         •     Resource Constraint
                                         •     Supplier Constraint

                                    These constraints will be reported along all alternate paths: alternate resources on
                                    routings, substitute components on bills of material, alternate bills of material and
                                    routings, alternate sources on sourcing rules, and end item substitutes.

                                    Each constraint will have information such as requested date, requested quantity,
                                    available quantity, shortage (both in absolute quantity and percentage terms) so that
                                    planners can immediately see what actions to take to resolve each late fulfillment of a
                                    demand.

                                    3.15.2.30. Global Forecasting
                                    Global forecasting allows you to define forecasts without the context of a shipment
                                    organization. This is done in Oracle Demand Management. Forecasts can have reference
                                    to ship-to entities such as customer site and zone. You can choose a ship-to consumption
                                    level in Rapid Planning.

                                    You can use sourcing rules to distribute consumed global forecasts to appropriate
                                    shipment organizations. Forecast distribution is performed in an unconstrained manner
                                    based on the user defined percentages in the sourcing rules. Rapid Planning issues
                                    exception messages when a distributed forecast demand at an organization cannot be met
                                    on time by supply in that organization.

                                    3.15.2.31. Configure to Order
                                    Rapid Planning supports configure to order environments. Rapid Planning can accept
                                    forecasts for assemble to order (ATO) models and pick to order (PTO) models as
                                    demand schedules. ATO and PTO forecasts from Oracle Demand Management and E-
                                    Business Suite R12 and R11i10 are supported.

                                    Single level and multi-level ATO models are supported by Rapid Planning. Multi-level
                                    ATO models include models at lower levels of the BOM structure. Configured to order
                                    sales orders consume model forecasts at each level of the multi-level model. Rapid
                                    Planning will plan for the unconsumed model, option and option class forecasts as well
                                    as planning for the configured items. Supplies are scheduled and created as needed for
                                    all lower levels.

                                    You can provide pre-exploded forecast values of your ATO and PTO models and
                                    components to Rapid Planning. Configured sales orders consume the model and lower
                                    level forecasts. Rapid Planning supports forecast consumption at various levels such as
                                    customer, customer site, zone (global forecasts), demand class, and item organization.

                                    Rapid Planning can also optionally explode the forecast for the top level model. Model
                                    forecasts are exploded to option, option class and component forecasts within Rapid
                                    Planning using the 'Explode Forecast' plan option. After forecast explosion, Rapid


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                           Oracle Rapid Planning     103
Planning will consume and plan supplies for the unconsumed forecast demand at each
                                    level.

                                    Multi-level multi-organization models are supported. A multi-organization model is one
                                    which contains top level or some lower-level models which are transferred between
                                    organizations. If you have multi-organization models you must use global forecasting for
                                    forecast consumption to be correct.

                                    Rapid Planning distributes global forecasts for ATO and PTO models across
                                    organizations based on the user-specified sourcing rule percentages. The global forecasts
                                    can be consumed at different levels such as Global (Item), Organization, Customer,
                                    Customer Site, and Zone.

                                    Rapid Planning plans only consider ATO sales orders after they have been progressed to
                                    include a linked configured item. This allows Rapid Planning to schedule these sales
                                    orders with all the capabilities provided for standard items - for example, to net existing
                                    supplies of pre-configured stock at any supply chain bill of material level.

                                    A forecast for a lower level ATO configuration that will be stocked will be consumed by
                                    a sales order for the top level configured model. Rapid Planning will consume the
                                    forecast for this specific configuration first. Any remaining demand will then consume
                                    the forecast for the associated ATO model.

                                    For procured configurations, Rapid Planning allows you to plan based on the aggregate
                                    capacity of the supplier-supplier site to build the base model. A supplier capacity
                                    statement for the ATO model is consumed by the ATO items that are created based on
                                    this model. KPIs illustrating supplier capacity metrics, as well as exception messages are
                                    provided to help you make an informed decision.

                                    3.15.2.32. Default Order Sizing
                                    Rapid Planning provides support for default order sizing to improve scheduling results.
                                    Smaller order sizes improve scheduling flexibility which leads to higher fill rates and on
                                    time supplies. In the absence of order modifiers, Rapid Planning sizes orders to daily
                                    production capacity. When some capacity is consumed on a day, Rapid Planning reduces
                                    the order size to fit within the remaining capacity in a day.

                                    Users can override the default order sizing algorithm by specifying a new item-
                                    organization attribute called planning unit of work. The user can set planning unit of
                                    work to the number of hours for the duration of the maximum order size. For example,
                                    set planning unit of work to 8 hours and the resulting new planned orders will not exceed
                                    8 hour shifts in duration.

                                    User can set the planning unit of work to larger than daily capacities and Rapid Planning
                                    will create new planned orders that typically span several days up to the specified
                                    planning unit of work.

                                    The default order sizing does not override existing item-organization order modifiers.
                                    For example, if the fixed order quantity is specified, then all order sizes equal fixed order
                                    quantity without regard to the planning unit of work. Default order sizing is only applied
                                    to new planned orders and does not affect the quantity of an existing supply.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                            Oracle Rapid Planning   104
3.15.2.33. Inventory Reservations
                                    Rapid Planning recognizes on hand inventory reservations to sales orders. The on hand
                                    supply that is reserved to a sales order cannot be used for any other demand.
                                    Reservations for both full and partial demand quantities are supported. In the case of a
                                    partial reservation, Rapid Planning schedules supplies for the unreserved quantity of the
                                    sales order.

                                    Rapid Planning generates pegging of on-hand supply to sales orders that matches the
                                    reservations recorded in the source transaction system. In the supply and demand
                                    window, each sales order demand includes a new field which displays the quantity of on
                                    hand inventory that is reserved to the sales order.

                                    3.15.2.34. Clear to Build
                                    A make order (planned make order, WIP job, etc.) is “Clear to Build” if all its
                                    component requirements are pegged to on-hand supply.

                                    Rapid Planning provides visibility to the Clear to Build status of Make Orders, both at
                                    the individual make order level as well as at aggregate levels through new key
                                    performance indicators (KPIs). The Clear to Build status on make orders are visible
                                    through new order level attributes: “Clear to Build Status”, “Ready to Build %”, “Clear
                                    to Build Date”, and “Clear to Build Component Availability %”. Equivalent KPIs can be
                                    configured to view these attributes at aggregate levels.

                                    Rapid Planning also allows user to control allocation of scarce on-hand component
                                    supply to make orders by explicitly prioritizing or de-prioritizing specific make orders.
                                    This can be achieved through a new Rapid Planning view called the Clear to Build
                                    Dashboard. The dashboard allows a user to:
                                         •     Search for the make orders for which the user wants the Clear to Build status to
                                               be improved;
                                         •     Prioritize specific make orders for Clear to Build – this results in on-hand being
                                               allocated to these make orders preferentially when the plan is launched next;
                                         •     View contentions for selected make orders – contentions are other make orders
                                               that share common components; these make orders could potentially contribute
                                               to the improvement of the clear to build status of the target orders;
                                         •     Selectively de-prioritize certain make orders from allocation of on-hand – these
                                               selected orders will be given lower priority when on-hand is allocated to Make
                                               Orders in the next plan run;
                                         •     View how a specific component is allocated to multiple make orders, and
                                               prioritize or de-prioritize make orders for on-hand allocation based on this
                                               component allocation view.

                                    3.15.2.35. Rapid Planning – Sales and Operations Planning Integration
                                    Rapid Planning plans will be visible in Demantra Real-time Sales and Operations
                                    Planning. The integration between Rapid Planning and Real-time Sales and Operations
                                    Planning is similar to the existing Advanced Supply Chain Planning to Real-time Sales
                                    and Operations Planning integration. You can export consensus forecast data from Real-
                                    time Sales and Operations Planning to Rapid Planning plan. You can read the supply
                                    data from a Rapid Planning plan back into Real-time Sales and Operations Planning.
                                    This data from the Rapid Planning plan will now be visible in Real-time Sales and
                                    Operations Planning worksheets.


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                             Oracle Rapid Planning   105
3.15.2.36. Rapid Planning – Global Order Promising Integration
                                    Rapid Planning plans can now be used by Global Order Promising (GOP) to promise
                                    orders. The supply from this plan is considered by GOP when promising orders if GOP is
                                    set up to promise orders against a plan output. If there are a mix of ASCP and Rapid
                                    Planning plans that have supplies for an Item/Org, GOP accords the highest preference to
                                    supply from a Rapid Planning plan. Rapid Planning – GOP integration allows an
                                    enterprise to react quickly to unforeseen events, by enabling quick integration between
                                    planning simulations and the order promising process.

                                    24 by 7 ATP is not enabled against Rapid Planning plans. Also, any inserts that GOP
                                    makes into the plan (Sales Orders, Planned Orders, etc.) will not be visible within the
                                    Rapid Planning plan itself. Any Rapid Planning plan that is enabled for ATP will not be
                                    editable. This avoids inconsistencies between the current output of the Rapid Planning
                                    plan and the version against which GOP is promising orders.

                                    3.15.2.37. Order Comparison
                                    In a Plan Comparison mode, Rapid Planning’s Analytics view now has an additional tab
                                    that displays “Order Comparison.” This allows users to compare demand satisfaction of
                                    sales orders across two plans intelligently. Users can view which demands were planned
                                    on time in the base plan, but are delayed in the comparison plan and vice versa, and
                                    which demands have increased or decreased their lateness in the comparison plan versus
                                    the base plan.

                                    A search region allows users to query up only sales orders of interest – for example,
                                    sales orders for specific items, or sales orders at specific organizations.

                                    3.15.2.38. Multi-Planner Collaboration
                                    Rapid Planning allows a user to save changes made to data in Rapid Planning to a
                                    simulation set. A user can save a specific record, multiple records within a Rapid
                                    Planning view, or changes across multiple Rapid Planning views to a named simulation
                                    set through a single click action.

                                    Multiple planners can thus work on simulation copies of a base plan and save the results
                                    of their simulation to a common simulation set. When the base plan is launched again
                                    with reference to this simulation set, all the user changes will be considered in the next
                                    version of the Rapid Planning plan.

                                    3.15.2.39. Functional and Data Security
                                    This enhancement provides Rapid Planning with:

                                         Functional Security
                                         •     This is the ability to dictate which functions (Create, Update / Edit, Delete,
                                               Launch, Save, Close, Load, Copy, and Release) a responsibility should have
                                               access to.
                                         Data Security
                                         •     Data access can be controlled at two levels.
                                                  o Organization: Here, you can assign organizations to a responsibility.
                                                       Then, users with that responsibility will have access to (i) all Plans in


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                              Oracle Rapid Planning   106
which the organizations exist and (ii) all items within those
                                                         organizations.
                                                    o    Plan: A user creating a plan can mark the Plan as Private or Public. A
                                                         Public plan is accessible by all responsibilities (and, as a result, by all
                                                         users) provided they have the necessary Organization level security
                                                         granted. A Private plan is only accessible by specific users to whom
                                                         access has been granted (access is granted by the user who created the
                                                         plan and marked it as Private). In case of Private plans, users will have
                                                         access all items and organizations within that plan. However, the
                                                         actions the user can take are controlled by the Function Security of the
                                                         user’s responsibility.
                    3.15.3.         Release 12.1.3.3

                                    3.15.3.1. Demand Pull-In and Upside Processing
                                    This feature allows Rapid Planning to seek to improve on the fulfillment date of a
                                    demand while guaranteeing that no previously committed date for any demand will be
                                    made any worse. Rapid Planning can now plan considering multiple dates with different
                                    priorities on a single demand. This enables planners to maximize revenue by trying to
                                    meet new, revised Request Dates from customers, but when they cannot, fall back to
                                    previously committed dates - including preserving the supply allocation (pegging).

                                    This feature enables Rapid Planning to better utilize excess inventory and potentially
                                    improve fill rates. It lets planners improve responsiveness by providing the ability to
                                    improve to request date, but guarantee promise date / commit date.




                                    In the example illustrated above, a demand is initially committed for week 7. There is
                                    excess inventory from weeks 3 to 6. If the customer comes up with a request to satisfy
                                    the demand by week 2, Rapid Planning will now try to satisfy the demand on the feasible
                                    date closest to the new request date, in this case week 3. In the cases where it cannot
                                    improve the earlier commit date, the earlier commit date is preserved.

                                    Rapid Planning generates two new exceptions:

                                         •     Late Replenishment for a Pull-in Sales Order/Forecast: Generated whenever any
                                               partial quantity of the demand is met after the revised demand date.


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                                 Oracle Rapid Planning   107
•     Sales Order / Forecast Pulled in: Generated whenever the demand is satisfied
                                               prior to the original demand satisfied date.

                                    If a demand is partially met on a revised demand date and partially met on the earlier
                                    commit date, both the above exceptions will be generated for that demand.

                                    Based on the above two exceptions, Rapid Planning also generates the following new
                                    measures for analysis that users can use to create graphs in the analytics tab of the Rapid
                                    Planning workbench.

                                         •     Late Replenishment for a Pull-in Sales Order (Count, Value, Days, Quantity)

                                         •     Late Replenishment for a Pull-in Forecast (Count, Value, Days, Quantity)

                                         •     Sales Order Pulled-in (Count, Value, Quantity by Demand Date, Quantity by
                                               Revised Date)

                                         •     Forecasts Pulled-in (Count, Value, Quantity by Demand Date, Quantity by
                                               Revised Date)

                                    Based on the successful pull-ins, planners can now also release the changes to sales
                                    orders from the workbench to the source system's Order Management application to send
                                    the updates to quantity and the scheduled ship date.

                                    3.15.3.2. Favorite Lists
                                    This feature allows users to create user-defined lists of items, resources and suppliers
                                    and save them as favorite lists that can be used later as a shortcut to all the related
                                    information about those items, resources or suppliers. Users can have multiple named
                                    lists per user, accessible across plans.

                                    They can access the lists from the left navigator pane and drill using an easy, single-click
                                    navigation to Material/Resource Plans, Exceptions, Supplies and Demands for multiple
                                    items, resources or suppliers.

                                    Static Lists

                                    Users can create a list with an enumerated list of items, resources and/or suppliers by
                                    saving to a favorite list from other views in the workbench including Items, Resources,
                                    Suppliers, and Supplies and Demands.

                                    Users can organize the order of the list to reflect supply chain structure by using move
                                    up/down actions. This will enable navigation to the Material Plan that places items in
                                    supply chain bill order: for example, assembly, sub-assembly, then components.

                                    Dynamic Lists

                                    Users can also create lists based on certain conditions that then construct the list
                                    dynamically every time. For example, users can create a list based on a condition like
                                    'Bottom 10 items based on fill rate %'. Users will then see the resultant list based on the
                                    plan. Users can use any of the following measures to create these dynamic lists

                                         •     Fill Rate %



Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                            Oracle Rapid Planning   108
•     Inventory Turns

                                         •     On time Orders %

                                         •     Late Replenishment for Sales Order / Forecast (value)

                                         •     Demand Quantity not Satisfied (value)

                                         •     Resource Utilization %

                                         •     Supplier Capacity Utilization %

                                         •     Purchasing Cost

                                    Users can create these dynamic lists by creating a metric in the analytics tab using any of
                                    the above measures with any of these applicable dimensions ("view by") - Item,
                                    Organization, Resource or Supplier.

                                    3.15.3.3. Safety Stock Enhancements
                                    This enhancement enables users to view an item’s safety stock profile in quantity (units)
                                    even though the planning was done using a safety stock lead time approach. It also lets
                                    planners use time-phased safety stock quantity (units) as input to calculate the safety
                                    stock lead time.

                                    This enables Rapid Planning to be easily integrated with other applications that generate
                                    safety stock quantity in units. It also provides an easy to understand view of supply and
                                    demand that includes the safety stock (target and actual) expressed in quantity (units).

                                    The safety stock lead time is calculated from the safety stock quantity using a simple
                                    formula:

                                         Safety Stock Lead Time (Days) = Avg (Safety Stock Quantity) /

                                                              Avg Daily Demand in the Plan

                                    The material plan displays two additional measures:

                                         •     Target Safety Stock: This is the time-phased safety stock quantity that is defined
                                               by the user or collected from a source system.

                                         •     Actual Safety Stock: This is the safety stock quantity that the plan has planned
                                               for. Though the plan has actually planned using a safety lead time approach, it is
                                               displayed in terms of quantity by converting the safety lead time into safety stock
                                               quantity (not time phased) using the formula above.

                                    Users can enable this behavior of deriving the safety stock lead time from the quantity
                                    (instead from the safety stock %) using a new plan option called Safety Stock Lead Time
                                    Method.

                                    In addition to the above, users also have the option to input a non-time phased safety
                                    stock quantity for each item using a new item attribute called 'Target Safety Stock
                                    Override'.



Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                             Oracle Rapid Planning   109
3.15.3.4. Simulation Edits of Additional Item Attributes
                                    Users can now do what-if simulation based on more item attributes listed below:

                                         •     Planning Time Fence Days

                                         •     Release Time Fence Days

                                         •     Demand Time Fence Days

                                         •     Selling Price

                                         •     Standard Cost

                                         •     Discount %

                                    Users can edit these and see the impacts on plan recommendations and cost metrics after
                                    running a simulation. Edits to Demand Time Fence Days and Release Time Fence Days
                                    are only applicable in plan inputs mode using simulation sets. For all the above attributes
                                    users can use the standard mass update features like Increase by, Decrease by, Increase
                                    by %, Decrease by %, Set Value To, Reset to Original.

                                    The impact of these user changes on the time fence attributes and the cost/price
                                    attributes can be seen (after running the plan) on exceptions such as ‘Orders to be
                                    Rescheduled In’ and measures such as Revenues and Gross Margin.

                                    3.15.3.5. Simulation Edits of Approved Supplier Lists and Supplier Capacity
                                    Users can now do what-if simulation based on attributes of Approved Supplier Lists and
                                    Supplier Capacity as listed below.

                                         •     Approved Supplier List attributes

                                                    o    Processing Lead Time

                                                    o    Min Order Qty

                                                    o    Fixed Lot Multiplier

                                                    o    Supplier Price

                                         •     Supplier Capacity attributes

                                                    o    From Date

                                                    o    To Date

                                                    o    Capacity

                                    Users can simulate changes to these attributes in a specific plan or as part of a simulation
                                    set that can be used across plans.

                                    However, users cannot add a new Approved Supplier (Item-Supplier) entry that does not
                                    already exist. Also this is still applicable only for global Approved Supplier Lists: any
                                    update to a single org propagates to all orgs.

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                           Oracle Rapid Planning   110
Users can view the impact of these simulation changes in all related measures. For
                                    example, a what-if change to supplier price impacts related purchasing metrics.

                                    3.15.3.6. Simulation Edits of Processes
                                    Users can now do what-if simulation based on changes to their manufacturing processes
                                    (routings). Users can copy (duplicate) an existing operation or activity and edit any of
                                    the following attributes to either create a new operation and/or activity in that operation.
                                    However, users cannot create new routings. The following attributes of the routing
                                    operations and activities can be updated:

                                         •     Disable Date (operation)

                                         •     Effective Date (operation)

                                         •     Operation Yield

                                         •     Resource

                                         •     Assigned Units

                                         •     Rate or Amount

                                    Users can use these attributes to simulate changes to their manufacturing processes in a
                                    specific plan or as part of a simulation set that can be used across plans.

                                    3.15.3.7. Mass Update Enhancements for Resource Availability
                                    Mass updates to the fields From Time and To Time now support additional operators:
                                    'Decrease by' and 'Increase by'. In addition, mass updates to To Time also support the
                                    relative date/time operator 'From Time+'. This takes a positive or a negative number (say
                                    'n') and sets the To Time to 'n' hours relative to the From Time. This lets users to do
                                    actions such as ‘shorten all shifts in a week by 1 hour’ in a single update even though
                                    there are multiple shifts with different To Time's.

                                    Whenever the action results in the To Time being earlier than From Time, it will be
                                    interpreted as a shift ending the next day. These mass update actions are available in both
                                    plans and plan inputs.

                                    3.15.3.8. Mass Update Enhancements for Firm Date on Demands and Supplies
                                    Mass updates to the field Firm Date now support additional operators: 'Decrease by',
                                    'Increase by', 'Request Date+' and 'Suggested Due Date+'. The last two operators take a
                                    positive or a negative number (say 'n') and set the Firm Date to 'n' days relative to the
                                    Request Date or the Suggested Due Date. This lets users to do actions like firm all Sales
                                    Order demands for an item to their respective request dates in a single update even
                                    though the dates are all different.

                                    All Date operations in this mass update are based on calendar (24x7) days and not
                                    working days. These mass update actions are available in both plans and plan inputs.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                            Oracle Rapid Planning   111
3.15.3.9. Scheduling Rapid Planning Runs in Batch Mode
                                    Prior to this release, plans in Rapid Planning could be launched only in interactive mode.
                                    This feature lets users to schedule the Rapid Planning plan run in the background using a
                                    new concurrent program “Launch Simulation Planner”.

                                    While launching this program, users have the option to either calculate the lateness
                                    constraints or not; and to save the plan (to the database), close the plan (in which case it
                                    would not be immediately available for simulation), or do nothing (keep the plan
                                    available for simulation). Plans launched in this mode are always launched with refresh
                                    snapshot.

                                    3.15.3.10. Enhanced Search Capability
                                    This enhancement enables additional search operators for fields Item and Resource in all
                                    views. The search operators will now include, apart from the standard 'Equal To'
                                    operator, the 'Starts With' and 'Contains' operators.

                                    In addition, in the Material Plan and Resource Plan views, these two fields Item and
                                    Resource have a new 'Among' operator where users can select multiple items or
                                    resources to be displayed in the results.

                                    3.15.3.11. Material Plan Display Order
                                    This enhancement supports display of Material Plan in a user-defined item order. The
                                    sequence of items listed in the Material Plan will be derived from the sort order seen in
                                    the view that the user is coming into the Material Plan from (including Favorites List,
                                    Items, Supply and Demand, Bill of Materials, and Exceptions.). If the default Material
                                    Plan layout for the user is set to Category or Category-Org, the Material Plan is displayed
                                    in the order of the categories corresponding to the sorted selected items.

                                    This lets users to structure the Material Plan views in the same order as their supply
                                    chain structure starting from the assembly all the way down to the components.

                                    3.15.3.12. Display of Decimal Precision
                                    This feature enables users to have control on the maximum number of decimal digits
                                    displayed for different types of numeric fields displayed in the workbench using a set of
                                    responsibility-level profile options. Here is the list of profile options and the types of
                                    fields they control.

                                         •     MSC: Max display decimals for Quantity

                                         •     MSC: Max display decimals for Time

                                         •     MSC: Max display decimals for Quantity (aggregates)

                                         •     MSC: Max display decimals for Time (aggregates)

                                         •     MSC: Max display decimals for Currency

                                         •     MSC: Max display decimals for Ratios/Percentages

                                    Profile option (3) above controls the display of all aggregate quantities especially in the
                                    Material Plan and in Analytics, and profile option (4) above controls the display of all

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                            Oracle Rapid Planning   112
aggregate time/hours in the Resource Plan and in Analytics. The rest of the profiles
                                    control the display of decimals in all other views for the type of fields indicated above.

                                    These profiles are only for display purposes and do not control the precision of the
                                    internal values or the editable decimal precision.

                                    3.15.3.13. Last Saved Information for Plan Options
                                    The plan options window now displays the fields Last Saved By and Last Saved Date to
                                    indicate who last updated the plan and when the plan was last updated. These fields are
                                    also updated when a plan is run with the details of time of plan run and the user that ran
                                    the plan.

                                    3.15.3.14. Blow Through Phantom Items in Clear to Build
                                    The Clear to Build workbench’s Component Allocation View has been enhanced to
                                    display the actual components required by a make order by blowing through the make
                                    item’s phantom sub-assemblies. This provides visibility into the real component
                                    requirements for the make order and allows the user to reallocate scarce component
                                    availability as required.

                                    3.15.3.15. Global Forecasting Display in the Material Plan
                                    Global forecasting allows you to define forecasts without the context of a shipment
                                    organization. You can use sourcing rules to distribute consumed global forecasts to
                                    appropriate shipment organizations. Forecast distribution is performed in an
                                    unconstrained manner based on the user defined percentages in the sourcing rules.

                                    With this release of Rapid Planning, the Material Plan has been enhanced to display
                                    global forecasts. This provides users with the ability to view the original global forecast
                                    quantities, forecast consumption and the distribution of the global forecasts to specific
                                    organizations. The Material Plan view of global forecasts also shows the spreading of
                                    forecasts to the various time buckets.

                                    3.15.3.16. Auto-release of Planning Recommendations
                                    Rapid Planning now supports the auto-release of new planned orders. This is controlled
                                    with a new plan option, “Enable Auto Release.” Users can set the release time fence by
                                    editing an item-organization attribute. Rapid Planning will automatically release new
                                    planned orders when the suggested start date is inside the release time fence.

                                    Rapid Planning also supports the auto-release of reschedules and cancelations. This is
                                    controlled with a new plan option, “Auto Release Reschedules.” The release time fence
                                    item attribute also determines when auto release of reschedules and cancelations is
                                    performed.

                                    Simulation planning in Rapid Planning has been enhanced to work seamlessly with the
                                    release of planned orders and reschedules. If recommendations are released, the
                                    simulation plan ‘remembers’ what was released and does not create duplicate supplies.
                                    As planners release planned orders and then simulate new conditions, the plan has a
                                    record of what has already been released. The simulation plan treats the released plan
                                    orders as firm supplies.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                           Oracle Rapid Planning   113
3.15.3.17. Natural Time Fence
                                    Rapid Planning now supports the natural time fence. A new plan option called Create
                                    Time Fence has been provided in the Advanced tab of plan options. When checked, the
                                    planning engine will evaluate existing firm supplies for an item and use the latest
                                    completion date as the new planning time fence date for the item. This allows the planner
                                    or the shop floor scheduler or purchasing agent to firm a schedule of supplies, and new
                                    planned orders will not be created earlier than the firmed supplies.

                                    Two additional profile options are provided in the Advanced tab to extend the use of the
                                    natural time fence. The option Firm Planned Order Time Fence instructs the planning
                                    engine to create a natural time fence on the completion date of the latest firm planned
                                    order. The option Firm Internal Requisition Time Fence instructs the planning engine to
                                    create a natural time fence on the completion date of the latest firm internal requisition.

                    3.15.4.         Release 12.2

                                    There are no new features in Oracle Rapid Planning in Release 12.2.




          3.16. Oracle Service Parts Planning
                    3.16.1.         Product Overview

                                    Oracle Service Parts Planning (SPP) brings advanced multi-echelon supply chain
                                    planning to a service supply chain consisting of internal warehouses, emergency stocking
                                    locations, internal repair depots, external repair vendors, and external new buy vendors.

                                    Oracle SPP is a new product dedicated to the service parts planning domain. It offers an
                                    integrated forecasting and replenishment planning workbench, planning logic dedicated
                                    to the unique characteristics of the service parts planning domain (such as reverse
                                    logistics, multiple part conditions, and part supersession), and seamless integration to
                                    Oracle Supply Chain Management and Oracle Service (Spares Management and Depot
                                    Repair) applications to support execution of planned replenishment actions, including
                                    external and internal repair.

                    3.16.2.         Release 12.1.1

                                    3.16.2.1. Integrated Demand and Supply Planning
                                    By running a single Service Plan, you can regenerate both the forecasts and the
                                    replenishment recommendations (procurement, transfer, and repair) for an entire service
                                    supply chain.

                                    A service parts planning workbench lets you view and manipulate forecasts as well as
                                    transfer, and new buy and repair recommendations and transactions. All demand/supply,
                                    exception, item attribute and comments pertaining to a service part are visible in a single
                                    screen, creating a very efficient user experience for the planner.

                                    3.16.2.2. Service Parts Planning Workbench
                                    In service environments, it is common for planning responsibility to be divided across
                                    planners by item, and for planners to analyze, change, and execute plans on an item by

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                      Oracle Service Parts Planning   114
item basis. To support this practice, a new SPP screen shows in a single window the
                                    following information about an item:

                                         •     Values of key item attributes
                                         •     Horizontal supply and demand plan
                                         •     Planner comments relating to the item
                                         •     Exceptions relating to the item
                                         •     Demand history and forecast
                                    The SPP Workbench can display demand and supply information at the level of a single
                                    item, or aggregated across multiple revisions of the item’s supersession chain. It can
                                    display demand and supply information at a single location, or aggregated across user-
                                    defined groups of locations (inventory organizations).

                                    3.16.2.3. Integration to Spares Management for External Repairs
                                    SPP plans for repair of defective spare parts at external vendors. Movement of defective
                                    parts to the repair vendor, repair lead times and yields at the repair vendor, and
                                    movement of repaired (good) parts back to an internal warehouse are considered. The
                                    repair vendor must be modeled as an inventory organization. Upon release of a
                                    recommendation for external repair, integration with Oracle Spares Management
                                    automatically creates the repair purchase order to the repair vendor, the internal sales
                                    order to move defectives to the repair vendor, and the underlying work orders necessary
                                    to progress the repair through the repair vendor. (Management of the work orders is
                                    automatic and does not require user intervention.) Tracking of repair progress is done
                                    through a workbench in Oracle Spares Management.

                                    3.16.2.4. Integration to Depot Repair for Internal Repairs
                                    SPP plans for repair of defective spare parts at internal repair depots. Movement of
                                    defective parts to the repair vendor, repair lead times and yields at the repair vendor, and
                                    movement of repaired (good) parts back to an internal warehouse are considered. The
                                    repair depot must be modeled as an inventory organization. Upon release of a
                                    recommendation for internal repair, integration with Oracle Depot Repair automatically
                                    creates the transfer order to move defectives to the internal repair depot, the repair work
                                    order at the repair depot, and the transfer order to move the repaired spare parts back to a
                                    warehouse. Tracking of repair progress is done through a workbench in Oracle Depot
                                    Repair.

                                    3.16.2.5. Support for Part Condition
                                    SPP distinguishes between supplies of a single spare part that are of different conditions:
                                    good and defective. This allows SPP to recommend appropriate repairs to satisfy demand
                                    for good spare parts.

                                    3.16.2.6. Criticality Matrix
                                    You can group items into various criticalities on the basis of a flexible number of
                                    attributes such as cost, order frequency, reliability, and impact of failure. You can then
                                    specify forecasting methods and service level targets by criticality.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                      Oracle Service Parts Planning   115
3.16.2.7. Support for Supersessions
                                    SPP automatically uses supplies of later revisions of an item to satisfy demand for earlier
                                    revisions of the item. Forecasts are automatically created for the latest item revision in a
                                    supersession chain on the basis of the combined histories of the latest item revision and
                                    all previous item revisions. Revisions are defined via supersession item relationships in
                                    either Oracle Inventory or Oracle Spares Management.

                                    3.16.2.8. Returns Forecasts
                                    Forecasts of returns of defectives from the field are recognized as supply during the
                                    planning process. Recommendations for repairs will not exceed the forecasted and
                                    available supply of defective spare parts.

                                    3.16.2.9. Minimize New Buys
                                    SPP exhausts on-hand supplies of substitutable item revisions and options for repair of
                                    defective supplies before recommending, as a last resort, purchase of new spare parts to
                                    satisfy spares demand.

                                    3.16.2.10. Life Time Buys
                                    When a service part is obsoleted in advance of the end of the useful life of the products
                                    that require it for service, a last or 'life time buy' must be undertaken. SPP recognizes life
                                    time buy events as defined in the item attribute simulation set and recommends
                                    appropriate 'life time buys' that fulfill demand anticipated to fall between the life time
                                    buy date and the end of life date. (The latter date may be well beyond the end of the
                                    planning horizon.)

                                    3.16.2.11. Planner Work Lists
                                    SPP can generate a personal work list for each planner that dynamically lists items
                                    controlled by the planner that have important exceptions (for example, late
                                    replenishments where the number of days late is greater than 3) and those that have key
                                    recommendations (for example, new buy orders that need to be released within the next 5
                                    days). The type and severity of exceptions that qualify items for the work list and the
                                    type of recommendations that qualify for the work list can be specified by the planner.
                                    The work list shows the most important to-dos (items to replan, recommendations to
                                    release) that each planner must take care of at any given time.

                                    3.16.2.12. Integration with Collaborative Planning
                                    SPP supports the publishing of new buy order forecasts to new buy suppliers and repair
                                    order forecasts to external repair suppliers. Suppliers can view and respond to these
                                    order forecasts through Collaborative Planning (CP). External repair suppliers can also
                                    view in CP forecasts of defective shipments to their facilities as planned in SPP. SPP can
                                    receive supply commits uploaded to CP from new buy suppliers and trigger exception
                                    messages when those commit levels are exceeded.

                                    3.16.2.13. Supersession Chain-Specific Replanning
                                    When a planner is working on a service part in the planner workbench, he or she can
                                    initiate a quick replan of just the supersession chain involving the part on display. This
                                    allows the planner to perform adjustments such as expediting repair or purchase orders,

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                       Oracle Service Parts Planning   116
or changing the forecast either manually or by switching statistical forecasting methods,
                                    then quickly recalibrate the supply / demand balance of the part being worked. The
                                    replan can include forecasting and replenishment planning, or just one of those. The
                                    planner's replanning action will not affect the planning results of any other part in other
                                    supersession chains. Multiple planners can therefore work concurrently on the same SPP
                                    plan, each on their own parts, without impacting each other's work.

                                    3.16.2.14. Execution Net Change Planning
                                    Service parts planning environments are characterized by high part and location counts.
                                    Scalability of planning calculations is a primary concern. On the functional side, SPP
                                    enhances scalability by planning parts only when necessary, and while leaving the pre-
                                    existing planning results of other parts intact. If the "Net Change" launch option of SPP
                                    toggled to Yes, SPP will only generate fresh plan results for new parts or those parts that
                                    have experienced net changes in demand/supply, item attributes, supersession or repair to
                                    relationships, or supplier capacity; it will overlay those plan results on top of pre-existing
                                    plan results for other items. This feature operates in conjunction with net change
                                    collections.

                    3.16.3.         Release 12.1.2

                                    3.16.3.1. Multi-process Inline Forecasting
                                    The performance of Inline Forecasting in Oracle Service Parts Planning (SPP) has been
                                    significantly enhanced through the introduction of a new profile option "MSO: Number
                                    of processes for Inline Forecast".

                                    While previously a single 'Memory Based Forecaster' process was launched to generate a
                                    forecast for all items in the plan, you can now launch multiple processes, so that
                                    forecasts for different item-chains are generated in parallel. This profile determines the
                                    number of such processes that are launched in parallel for forecasting.

                                    3.16.3.2. Intermittent Demand Flag

                                    Whether the history data for an item is intermittent or not determines:

                                         •     the forecast methods that Oracle Service Parts Planning (SPP) employs to
                                               generate a 'Blended' (Bayesian weighted average) forecast, and

                                         •     the safety stock calculation method used by Oracle Inventory Optimization (IO).
                                               IO assumes Poisson-distributed demand variability for intermittent demands,
                                               normally-distributed demand variability for non-intermittent demands.

                                    Previously the SPP Forecast Rule screen had an option to specify whether the history
                                    data was intermittent or not. This approach this had two inherent issues: (i) the forecast
                                    rule is independent of item and (ii) non-SPP users of Oracle Inventory Optimization
                                    needed to set up SPP Forecast Rules in order to trigger IO's intermittent demand
                                    calculations.

                                    Release 12.1.2 has an enhanced Item Attribute Mass Maintenance (IMM) form, with a
                                    new item attribute 'Intermittent Demand' added. This attribute will be used to specify
                                    whether the history pattern is intermittent or not, and will be referred to by the SPP
                                    forecasting engine, and by IO. This will be available both on the Item-Organization and



Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                       Oracle Service Parts Planning   117
Item-Zone tab of the IMM. The options on the Forecast Rule screen to specify whether
                                    history is intermittent or not have been removed.

                                    3.16.3.3. Planner Worklist Enhancement

                                    Oracle Service Parts Planning already had a 'Planner Worklist' that could be set up for
                                    each planner so that it dynamically lists important exceptions / key recommendations on
                                    his items. This shows the most important to-dos that each planner must take care of at
                                    any given time.

                                    The Planner Worklist has been further enhanced in Oracle Service Parts Planning 12.1.2.
                                    The grouping of exceptions and recommendations has been rationalized so that the
                                    results are presented in a more concise manner, and it is easier to drill down from this
                                    prioritized list of tasks to details regarding each.

                    3.16.4.         Release 12.1.3

                                    3.16.4.1. Re-order Point-based Parts Planning

                                    Reorder point based planning is a widely adopted method of planning replenishments for
                                    service parts. It uses demand forecasts and item lead times to decide when to place a new
                                    order in order to avoid dipping into safety stock. Orders are usually created for the
                                    economic order quantity, in order to strike a balance between purchasing and carrying
                                    costs.

                                                                                       PAB Profile

                                               Q
                                               u
                                               a                                                                  Re-order
                                               n                                                                  Quantity
                                               t
                                               i
                                               t                                                                 Safety
                                               y                                                                 Stock

                                                                          Time


                                         Demand                Supply



                                    Oracle Service Parts Planning 12.1.3 has been enhanced to support Re-order point based
                                    planning. SPP computes the safety stock target for a part based on mean absolute
                                    deviation (for parts with regular demand) or assuming a Poisson distribution (for parts
                                    with intermittent demand), or reads in safety stock targets from other sources (like
                                    Inventory Optimization). It then dynamically determines when to place an order,
                                    depending on this safety stock target and future demand.

                                    SPP also computes the Economic Order Quantity using the standard formula, so that new
                                    orders are placed for this quantity. The user also has the option to override the system
                                    computed values. The values of safety stock and EOQ can be recalculated during a
                                    planning run, or they can be retained at their existing values.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                    Oracle Service Parts Planning     118
3.16.4.2. Import into a Simulation Set

                                    The Simulation Set in SPP is used by planners for mass maintenance of data. This is
                                    however difficult to use when the planner has to manually enter or edit values for each
                                    attribute in the forms UI.

                                    SPP 12.1.3 has been enhanced to support a mass upload of item attribute values into the
                                    simulation set. A standard format spreadsheet template is provided as part of legacy
                                    collections flat file loads. The planner can use this template to enter / edit / delete
                                    attribute values, and then upload the spreadsheet file to mass update the values for the
                                    respective attributes on the items.

                                    The Planner Workbench (Supply Demand Analysis) screen has also been enhanced to
                                    enable update of item attributes that will then be considered in an online replan.

                                    3.16.4.3. Integration with Advanced Supply Chain Planning

                                    An OEM manufacturing products often manufactures spare parts for them too. Typically
                                    the OEM would have a distinct service supply chain, where defective products are
                                    returned and repaired. In case there is not sufficient supply of defective parts (that can be
                                    repaired) in the service supply chain, new parts may have to be manufactured. Thus the
                                    manufacturing facility that manufactures the parts will have two sets of demands – one
                                    coming from the manufacturing supply chain, and the second coming from the service
                                    supply chain.




                                    Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning (ASCP) plans for the manufacturing supply
                                    chain and currently handles the first stream of demand. ASCP is now integrated with
                                    Oracle Service Parts Planning (SPP) which plans for the service supply chain. Thus SPP
                                    would take in demand from the Service supply chain and try to meet these demands
                                    through repair of defective parts. In case all demands cannot be met in this manner, SPP
                                    can source parts from the manufacturing supply chain. This ‘demand’ for spare parts
                                    from SPP is read in by ASCP (by virtue of the SPP plan being a demand schedule in the
                                    ASCP plan). ASCP then plans the manufacture.

                                    3.16.4.4. Integration with APCC - Service Parts Planner Dashboard

                                    A new Service Parts Planner dashboard is now available in Advanced Planning
                                    Command Center. Service Parts Plans can be archived and published to Advanced

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                       Oracle Service Parts Planning   119
Planning Command Center. The archived versions can then be viewed in reports and
                                    dashboards.

                                    The Service Parts Planner dashboard is structured to address the typical questions that a
                                    parts planner would have and includes a number of service-specific measures and KPIs,
                                    such as repairs versus new buys, internal versus external repairs, service contracts
                                    performance.

                                    The SPP dashboard has five pages: the first, a Plan Health summary, summarizes
                                    demand and supply, exceptions, and service agreements.

                                    The Demand and Supply page enables the planner to start with an overall view of
                                    demand satisfaction in the service supply chain, and drill down all the way into the SPP
                                    planner workbench.

                                    The Exceptions page of the Service Parts Planner dashboard highlights key exceptions in
                                    the service parts plan and enables the planner to investigate their causes.

                                    The Service Level Agreement Analysis page is meant for evaluating service contracts.
                                    The planner can see compliance to service contracts, and review costs, revenues,
                                    profitability and achieved versus target safety stocks. The reports on this page are based
                                    on Inventory Optimization plans.

                                    Finally the Historical Performance page gives the planner a picture of how the plan is
                                    tracking against actuals. The planner can compare how actuals for measures such as
                                    shipments and returns, compare against SPP plan output.

                    3.16.5.         Release 12.1.3.2

                                    3.16.5.1. Fair Share
                                    In case of constrained supplies, Oracle Service Parts Planning (SPP) previously allocated
                                    the available supplies to the first demand. However, planners may prefer to fair share
                                    constrained supplies among competing demands of the same priority from different
                                    organizations. SPP has therefore been enhanced in release 12.1.3.2 to support this.

                                    A ‘Supply Allocation Rule’ screen has been added to SPP to specify the organizations
                                    whose demands can compete for constrained supplies at a source organization. SPP
                                    allocates supplies to demands based on the demand priority. If there is insufficient
                                    supply and there are multiple competing demands of the same priority in the ‘allocation
                                    bucket’, supplies at the source organization are fair shared amongst them in the ratio of
                                    the ‘current demand.’ In case of a tie, the organization priority specified in the Supply
                                    Allocation Rule is used as a tiebreaker.

                                    SPP considers demands across the supersession chain while fair sharing supplies.
                                    Supplies are also fair shared among safety stock demands, after reserving a portion of the
                                    supplies to meet the source organization safety stock target.

                                    The SPP Supply Demand Analysis window has been enhanced to add an ‘Unconstrained
                                    Demand’ row, so that the planner can identify the various demands that are competing
                                    for constrained supplies within a time bucket.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                     Oracle Service Parts Planning   120
3.16.5.2. Query-based Auto-release
                                    Service supply chains often have millions of parts that are planned for, and therefore an
                                    even higher number of planned orders. As a result, manually releasing planned orders to
                                    execution is often not an option. Previously, SPP provided the option to auto-release all
                                    orders within the release time fence. However, the planner may want to be alerted in
                                    specific scenarios (for example, when a single order is for a very large value) before the
                                    order is released.

                                    SPP has therefore been enhanced in release 12.1.3.2 to enable ‘Query-based Auto-
                                    release’. The planner can now define queries, and then specify whether (a) the records
                                    returned by the query should be released or (b) the records returned by the query (say
                                    ones that cause an exception) should be blocked from release, and all other orders be
                                    released. Further, an ‘Applied-to’ column has been added, so that the release action is
                                    applied to all orders for the particular item/supersession, or to all orders for that
                                    item/supersession in that organization.

                                    In addition to these, certain forecasting related metrics (like MAPE) are computed in
                                    Demantra and exported to SPP. These metrics have been enabled for inclusion in queries,
                                    so that, say orders for items can be blocked from release if the forecast accuracy is too
                                    low.

                                    3.16.5.3. Collect Installed Base under Contract
                                    A planner might want to forecast the demand for service parts that is likely to arise in the
                                    future, in order to service the Installed Base of products that are covered under contracts.
                                    The Oracle Value Chain Planning Server Parts Planning solution has been enhanced in
                                    Release 12.1.3.2 to provide this capability. You can now collect a new entity, ‘Installed
                                    Base under Contract.’ When this is entity is collected, the installed base history and
                                    contract history are examined, and, for each period, the number of installed units that
                                    were under contract is determined. A profile option has been added to specify the period
                                    for which this information must be collected.

                                    This information is then used, along with the computed failure rate of each service part
                                    in the Installed Base item, to determine the service parts forecast.

                                    3.16.5.4. Collect Field Replaceable Unit Bills of Material
                                    Forecasting the requirement of parts to service an Installed Base under contract (as
                                    detailed above) requires information on the various components (called Field
                                    Replaceable Units) in the install base item that are eligible for service.

                                    In Release 12.1.3.2, when you collect the Installed Base under Contract, the Field
                                    Replaceable Units (FRU) BOM can be automatically derived. In order to enable this, all
                                    FRUs have to be included in a designated category set. FRU BOMs are then derived
                                    based on parts belonging to this category set: (a) that are part of the manufacturing BOM
                                    of the Install Base item; or (b) if the debrief on a service request for the Installed Base
                                    item includes a part belonging to this category set.

                                    This FRU BOM is then used in Demantra Demand Management to compute the failure
                                    rate of parts, which is then used in computing the service parts forecast.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                      Oracle Service Parts Planning   121
3.16.5.5. Supersession Notes
                                    Customers often require the ability to add free form notes while creating a supersession
                                    relationship. These notes usually contain detailed information about the relationship, for
                                    example, information about when the supersession is for dangerous goods. The notes are
                                    created in Oracle Spares Management while defining the relationship. These notes must
                                    then be visible to a planner in Service Parts Planning.

                                    Oracle Service Parts Planning has been enhanced in Release 12.1.3.2 to pull in the notes
                                    that are created in Spares Management, and display them on the key screens where a
                                    planner may review the supersession: the Planner Worklist, Supply Demand Analysis,
                                    and Supersession screens.

                    3.16.6.         Release 12.2

                                    3.16.6.1. Support Multiple Move-in / Move-out Lines for a Repair Order
                                    In case the depot organization is different from the central warehouse and defectives are
                                    not at the depot organization, Oracle Service Parts Planning (SPP) generates three
                                    separate planned order recommendations for internal repair. They are:

                                         1. Order to move defectives in for repair (move-in line);

                                         2. Non Standard repair work order to repair the part (repair work order);

                                         3. Order to move usable inventory to the demanding organization (move-out line).

                                    During the release process, the SPP release code calls an Oracle Depot Repair API,
                                    which creates execution documents for the move-in line, repair order and the move-out
                                    line. Until Release 12.2, the Depot Repair API did not support multiple move-in and/or
                                    move-out lines for a repair order. This meant that there had to be a one to one to one
                                    pegging between the move-in line, the repair order and the move-out line in the SPP
                                    engine.

                                    The Depot Rapair API is being enhanced in Release 12.2 to support multiple move-in /
                                    move-out lines for a repair order. Corresponding to this, the SPP release capability is
                                    being enhanced to support this situation. SPP therefore will no longer enforce one to one
                                    to one pegging between the move-in line, the repair order and the move-out line.




          3.17. Oracle Strategic Network Optimization
                    3.17.1.         Release 12.1.1

                                    3.17.1.1. Supply Chain Risk Management
                                    Due to the dynamic nature of the global business environment, companies are searching
                                    for ways to improve their supply chains in order to absorb disruptions that occur
                                    unexpectedly. While providing other substantial benefits, Just-in-time, and Lean
                                    Manufacturing initiatives have hindered many business's ability to absorb the impact of
                                    unexpected events. Slack in the supply chain - usually in the form of inventory - is no
                                    longer an acceptable hedging strategy and a sudden change such as a missed supply, can


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document              Oracle Strategic Network Optimization   122
have an immediate impact on a companies' operations. As an example, recent hurricanes
                                    have proved disastrous and exposed many weaknesses and companies' existing supply
                                    chain. Less sensational events, such as an unexpected line shutdown can also have a
                                    material impact to the business.

                                    The ability to run simulations for these unexpected events is necessary for companies to
                                    manage risk and these capabilities are now available in Strategic Network Optimization.
                                    While most advanced planning software packages have simulation capabilities,
                                    considering the unexpected nature of an event is absent. As an example, the simulation
                                    of an unexpected plant shutdown in the future will trigger inventory pre-build in
                                    anticipation of this event in most software packages. Since this event occurs
                                    unexpectedly, this is not a realistic hedging strategy. Strategic Network Optimization
                                    will simulate the surprise nature of this event and will present realistic options should
                                    such and event occur. These simulations can also be run proactively to determine the
                                    potential exposure, or risk, that your company faces.

                                    The following enhancement will allow planners to analyze and mitigate risk by:

                                              The Ability to consider unplanned, and planned events and it’s impact on the
                                               supply chain

                                              Easily compare scenarios using various Key Performance Indicators

                                              Ability to consider multiple demand series and safety stock plans

                                    Vital to this enhancement is the concept of unplanned events. In order to simulate the
                                    unpredictable nature of such events, the element of surprise needs to be reflected in the
                                    solution. For example, if a plant is unexpectedly shut down due to a natural disaster the
                                    solver should not pre-build inventory in anticipation of this event. This requirement will
                                    be a key differentiator for the Strategic Network Optimization and strengthen its position
                                    in the marketplace as the leader in Supply Chain Risk Management decision support
                                    systems.

                                    3.17.1.2. Alerts
                                    Alerts are used to assist the planner with identifying and resolving exceptions after
                                    solving the model. The current mechanism to view and manage alerts in SNO is by
                                    using the Over and Under User Sets. While this is useful, the generic Over/Under
                                    categorization makes it difficult for users to quickly identify exceptions of a certain type.
                                    Reports (Smart graphs) are typically created to supplement the Sets and present the
                                    information in a more useful format. Reports require set up beforehand and multiple
                                    reports are needed to identify exceptions of different types.

                                    Introducing an alert framework in SNO alleviates the need to use both Sets and reports to
                                    manage and review exceptions in the model. It will also provide a familiar alert
                                    workflow that is typical in many planning applications. Because of it flexibility, SNO is
                                    often used to solve non-traditional supply chain problems. This enhancement focuses on
                                    the traditional strategic and tactical manufacturing & distribution use of the application.
                                    Consideration for a more flexible framework to support non-traditional uses will be
                                    considered in the future.

                                    Alerts are categorized based on the business area. Within each category, the type of alert
                                    violation will be identified. This provides the planner with the ability to quickly identify



Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                Oracle Strategic Network Optimization   123
and focus on the area of interest. The ability to drill-down and easily navigate to the
                                    node or arc of interest is also an important requirement that is addressed.

                                    Alerts will provide the following benefits:

                                              Alerts provide an immediate visual representation of exceptions, which are faster
                                               and more informative than using sets to identify exception.

                                              You can drill-down to the exact location of the exception within a node or arc.

                                              Alert categorization is more specific than Over and Under User Sets
                                               categorization.

                                              Little set up is required to use alerts.

                                    This image shows the new Alerts area at the bottom of the Strategic Network
                                    Optimization main user interface:




                                    The number and type of alerts is displayed in the Model Workspace area. In the Model
                                    Workspace tree, at the root level of Alerts, the number of alerts is displayed in brackets
                                    and the word Alerts is displayed in bold font. If no exceptions are found in the model,
                                    Alerts has no number in brackets next to it and the font is not bolded. In the example
                                    above, total of (68) exceptions were found when the model was solved.

                                    Within Alerts, there are six different alert categories. The number of exception found
                                    within each type of alert is displayed next to the alert category in the Model Workspace
                                    area. In the example above, (42) Demand alerts, (22) Inventory alerts, and (4)
                                    Transportation alerts were found for a total of (68). Within each alert category, there are
                                    several specific types of exceptions. If an exception is found, a red exclamation mark is
                                    displayed next to the exception type and if no exceptions are found, a green checkmark is
                                    displayed next to the exception type, as seen in the example above.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                   Oracle Strategic Network Optimization   124
The Alerts section can be displayed across the bottom of the main user interface, as seen
                                    in the example above. This section can be shown, expanded, or collapsed, using the up
                                    and down arrows at the top of the section. If you double-click an Alerts folder in the
                                    Model Workspace tree, the Alerts section at the bottom of the main user interface
                                    expands. Single-clicking on an item in the Alerts section of the Model Workspace tree
                                    displays the alert in the Alerts section at the bottom of the main user interface. The six
                                    tabs; Demand, Inventory, Manufacturing, Transportation, Supply, and Other reflect the
                                    alerts results and match the Alerts section in the Model Workspace tree.

                                    When using alerts, each node or arc that you want to be alerted about is assigned an alert
                                    category. To assign an alert category, a new Category drop-down list was added to nodes
                                    and arcs:




                                    3.17.1.3. Key Performance Indicators
                                    After running a scenario, Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) can help you make detailed
                                    scenario comparisons. They provide you with graphical representation of various metrics
                                    in a model. KPIs can show you which scenario is most efficient at filling demand,
                                    minimizing inventory costs, or providing the highest percentage of machine utilization.
                                    Costs are categorized based on the types of costs in the nodes and arcs and are summed
                                    across the whole planning horizon, not by period. KPIs are only visible in Key
                                    Performance Indicators view.




                                    An example of the Key Performance Indicators View

                                    Strategic Network Optimization has nine different KPIs:


Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document              Oracle Strategic Network Optimization   125
     Total Cost - The sum of all costs in the model.

                                              Transportation Cost - The sum of all costs for any node or arc in the model
                                               where Category is set to Transportation.

                                              Production Cost - The sum of all costs for any node or arc in the model where
                                               Category is set to Manufacturing.

                                              Supply Cost - The sum of all costs for any node or arc in the model where
                                               Category is set to Supply.

                                              Inventory Cost - The sum of all costs for any node or arc in the model where
                                               Category is set to Inventory.

                                              Other Cost - The sum of all costs for any node or arc in the model where
                                               Category is null.

                                              Labor Utilization % - Labor utilization expressed as a percentage.

                                              Machine Utilization % - Machine utilization expressed as a percentage.

                                              Demand Fill Rate % - Demand Fill Rate expressed as a percentage.

                                    By default, Key Performance Indicator data is displayed in bar chart format. However,
                                    the data can also be displayed in pie chart format or polar format by clicking the Pie or
                                    Polar tabs. A polar chart displays points in a graph based on data in the scenario. An
                                    example of a polar chart can be seen here below:




                                     =

                                    Polar chart

                                    By default, each scenario defined in the Model Workspace appears in the Key
                                    Performance Indicators view. However, you can use the KPI Selection Dialog to choose
                                    which key performance indicators scenarios are displayed.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                 Oracle Strategic Network Optimization   126
KPI Selection Dialog



                                    The concept of scenarios was introduced in previous versions of Strategic Network
                                    Optimization. However, scenarios are now created and run from the Model Workspace
                                    tree as seen below:




                                    Scenarios & Events in the Model Workspace Tree

                                    The concept of events is new to this version of Strategic Network Optimization. Events
                                    are individual occurrences which impact the supply chain. Events are created and then
                                    added to scenarios. They specify the find and replace functions which are performed
                                    within the model. Each scenario should have at least one event assigned to it. If you run a
                                    scenario with no events in it, the model baseline solves. Several events can be added to
                                    the same scenario. There are two kinds of events:
                                              Unplanned
                                              Planned
                                    Unplanned events have been added to support Supply Chain Risk Management, they are
                                    complete surprises. They are used when there is no warning that the event will occur. A
                                    sudden change such as a missed supply can have an immediate impact on a company’s
                                    operations. Unplanned events allow you to incorporate the concept of surprise into your
                                    model’s solution. Examples of unplanned events which can massively interrupt supply
                                    chain operations include natural disasters such as hurricanes and floods.

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document              Oracle Strategic Network Optimization   127
Planned events are not surprises and there is at least some react time involved. With this
                                    advance warning, there is at least some time to make other supply arrangements and
                                    activate contingency plans. Examples of planned events include seasonal supply chain
                                    interruptions, anticipated shortages, and increases in demand caused by promotions.

                                    3.17.1.4. Usability Enhancements
                                    The investment in usability continues with this release. In addition to the Alerts, and
                                    KPI view the following enhancements have been incorporated to improve the overall
                                    user experience:

                                    Improved Find and Replace

                                    Find, Replace, and Find Export are essential tools required by consultants, pre-sales, and
                                    customers. The purpose for initiating any of these utilities are many – from model
                                    creation, navigation, and data editing to name a few. While each function serves a
                                    distinct purpose, there is some overlap and the fact that they each have similar, yet
                                    different dialogs is confusing. The usability suffers further as the number of modal
                                    dialogs that pop up can be many. For example, a simple Find query with an ensuing
                                    replace opens up to seven dialog boxes which must than be closed. This enhancement
                                    provides the following in SNO:
                                              Combined dialog boxes for Find, Replace, and Find Export
                                              Ability to access the dialog boxes with shortcuts versus the multi-nested menus
                                              Improved usability with a more intuitive graphical user interface
                                    Quick access to common functions in the toolbar

                                    Commonly used functions have been added to the toolbar for easy access. These
                                    include:
                                              Find & Replace
                                              Hide Nodes
                                              Hide Arcs
                                              Fat Arcs
                                              Align Nodes in Columns
                                              Align Nodes in Rows
                                              Select Adjacent nodes
                                              Show/hide map legend
                                    Improved Map Legend

                                    The map legend has been improved to provide the ability to move the legend outside of
                                    the map view to prevent the legend from covering up key areas of the map. The ability
                                    to specify a shape and color has also been added in this release.

                                    Overall Look and Feel

                                    Node icons have replaced the dated node symbols to make the nodes easier to identify.
                                    The node color has also been changed to match the color of the application and block
                                    images have been updated in the sample models.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                Oracle Strategic Network Optimization   128
3.17.2.         Release 12.1.2

                                    3.17.2.1. Aggregate Assignment Set and Lane Definition

                                    When setting up a Strategic Plan, assignment sets and lanes are required to be defined for
                                    each item that needs to be considered in a plan. For assignment sets the number of item-
                                    organization combinations can potentially be very large since many of the aggregate
                                    assignment levels are currently not supported. Similarly, when setting up lanes from
                                    organization to customers each individual lane needs to be defined for every item-
                                    organization-customer site-ship method combination. The setup for this can become
                                    very tedious and error prone. A simple example will illustrate the current challenge.

                                    Number of customer sites =100
                                    Average Number of DC’s per customer site=2
                                    Number of ship methods (rail, truck)=2

                                    For this small supply chain 2 x 100 x 2 = 400 individual lanes would need to be entered.

                                    The purpose of this enhancement is to ease the set-up required when defining strategic
                                    plans. This is achieved by:

                                        Support all available assignment type levels for input assignment sets.
                                        Support for specificity rules to allow for defaulting. For example, a sourcing rule at
                                         the item-organization level will override a previously defined assignment at the
                                         category-organization level.
                                        Support lane definition for regions or zones

                                    This enhancement will ensure consistency with the other planning products and greatly
                                    improve usability. This will also decrease the number of initial setup problems since the
                                    most common problem is missing one of the many assignments or lanes that need to be
                                    defined.

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document               Oracle Strategic Network Optimization   129
3.17.3.         Release 12.1.3

                                    There are no new enhancements in Oracle Strategic Network Optimization in Release
                                    12.1.3.

                    3.17.4.         Release 12.2

                                    3.17.4.1. Specify Scenario File in the Plan Options
                                    This enhancement improves the usability and robustness of Strategic Network
                                    Optimization when deployed leveraging the standard integration to Oracle EBS or
                                    EnterpriseOne. In many cases it is necessary to augment the model that is created using
                                    the standard integrated process as the information may not be available in the source
                                    system or the modeling constructs might need to be altered to satisfy specific business
                                    requirements. Some examples include

                                                     •    Adjusting node-specific penalty costs

                                                     •    Considering future currencies

                                                     •    Modeling unique supply chain constraints

                                                     •    Leveraging Risk Adjusted Costs

                                    These types of changes may be accommodated leveraging Strategic Network
                                    Optimization’s import file.

                                    The plan options have been modified to allow the specification of one or more scenario
                                    files (import files) to the plan.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                   Oracle Strategic Network Optimization   130
Currently this can only be accomplished on the server side by expert users and requires
                                    access to the server, appropriate server permissions and knowledge of the back end file
                                    structure, scripts, and Strategic Network Optimization batch import commands. Server
                                    side customizations will still be available and is the recommended approach for
                                    significant customizations. The following diagram illustrates this enhancement in
                                    context of the overall architecture.




                                       Providing the ability to attach scenario files to the plan options will:

                                         •     Lower the Total Cost of Ownership by providing an easy mechanism to import
                                               model customizations

                                         •     Improve usability and adoption in the field

                                         •     Decrease data and model errors as the appropriate version of the scenario/import
                                               file can be attached to the plan

                                         •     Expand the relevance of the standard integrated model

                                    3.17.4.2. Solver Upgrade
                                    Strategic Network Optimization leverages linear optimization in combination with a
                                    number of heuristics to solve long term supply chain planning problems. SNO leverages
                                    the industry standard CPLEX solver which is capable of solving large scale Linear
                                    Programming problems. In this release, the CPLEX version has been upgraded from
                                    version 10.0 to 12.2, which enables the SNO solver to run significantly faster while
                                    requiring less memory. This will be especially valuable to our customers with larger
                                    SNO models.

Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                 Oracle Strategic Network Optimization   131
The new CPLEX version also comes bundled with a Mixed Integer Programming (MIP)
                                    solver which allows SNO to provide better (lower cost) solutions for go/no-go problems,
                                    including Capital Asset Management. Typical Capital Asset Management problems
                                    include:

                                         •     How many facilities (Plants/DC’s) should I have?

                                         •     Where should my facilities be located?

                                         •     What impact will off shoring have on my supply chain

                                         •     Can I rationalize my facilities without compromising my ability to meet demand?

                                         •     How can I mitigate supply chain risk?

                                         •     When should I open/close my facilities?

                                    Leveraging the MIP algorithm will better align SNO with current cost-driven objectives
                                    used in facility planning.




Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document                  Oracle Strategic Network Optimization   132

More Related Content

DOC
msword
PDF
installation_manual
PDF
Capacity guide
PDF
An Investigation of Self-Interference Reduction Strategy in Correlated SM-OFD...
PDF
OOW09 R12.1 Standalone Solutions
PPT
Business intelligence
PPT
Enterprise resource planning ppt
PPT
What is ERP
msword
installation_manual
Capacity guide
An Investigation of Self-Interference Reduction Strategy in Correlated SM-OFD...
OOW09 R12.1 Standalone Solutions
Business intelligence
Enterprise resource planning ppt
What is ERP

Similar to Oracle EBS Release content document (20)

PDF
Building An Integrated Supply Chain Planning Platform
PDF
supply_chain_planning_update_23d.pdf
PDF
AFSUG 2012 Process orchestration success story
PDF
Introduction to Enterprise Resource Planning
PDF
63556309 sap
PDF
63556309 sap
PDF
SAP SD Study material
PDF
smartOCI for SAP Procurement and SRM - Increase Catalogue adoption & Usage
PDF
OpenERP 7.0 Release Notes
PDF
CPFR Process Model
PPT
CA John Michelsen - Oracle OpenWorld 2012 - "ServiceVirtualization Reality is...
PDF
White Paper: Configuration and Build Management of Product Line Development w...
PDF
Supply Planning Leadership Exchange: SAP PP/DS What You Need to Know Part 1
PDF
Managing sap upgrade_projects
PDF
be.as Manufacturing for SAP Business One
PPT
Oracle fusion applications preparation
PDF
Re-architecting Your Supply Chain for High Velocity Growth
PPTX
PPTX
Avea Release Management IBM Innovate 2012
Building An Integrated Supply Chain Planning Platform
supply_chain_planning_update_23d.pdf
AFSUG 2012 Process orchestration success story
Introduction to Enterprise Resource Planning
63556309 sap
63556309 sap
SAP SD Study material
smartOCI for SAP Procurement and SRM - Increase Catalogue adoption & Usage
OpenERP 7.0 Release Notes
CPFR Process Model
CA John Michelsen - Oracle OpenWorld 2012 - "ServiceVirtualization Reality is...
White Paper: Configuration and Build Management of Product Line Development w...
Supply Planning Leadership Exchange: SAP PP/DS What You Need to Know Part 1
Managing sap upgrade_projects
be.as Manufacturing for SAP Business One
Oracle fusion applications preparation
Re-architecting Your Supply Chain for High Velocity Growth
Avea Release Management IBM Innovate 2012
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
Programs and apps: productivity, graphics, security and other tools
PPTX
ACSFv1EN-58255 AWS Academy Cloud Security Foundations.pptx
PDF
Encapsulation_ Review paper, used for researhc scholars
PPTX
sap open course for s4hana steps from ECC to s4
PDF
The Rise and Fall of 3GPP – Time for a Sabbatical?
PDF
How UI/UX Design Impacts User Retention in Mobile Apps.pdf
PDF
Advanced methodologies resolving dimensionality complications for autism neur...
PDF
Per capita expenditure prediction using model stacking based on satellite ima...
PDF
Peak of Data & AI Encore- AI for Metadata and Smarter Workflows
PDF
Spectral efficient network and resource selection model in 5G networks
PDF
TokAI - TikTok AI Agent : The First AI Application That Analyzes 10,000+ Vira...
PDF
Diabetes mellitus diagnosis method based random forest with bat algorithm
PDF
Chapter 3 Spatial Domain Image Processing.pdf
PDF
Mobile App Security Testing_ A Comprehensive Guide.pdf
PPTX
VMware vSphere Foundation How to Sell Presentation-Ver1.4-2-14-2024.pptx
PDF
Reach Out and Touch Someone: Haptics and Empathic Computing
PPTX
20250228 LYD VKU AI Blended-Learning.pptx
PPTX
Understanding_Digital_Forensics_Presentation.pptx
PDF
Optimiser vos workloads AI/ML sur Amazon EC2 et AWS Graviton
PDF
Dropbox Q2 2025 Financial Results & Investor Presentation
Programs and apps: productivity, graphics, security and other tools
ACSFv1EN-58255 AWS Academy Cloud Security Foundations.pptx
Encapsulation_ Review paper, used for researhc scholars
sap open course for s4hana steps from ECC to s4
The Rise and Fall of 3GPP – Time for a Sabbatical?
How UI/UX Design Impacts User Retention in Mobile Apps.pdf
Advanced methodologies resolving dimensionality complications for autism neur...
Per capita expenditure prediction using model stacking based on satellite ima...
Peak of Data & AI Encore- AI for Metadata and Smarter Workflows
Spectral efficient network and resource selection model in 5G networks
TokAI - TikTok AI Agent : The First AI Application That Analyzes 10,000+ Vira...
Diabetes mellitus diagnosis method based random forest with bat algorithm
Chapter 3 Spatial Domain Image Processing.pdf
Mobile App Security Testing_ A Comprehensive Guide.pdf
VMware vSphere Foundation How to Sell Presentation-Ver1.4-2-14-2024.pptx
Reach Out and Touch Someone: Haptics and Empathic Computing
20250228 LYD VKU AI Blended-Learning.pptx
Understanding_Digital_Forensics_Presentation.pptx
Optimiser vos workloads AI/ML sur Amazon EC2 et AWS Graviton
Dropbox Q2 2025 Financial Results & Investor Presentation
Ad

Oracle EBS Release content document

  • 1. ORACLE E-BUSINESS SUITE RELEASE CONTENT DOCUMENT Value Chain Planning Releases 12.1 and 12.2 (inclusive of 12.0.2 – 12.0.7) Prepared by the VCP Product Management and Strategy Teams Last Updated: April 5, 2011 Version: 1.0 Copyright © 2011 Oracle Corporation All Rights Reserved
  • 2. Table of Contents 1. Disclaimer 1 2. Introduction 2 2.1. Purpose of Document 2 3. New and Changed Features in Value Chain Planning 3 3.1. Collections 3 3.1.1. Release 12.1.1 3 3.1.1.1. Backward Compatibility to 11i10 3 3.2. Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center 3 3.2.1. Product Overview 3 3.2.2. Release 12.1.1 4 3.2.2.1. Sales and Operations Planning Dashboard 4 3.2.2.2. Supply Chain Analyst Dashboard 5 3.2.2.3. Analytical Framework 6 3.2.2.4. Scenario Management 7 3.2.2.5. Supply Chain Planning Web Services 7 3.2.2.6. Seeded BPEL Processes 7 3.2.2.7. Process Automation 8 3.2.2.8. Activity Management 8 3.2.3. Release 12.1.2 8 3.2.3.1. Compatibility with 11.5.10 Planning Server 8 3.2.3.2. Integration to Third Party Planning Systems 9 3.2.3.3. Ability to Run APCC Standalone 9 3.2.3.4. Rich User Interface Enhancements 10 3.2.4. Release 12.1.3 10 3.2.4.1. Analysis of Inventory and Service Levels 10 3.2.4.2. Analysis of Excess and Obsolescence 10 3.2.4.3. Enhanced Sales and Operations Planning Dashboard 10 3.2.4.4. Supply Chain Risk Management Dashboard 11 3.2.4.5. Revenue Gap Analysis 12 3.2.4.6. Collaboration Workspaces for Unstructured Collaboration 12 3.2.4.7. Enhanced Exceptions Analysis 12 3.2.4.8. Integration with Rapid Planning 13 3.2.4.9. Plan Versus Collected Data Comparison 13 3.2.5. Release 12.1.3.2 13 3.2.5.1. New Dimension – End Item 13 3.2.5.2. New Dimension – Parent Model 14 3.2.6. Release 12.2 14 3.2.6.1. Plan-specific Forecasting Measures 14 3.2.6.2. Custom Series from Demantra DM and RT S&OP 14 3.2.6.3. Support for Custom Demantra Product Hierarchy 15 3.2.6.4. Integration with Distribution Planning 15 3.3. Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning 16 Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document ii
  • 3. 3.3.1. Release 12.1.1 16 3.3.1.1. Oracle Transportation Management Integration 16 3.3.1.2. Optimization Enhancements 16 3.3.1.3. Contiguous Processing 16 3.3.1.4. Minimum Remaining Shelf Life 17 3.3.1.5. Distribution Planning Scalability Enhancements 17 3.3.1.6. End Item Substitution Enhancements 17 3.3.1.7. Production Schedules as Inputs 18 3.3.1.8. Safety Lead Time 18 3.3.1.9. Customization of Horizontal Plan 18 3.3.1.10. Supply Tolerancing Enhancements 18 3.3.1.11. Buy Order Processing Lead Time Backward Compatibility 19 3.3.2. Release 12.1.2 19 3.3.2.1. Release Recommendations for Internal Requisitions 19 3.3.2.2. Turn Off Planned Order Creation 19 3.3.2.3. Consume Purchase Orders in First In, First Out Sequence 20 3.3.3. Release 12.1.3 20 3.3.3.1. Forecast Spreading Based on Shipping Calendar 20 3.3.3.1. Excluding Planned Orders from Supply Tolerancing 21 3.3.3.2. Maximize Use-Up of Substitute Components 22 3.3.3.3. Distribution Planning Enhanced Order Modifier Support 23 3.3.4. Release 12.1.3.2 23 3.3.4.1. Forecast Explosion Enhancements 23 3.3.5. Release 12.2 24 3.3.5.1. Supplier Capacity Consumption Enhancement 24 3.3.5.2. Enhanced Exception Management 25 3.4. Oracle Collaborative Planning 25 3.4.1. Release 12.1.1 25 3.4.1.1. Export Exception Details 25 3.4.1.2. Detailed Supply Commit Based on ASCP Pegging 25 3.4.1.3. Search Exceptions by Buyer and Planner 25 3.4.2. Release 12.1.2 26 3.4.2.1. Rich User Interface Enhancements 26 3.4.3. Release 12.1.3 26 3.4.4. Release 12.2 26 3.5. Oracle Demand Planning 26 3.5.1. Release 12.1.1 26 3.5.1.1. Clear Data in Worksheets 26 3.5.1.2. Default Even Allocation Over Time 26 3.5.1.3. Plan Security by Responsibility and Organization 26 3.5.1.4. Sort by Product in Planning Percentages Worksheet 27 3.5.1.5. Data Selection Tools for Region Copy Selector 27 3.5.1.6. Prevent Planners from Editing Measures in View Scope 27 3.5.2. Release 12.1.2 27 3.5.3. Release 12.1.3 27 3.5.4. Release 12.2 27 3.6. Oracle Demand Signal Repository 27 3.6.1. Product Overview 27 3.6.2. Release 12.1.1 28 3.6.2.1. Customer Organization Hierarchy 28 3.6.2.2. Multiple Calendar Support 28 3.6.2.3. Customer Item Hierarchy 28 3.6.2.4. Manufacturer Item Hierarchy 29 3.6.2.5. Multiple Currency Support 29 3.6.2.6. Alternate Units of Measure 29 3.6.2.7. Authorized Distribution 29 3.6.2.8. Sales Allocation 30 Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document iii
  • 4. 3.6.2.9. Sales Facts 30 3.6.2.10. Shipments 30 3.6.2.11. Orders 30 3.6.2.12. Inventory 30 3.6.2.13. Sales Forecasts 30 3.6.2.14. Promotion Plans 31 3.6.2.15. Category Sales Analysis Dashboard 31 3.6.2.16. Product to Category Coverage Reports 31 3.6.2.17. Category Growth Analysis Reports 31 3.6.2.18. Category Sales by Type Reports 32 3.6.2.19. Average Price Analysis Report 32 3.6.2.20. Top and Bottom Performers Reports 32 3.6.2.21. Ad-Hoc Reporting 32 3.6.2.22. Sales Scorecard 33 3.6.2.23. Supply Chain Scorecard 33 3.6.2.24. Operations Scorecard 33 3.6.2.25. Demantra Demand Management Integration 33 3.6.2.26. Retail Merchandising System (RMS) Integration 34 3.6.2.27. Web Services Integration 34 3.6.3. Release 12.1.2 34 3.6.3.1. Exception Management Dashboard 34 3.6.3.2. All Commodity Volume (ACV) / External Measures 35 3.6.3.3. TDLinx Store/Outlet Adapter 35 3.6.3.4. Scorecard Enhancements (Goals & Thresholds) 36 3.6.3.5. Store Clusters 37 3.6.3.6. Item Clusters 37 3.6.3.7. Replenishment Rules 38 3.6.3.8. Allocation Rules 39 3.6.4. Release 12.1.3 39 3.6.4.1. Manufacturer Promotions 39 3.6.4.2. Manufacturer Shipments 40 3.6.4.3. Customer Shipment Facts 40 3.6.4.4. Third Party Distributors 40 3.6.4.5. Alternate Organization Hierarchy 41 3.6.4.6. Forecast Type and Purpose Code 43 3.6.4.7. User Defined Fields 43 3.6.4.8. Type 2 Slowly Changing Dimensions 44 3.6.5. Release 12.2 44 3.7. Oracle Demantra – All Products 44 3.7.1. Release 12.2 44 3.7.1.1. Calendar Month Support in Weekly System 44 3.7.1.2. Import from Excel 45 3.7.1.3. Engine Performance Improvements 45 3.7.1.4. General Engine Enhancements 45 3.7.1.5. Analytical Engine on Solaris 10 45 3.7.1.6. Improved Multi-Language Support 45 3.7.1.7. Technology Stack 46 3.7.1.8. Demand Variability Definition 46 3.7.1.9. Configure Rolling Profile Groups 46 3.7.1.10. Integration Data Profile Hints 46 3.7.1.11. Database Performance Improvements 46 3.7.1.12. Asynchronous Workflow Support 47 3.8. Oracle Demantra Demand Management 47 3.8.1. Release 12.2 47 3.8.1.1. Enhanced Integration with Advanced Planning Command Center 47 3.9. Oracle Demantra Real-time Sales and Operations Planning 47 3.9.1. Release 12.2 47 Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document iv
  • 5. 3.9.1.1. Improved Cost Modeling 47 3.9.1.2. Enhanced Integration with Advanced Planning Command Center 48 3.10. Oracle Demantra Predictive Trade Planning 48 3.10.1. Release 12.2 48 3.10.1.1. Enabling ‘Dynamic Open Link’ capabilities and Demantra Anywhere 48 3.11. Oracle Demantra Trade Promotion Optimization 48 3.11.1. Release 12.2 48 3.11.1.1. Enabling Nodal Tuning 48 3.11.1.2. Enhancements to Optimization 49 3.12. Oracle Global Order Promising 49 3.12.1. Release 12.1.1 49 3.12.2. Release 12.1.2 49 3.12.3. Release 12.1.3 49 3.12.3.1. Enhanced Forward ATP 49 3.12.4. Release 12.2 50 3.13. Oracle Inventory Optimization 50 3.13.1. Release 12.1.1 50 3.13.1.1. Support for Intermittent Demands 50 3.13.2. Release 12.1.2 50 3.13.3. Release 12.1.3 50 3.13.3.1. Enhanced Budget Constraints 50 3.13.4. Release 12.2 50 3.14. Oracle Production Scheduling 51 3.14.1. Release 12.1.1 51 3.14.1.1. Units of Measure on Items 51 3.14.1.2. Enhanced Alerts 51 3.14.1.3. Work Order Centric KPI Comparisons 52 3.14.1.4. Access Operation and Routings from Operation Instances 53 3.14.1.5. Auto-create Work Orders Directly from Demands 53 3.14.1.6. Find Functionality for Model Objects 54 3.14.1.7. Visibility to Demand Fulfilled via Starting Inventory 55 3.14.1.8. Automatic Reconciliation of Schedule Backlog 55 3.14.1.9. Batchable Resources 56 3.14.1.10. Consistent Resource Assignment within a Portion of a Routing 57 3.14.1.11. Resource-specific Cycle Times for Campaign Run Optimization 59 3.14.1.12. Minimize Work Order Schedule Infeasibilities 60 3.14.1.13. Disable Units of Effort for Setup and Cleanup Operations 61 3.14.1.14. Resource “All of” Sets 62 3.14.1.15. Hard Links Between Work Orders 65 3.14.1.16. Dynamic Throughput Rates on Resources 67 3.14.1.17. PS Data Connector Port to Sun, HP and AIX 69 3.14.1.18. Export Selected Model Data During Schedule Publish 69 3.14.1.19. PS XML Model – Unique Extension 70 3.14.1.20. Enhanced Auto-generated Routings 70 3.14.1.21. Selective Work Order Release to Production 71 3.14.2. Release 12.1.2 72 3.14.2.1. Resource Business Objectives 72 3.14.2.2. Production Scheduling as a Web Service Call 73 3.14.2.3. Undo Functionality for Manual Scheduling 73 3.14.2.4. Attribute Based Sequence Dependent Setups 75 3.14.2.5. Visualization of Campaign Run Optimization Cycle Boundaries 76 3.14.2.6. New Alert Type and Drilldowns 77 3.14.2.7. Drilldowns from the Work Order Editor to the Gantt Charts 78 3.14.2.8. Mass Change on Items and Resources 79 3.14.3. Release 12.1.3 80 3.14.3.1. Maintenance Work Order Scheduling 80 Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document v
  • 6. 3.14.3.2. Disable Multiple Release from the Same Plan for the Same Order 84 3.14.3.3. User Defined Ideal Sequence 86 3.14.3.4. Supply Tolerancing 88 3.14.3.5. Control Application of Purchase Item Order Multiples Beyond Lead Time 89 3.14.3.6. Improved Operation Status Logic in OPM integration 91 3.14.3.7. Advanced Work Order Filtering 91 3.14.4. Release 12.2 93 3.15. Oracle Rapid Planning 93 3.15.1. Product Overview 93 3.15.2. Release 12.1.3 94 3.15.2.1. Fast Simulation 94 3.15.2.2. Flexible User Interface 94 3.15.2.3. Simulation Sets 94 3.15.2.4. Mass Edits 95 3.15.2.5. Plan Comparisons 95 3.15.2.6. Aggregate, Editable Material Horizontal View 95 3.15.2.7. All-in-one Supply/Demand View 96 3.15.2.8. Integration with Advanced Planning Command Center 96 3.15.2.9. Unconstrained Planning 96 3.15.2.10. Constrained Planning 96 3.15.2.11. Demand Forecasts 97 3.15.2.12. Respect Demand Priority Rules 97 3.15.2.13. Demand and Supply Pegging 97 3.15.2.14. Supply Chain Sourcing 97 3.15.2.15. Supplier Capacity 98 3.15.2.16. Bills of Material and BOM Effectivity 98 3.15.2.17. By-products and Co-products 98 3.15.2.18. Routing Operation and Resource Scheduling 98 3.15.2.19. End Item Substitution 99 3.15.2.20. Lead Times and Planning Time Fence 99 3.15.2.21. Order Modifiers 99 3.15.2.22. Safety Stock Lead Time 100 3.15.2.23. Shipping, Receiving and Carrier Calendars 100 3.15.2.24. Planner Action: Firm Existing Supplies 100 3.15.2.25. Planner Action: Firm Planned Supplies 100 3.15.2.26. Release New Planned Orders and Reschedule Recommendations 100 3.15.2.27. Exceptions 101 3.15.2.28. Embedded Analytics 102 3.15.2.29. Late Demand Diagnosis 102 3.15.2.30. Global Forecasting 103 3.15.2.31. Configure to Order 103 3.15.2.32. Default Order Sizing 104 3.15.2.33. Inventory Reservations 105 3.15.2.34. Clear to Build 105 3.15.2.35. Rapid Planning – Sales and Operations Planning Integration 105 3.15.2.36. Rapid Planning – Global Order Promising Integration 106 3.15.2.37. Order Comparison 106 3.15.2.38. Multi-Planner Collaboration 106 3.15.2.39. Functional and Data Security 106 3.15.3. Release 12.1.3.3 107 3.15.3.1. Demand Pull-In and Upside Processing 107 3.15.3.2. Favorite Lists 108 3.15.3.3. Safety Stock Enhancements 109 3.15.3.4. Simulation Edits of Additional Item Attributes 110 3.15.3.5. Simulation Edits of Approved Supplier Lists and Supplier Capacity 110 3.15.3.6. Simulation Edits of Processes 111 3.15.3.7. Mass Update Enhancements for Resource Availability 111 3.15.3.8. Mass Update Enhancements for Firm Date on Demands and Supplies 111 3.15.3.9. Scheduling Rapid Planning Runs in Batch Mode 112 Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document vi
  • 7. 3.15.3.10. Enhanced Search Capability 112 3.15.3.11. Material Plan Display Order 112 3.15.3.12. Display of Decimal Precision 112 3.15.3.13. Last Saved Information for Plan Options 113 3.15.3.14. Blow Through Phantom Items in Clear to Build 113 3.15.3.15. Global Forecasting Display in the Material Plan 113 3.15.3.16. Auto-release of Planning Recommendations 113 3.15.3.17. Natural Time Fence 114 3.15.4. Release 12.2 114 3.16. Oracle Service Parts Planning 114 3.16.1. Product Overview 114 3.16.2. Release 12.1.1 114 3.16.2.1. Integrated Demand and Supply Planning 114 3.16.2.2. Service Parts Planning Workbench 114 3.16.2.3. Integration to Spares Management for External Repairs 115 3.16.2.4. Integration to Depot Repair for Internal Repairs 115 3.16.2.5. Support for Part Condition 115 3.16.2.6. Criticality Matrix 115 3.16.2.7. Support for Supersessions 116 3.16.2.8. Returns Forecasts 116 3.16.2.9. Minimize New Buys 116 3.16.2.10. Life Time Buys 116 3.16.2.11. Planner Work Lists 116 3.16.2.12. Integration with Collaborative Planning 116 3.16.2.13. Supersession Chain-Specific Replanning 116 3.16.2.14. Execution Net Change Planning 117 3.16.3. Release 12.1.2 117 3.16.3.1. Multi-process Inline Forecasting 117 3.16.3.2. Intermittent Demand Flag 117 3.16.3.3. Planner Worklist Enhancement 118 3.16.4. Release 12.1.3 118 3.16.4.1. Re-order Point-based Parts Planning 118 3.16.4.2. Import into a Simulation Set 119 3.16.4.3. Integration with Advanced Supply Chain Planning 119 3.16.4.4. Integration with APCC - Service Parts Planner Dashboard 119 3.16.5. Release 12.1.3.2 120 3.16.5.1. Fair Share 120 3.16.5.2. Query-based Auto-release 121 3.16.5.3. Collect Installed Base under Contract 121 3.16.5.4. Collect Field Replaceable Unit Bills of Material 121 3.16.5.5. Supersession Notes 122 3.16.6. Release 12.2 122 3.16.6.1. Support Multiple Move-in / Move-out Lines for a Repair Order 122 3.17. Oracle Strategic Network Optimization 122 3.17.1. Release 12.1.1 122 3.17.1.1. Supply Chain Risk Management 122 3.17.1.2. Alerts 123 3.17.1.3. Key Performance Indicators 125 3.17.1.4. Usability Enhancements 128 3.17.2. Release 12.1.2 129 3.17.2.1. Aggregate Assignment Set and Lane Definition 129 3.17.3. Release 12.1.3 130 3.17.4. Release 12.2 130 3.17.4.1. Specify Scenario File in the Plan Options 130 3.17.4.2. Solver Upgrade 131 Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document vii
  • 8. 1. Disclaimer This Release Content Document (RCD) describes product features that are proposed for the specified release of the Oracle E-Business Suite. This document describes new or changed functionality only. Existing functionality from prior releases is not described. It is intended solely to help you assess the business benefits of upgrading to the specified release of the Oracle E-Business Suite. This document in any form, software or printed matter, contains proprietary information that is the exclusive property of Oracle. Your access to and use of this confidential material is subject to the terms and conditions of your Oracle Software License and Service Agreement, which has been executed and with which you agree to comply. This document and information contained herein may not be disclosed, copied, reproduced or distributed to anyone outside Oracle without prior written consent of Oracle. This document is not part of your license agreement nor can it be incorporated into any contractual agreement with Oracle or its subsidiaries or affiliates. This document is for informational purposes only and is intended solely to assist you in planning for the implementation and upgrade of the product features described. It is not a commitment to deliver any material, code, or functionality, and should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions. The development, release, and timing of any features or functionality described in this document remains at the sole discretion of Oracle. Due to the nature of the product architecture, it may not be possible to safely include all features described in this document without risking significant destabilization of the code. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Purpose of Document 1
  • 9. 2. Introduction 2.1. Purpose of Document This Release Content Document (RCD) communicates information about new or changed functionality introduced in Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2, and in subsequent Release Update Packs (RUPs) and off-cycle patches. For your convenience, it also includes new or changed functionality introduced in the RUPs for Release 12, including 12.0.2 through 12.0.7. The features and enhancements described in this document are grouped by product, and then by the release in which they first became available, for example, “Release 12.1.1”. Features released in an off-cycle patch have a special designation – for example, a feature released after 12.1.1, but before 12.1.2, is designated as “Release 12.1.1+”. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Purpose of Document 2
  • 10. 3. New and Changed Features in Value Chain Planning 3.1. Collections 3.1.1. Release 12.1.1 3.1.1.1. Backward Compatibility to 11i10 Oracle Advanced Planning Release 12.1.1 supports, through a Collections backward compatibility patch, the configuration where the source is E-Business Suite 11i10, and the destination (planning server) is Release 12.1.1. This backward compatibility applies to Advanced Supply Chain Planning, Distribution Planning (see exclusion below), Real- Time Sales and Operations Planning, Demand Management, Demand Planning, Inventory Optimization, Global Order Promising, Collaborative Planning, Advanced Planning Command Center, and Service Parts Planning. Specific capabilities not supported in this configuration are: • Advanced Supply Chain Planning − Oracle Transportation Management Integration • Distribution Planning − release of cancel requisition recommendations • Service Parts Planning − integration to Spares Management • Service Parts Planning − integration to Depot Repair 3.2. Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center 3.2.1. Product Overview Most supply chain planning processes, considered in their entirety, consist of multiple decision-making sub-processes often performed by different groups that are chained together. For example, a typical sales and operations planning cycle consists of forecasting performed by different lines of business such as sales, marketing, finance and manufacturing and distribution, a consensus demand review, inventory planning and review, supply planning and review, and executive review. These sub-processes may be supported by different underlying supply chain planning applications (Demand Management, Inventory Optimization, Strategic Network Optimization, Service Parts Planning and Advanced Supply Chain Planning.) The overall planning processes are difficult to orchestrate because the planning data required are buried in multiple underlying supply chain planning applications and because the human stakeholders come from multiple organizations. Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center is a new product that pulls together planning outputs from multiple E-Business Suite supply chain planning applications and makes them available for reporting and analysis within a unified user interface based on Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition (OBIEE). The planning outputs are viewable via seeded role-based dashboards, and are also accessible to custom OBIEE reports and dashboards constructed by the user. Seeded dashboards support the Sales and Operations Planning and Supply Chain Plan Analysis business processes. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Collections 3
  • 11. Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center offers an extensive list of web services that decompose Oracle Advanced Planning capabilities into atomic functional pieces (for example, run collections, generate a statistical forecast, run a supply chain plan, archive a plan.) These web services are leveraged by seeded Oracle Business Process Execution Language (BPEL) processes that can be used out of the box to automate Sales and Operations Planning and Forecast, Inventory and Supply Planning business flows. Users can also create an infinite variety of custom BPEL processes to automate and orchestrate their specific in-house planning flows (for example, hub and spoke planning). Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center provides extensive plan and scenario comparison capabilities. It also allows you to assign manual activities required for the evaluation and execution of alternative business scenarios and monitor and orchestrate the completion of those activities. Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center provides: • a robust reporting and analysis framework for supply chain planning; • the ability to automate, orchestrate, monitor and review the result of complex, inter-organizational and inter-disciplinary planning processes that span multiple supply chain planning applications (including external applications). 3.2.2. Release 12.1.1 3.2.2.1. Sales and Operations Planning Dashboard The Sales and Operations Planning Dashboard included with Advanced Planning Command Center provides all participants in the Sales and Operations Planning process with interactive access to summary and detailed data required when executing the demand review, supply review and executive review phases of an S&OP cycle. The Demand Review page answers questions such as: • How have my sales, marketing, manufacturing/distribution, financial, and consensus forecasts changed over time? • Is our backlog increasing? • How are we tracking to forecast? The Supply Review page answers questions such as: • Are we supply constrained? • Where are our resource constraints? • Are we producing to plan? The Executive Review page answers questions such as: • Are we on plan financially? • For which product categories are we revenue targets? Dashboard level reports provide easy comparison of S&OP scenarios. Reports in the Sales and Operations Planning Dashboard drill directly into underlying Demantra Real-Time Sales and Operations Planning worksheets, Advanced Supply Chain Planning (ASCP) plans and Strategic Network Optimization (SNO) plans for seamless extended analysis. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center 4
  • 12. The following reports are available at the page level in the Sales and Operations Planning Dashboard: Executive Review • Executive Summary • Consolidated Analysis • Profit and Loss • Constrained Forecast Comparison • Cumulative Budget Tracking • Key Performance Indicators • Forecast Accuracy • Customer Service • Inventory and Production KPI • Top Difference - Operating Plan and Budget by Category • Profitability KPI • Cost Breakdown KPI Demand Review • Forecast Comparison • Forecast Accuracy • Projected Backlog • Top Forecast Attainment by Category • Forecast – Scenario Comparison • Top Abs Diff – Consensus Forecast and Budget by Category • Consensus Forecast Difference by Customer • Consensus Forecast Difference by Customer Supply Review • Consolidated Analysis • Demand Fill • Production to Plan by Organization • Production Plan • Top Resource Utilization • Top Supplier Capacity Utilization • Consolidated Analysis – Scenario Comparison • Bottom Demand Fill % by Customer • Supply Change by Category • Production Plan Comparison by Organization 3.2.2.2. Supply Chain Analyst Dashboard The Supply Chain Analyst (SCA) Dashboard included with Advanced Planning Command Center provides easy access to summary and trend data for Advanced Supply Chain Planning and Strategic Network Optimization plans. It enables easy comparisons between plans. The SCA Dashboard has the following pages and reports: Plan Health • shipment and production trends • demand and supply summary • resource summary Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center 5
  • 13. exceptions summary Demand and Supply • demand and supply summary • demand change by customer • supply change by category • demand and supply trends • demand by customer • supply by category Resources • resource summary • most utilized resources • least utilized resources • resources with most change in utilization • resource utilization trend Exceptions • demand exceptions summary • inventory exceptions summary • alternate exceptions summary • reschedule exceptions summary • resource exceptions summary • exceptions summary by category • exceptions summary by organization Historical Performance • key supply chain performance metrics (shipments to plan, production to plan, resource utilization, inventory value, days of cover) • supply chain metrics trend Scenario Analysis • This page is similar to the Plan Health page. It allows you to compare demand and supply summary information, resource information, and exceptions across scenarios instead of across plans. (A scenario is a grouping of plans whose results should be added together and viewed as a whole.) 3.2.2.3. Analytical Framework APCC provides a central Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition (OBIEE)-based repository that automatically pulls plan data from a wide cross-section of Advanced Planning applications (Demand Management, Real-Time Sales and Operations Planning, Advanced Supply Chain Planning, Inventory Optimization and Strategic Network Optimization), as well as execution data (orders, shipments, inventory, WIP completions, etc.) from Oracle E-Business Suite. APCC contains more than 200 measures (both stored measures that are read into APCC and measures such as costed inventory that are derived), rationalized against a consistent set of dimensions. More than 20 dimensions are seeded. The APCC analytical framework repository allows completely user-configurable reporting against Advanced Planning data, serves as the foundation for the seeded Sales and Operations Planning and Supply Chain Analyst Dashboards, and allows you to view Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center 6
  • 14. data from multiple underlying Advanced Planning applications simultaneously in a unified interface. 3.2.2.4. Scenario Management You can group multiple plans of different types together into a scenario, and then use that scenario to group and filter data in APCC dashboards and reports. Typical scenarios might be: a Demantra Demand Management consensus forecast, an Inventory Optimization plan, and an Advanced Supply Chain Planning plan that together evaluate a sales and operations planning scenario; or one "hub" and a number of "spoke" ASCP plans whose outputs need to be fused together to provide visibility to planning results for the entire supply chain. Scenario Sets are groupings of related scenarios (for example, alternate supply/demand scenarios being evaluated within a particular sales and operations planning cycle). You can also use scenario sets to group and filter data in APCC dashboards and reports. 3.2.2.5. Supply Chain Planning Web Services Many key Advanced Planning functions have now been made accessible via web services. These web services are callable from user-defined Business Process Execution Language (BPEL) flows, and therefore permit limitless automation of supply chain planning business flows. The specific web services that have been enabled are: • Check concurrent program status • Launch ASCP and Demantra batch collections • Global Order Promising • Launch plan management batch processes such as copy/purge plans • Launch Strategic Network Optimization batch processes • Manage planning process scenarios • Launch Service Parts Planning batch processes • Launch Inventory Optimization batch processes • Launch Distribution Planning batch processes • Launch Advanced Supply Chain Planning batch processes • Upload external data into APS (forecasts, safety stock, planned supply) • Launch Demantra process (launch Demantra workflow, assign alternative name to Demantra scenario in planning server) 3.2.2.6. Seeded BPEL Processes Two seeded BPEL processes take leverage the supply chain planning web services offered by APCC to automate and orchestrate key supply chain planning flows. The Forecast, Inventory, and Supply Planning BPEL process automates a sequence of running collections, generating a forecast in Demantra Demand Management (DM), running an Inventory Optimization (IO) plan utilizing the DM output as input, running an Advanced Supply Chain Planning plan using the DM and IO plan outputs as input. The Sales and Operations Planning BPEL process runs collections, creates financial forecast review, sales forecast review, marketing forecast review, and demand forecast review activities and assigns them to key stakeholders, uploads the consensus forecast from Demantra Real-Time Sales & Operations Planning (RT S&OP) to the planning Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center 7
  • 15. server, runs a Strategic Network Optimization (SNO) plan with the RT S&OP consensus forecast as input, pulls the SNO constrained forecast/production plan output back into RT S&OP, then creates consensus demand review and executive review activities and assigns them to the appropriate stakeholders. 3.2.2.7. Process Automation You can create planning processes and attach to them seeded or custom BPEL processes. Planning processes allow you to launch or halt associated BPEL processes, to enable completely flexible planning automation. The Planning Process user interface allows you to specify input parameters such as plan names to the underlying BPEL processes, see the key steps of the underlying BPEL process, assign process steps to owners, and monitor the progress of the BPEL process as it runs. 3.2.2.8. Activity Management Process automation steps can be assigned to individuals using the Planning Process user interface. Such assignments become system activities with owning individuals. You can also assign arbitrary manual activities to individuals, optionally tied to a scenario or scenario set. Activities support file attachments, to allow more complete descriptions of required steps or inclusion of supplemental information. Assigned activities can be updated with progress status by the assignees and can be flexibly queried within the APCC Activities screen for monitoring purposes. Planners working with APCC dashboards and reports benefit from an iBot that informs them of open activities assigned to them. They can drill from a display of activities in the APCC reporting layer directly into the APCC Activities screen for further detail. APCC thus provides a comprehensive way to stay on top of all the system and manual activities needed to complete complex supply chain planning processes and scenario evaluations. 3.2.3. Release 12.1.2 3.2.3.1. Compatibility with 11.5.10 Planning Server Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center Release 12.1.2 supports, through a Collections backward compatibility patch, the configuration where the Planning Server (where all the other APS modules are on) is 11.5.10, the source Oracle eBusiness Suite is also on 11.5.10 and only the Advanced Planning Command Center is on 12.1.2.) The deployment configuration is as shown below. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center 8
  • 16. APS Operational Data Store 11.5.10 APS 11.5.10 Oracle Demantra 7.1/7.2 Advanced Supply Chain Planning 11.5.10 Out-of-box Integration. Multiple EBS (11.5.10) Multiple EBS (11.5.10) Collect into both User Option or Legacy instances instances at Plan or Legacy instances launch to “push” APS 12.1 APS Operational Data Store 12.1 Advanced Planning Command Center 12.1 This deployment configuration will be subject to the following specific limitations. 1. No Contextual Drilldowns from the Dashboards into the planning applications. This will be available only in the configuration where the planning server is upgraded to 12.1.2 and APCC is deployed in the same instance. 2. Need to collect into both APCC and APS instances. However, collections into APCC is only required for dimension keys. So the collection frequency could be less for APCC. 3. No support for Strategic Network Optimization in APCC. 4. The New Planning Web Services and BPEL Processes in APCC instance (in “Processes” tab in Advanced Planning Scenario Manager) cannot use Plans and Forecasts from APS 11.5.10 even if they are published to APCC. But users can still build scenarios from these plans and forecasts from 11.5.10. 3.2.3.2. Integration to Third Party Planning Systems You can now deploy APCC against third party planning systems. The APCC OBIEE fact repository can be loaded either via a new flat file (.csv) upload user interface, or via a new Import Plan Summary concurrent program. 3.2.3.3. Ability to Run APCC Standalone For 11.5.10 and R12.1.2 customers, APCC now provides a complete, out-of-box integration to a separate, standalone 12.1.2 APCC instance. The key assumptions/limitations here are: 1. All dimensions are collected (or loaded using legacy uploads) into the APCC instance. 2. The EBS source instance setups (including instance codes) are identical in the 11.5.10 and 12.1.2 instances. 3. The drill-downs into other applications (Advanced Supply Chain Planning / Inventory Optimization / Demand Management) will not work. 4. This will be made available only for Demand Management, Advanced Supply Chain Planning and Inventory Optimization. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center 9
  • 17. 3.2.3.4. Rich User Interface Enhancements APCC incorporates new rich user interface capabilities of E-Business Suite 12.1.2. These include a redesigned applications home page with more efficient navigation, multi-level navigation menus with saved favorites, "look-ahead" lists of values that automatically complete partial user entries, and inline file attachments for process activities. 3.2.4. Release 12.1.3 3.2.4.1. Analysis of Inventory and Service Levels The current Supply Chain Analyst (SCA) dashboard in APCC has been enhanced with new measures and related reports to support Inventory Analysis workflows. The following new reports are included in a new tab in the SCA dashboard. o Inventory Performance Summary o Top N – Service Level Short Fall by Category o Top N - Inventory Value o Safety Stock – Postponement Analysis o Inventory Measures Trend o Inventory Measures Trend by Category-Organization Some of the new measures introduced as part of this include the following: o Safety Stock (Days) o Percent Safety Stock - Demand Variability o Percent Safety Stock - Supplier Lead Time Variability o Percent Safety Stock - Manufacturing Lead Time Variability o Percent Safety Stock - Transportation Lead Time Variability 3.2.4.2. Analysis of Excess and Obsolescence The current Supply Chain Analyst (SCA) dashboard in APCC has been enhanced with new measures and related reports to support analysis of Excess and Obselete inventory. The following new reports are included in the SCA dashboard. o Excess and Obsolescence Summary o Excess Details o Obsolescence Details o Excess Details across Plans o Obsolescence Details across Plans Some of the new measures introduced as part of this include the following: o Demand within Obsolescence horizon o Demand within Excess Horizon o Excess On-order in units and value in multiple currencies o Excess On-hand in units and value in multiple currencies o Obsolete On-order in units and value in multiple currencies o Obsolete On-hand in units and value in multiple currencies o Total Excess in units and value in multiple currencies o Total Obsolescence in units and value in multiple currencies 3.2.4.3. Enhanced Sales and Operations Planning Dashboard The Sales and Operations Planning (S&OP) dashboard is enhanced to include the following new measures: o Shipment history - Lag by 52 week Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center 10
  • 18. o Operating Plan o Financial Forecast In addition, the existing reports have been updated with new usability enhancements and new navigations to more drill-down reports. Also, a new tab called Financial Review has been added with the following reports o Financial Summary o Operating Plan and Financial Forecast Comparison o Top % Difference - Operating Plan and Budget by Category o Financial Trend Analysis o Profit & Loss Monthly o Margin Difference by Category o Year-over-Year Financials o Financial Forecast and Budget Comparison o Top % Difference - Budget and Annual Plan by Organization o Top Revenue o Cost by Organization o Bottom Margin o Profitability KPI o Cost Breakdown KPI This new Financial Review page enables planners and executives to answer questions like: o Are we on plan financially? o How are product categories performing financially? o What has changed financially since last fiscal quarter/month? o How/Where/Why has profitability changed? o Is there any need to revise financial forecast? 3.2.4.4. Supply Chain Risk Management Dashboard The Supply Chain Risk Management (SCRM) dashboard is a new dashboard and enables users to review and compare key metrics in a single interface, providing true Enterprise Planning capabilities to the SCRM discipline. It enables executives and planners to answer questions like: o What is the impact to my margins if there is a sudden drop in demand? o When do I return to profitability? o What is the cost difference between sourcing strategies in the event of the demand drop? o What impact does increased lead times have on my inventory strategy? o What is the impact of off-shoring to my Total Delivered Cost? o What is the impact of off-shoring to my Margins? The following new measures are introduced as part of this feature: o Facility Startup/Shutdown Costs o Fixed Costs o Count of Sources o Carrying Cost without Postponement o Safety Stock without Postponement o Inventory Budget o Product Miles The dashboard contains four different tabs - Executive Review, Inventory Analysis, Supply Chain Sourcing and Glossary. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center 11
  • 19. 3.2.4.5. Revenue Gap Analysis This feature enables Supply Chain Analysts and Sales and Operations Planners to do additional reporting and analysis to close gaps between the current shipment rate and the revenue targets established as part of the sales and operations plan. This is most critical as the end of a period or quarter approaches and gaps remain. The Supply Chain Analyst (SCA) dashboard has been enhanced to add the following reports in the Scenario analysis tab: o Backlog Analysis – Units & Value o Bookings Performance – Units & Value o Current Shipment Plan o Demand and Supply Summary o Demand Utilization – Units & Value o Demand Utilization Split – Baseline Plan o Left to Book - By Quarter o Sales Order Analysis – Units & Value o Shipment Performance – Units & Value o Supply Utilization – Units & Value The Sales and Operations Planning (S&OP) dashboard has also been enhanced to add / modify the following reports: o Current Shipment Plan o Supply Summary 3.2.4.6. Collaboration Workspaces for Unstructured Collaboration This feature lets users to quickly band into ad-hoc, virtual groups for specific planning tasks and allows those groups to share structured and unstructured content. Each group has access to a single, flexible portal-like user interface that brings together components of various planning applications and the a variety of collaboration tools. These collaborative group spaces support customized Worklists, Group Calendars, Documents, Discussions, Tags, Issues and Notes. In addition, the group space home page has navigation links to applications such as Rapid Planning and Sales and Operations Planning, and to APCC dashboards. Each group space is linked to a Scenario created in Advanced Planning Command Center and users can choose to auto-create a group space when a scenario is created. 3.2.4.7. Enhanced Exceptions Analysis The Supply Chain Analyst Dashboard has been enhanced to include additional measures and reports in support of improved exception analysis. Two new reports have been added as part of this feature: o Item Exceptions Summary o Resource Exceptions Summary In addition to the above, the following reports have been enhanced with additional page/report filters: o Demand Exceptions Summary o Inventory Exceptions Summary o Alternate Exceptions Summary o Resource Exceptions Summary Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center 12
  • 20. o Reschedules Exceptions Summary o Exception Summary by Category o Exception Summary by Organization 3.2.4.8. Integration with Rapid Planning Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center now offers pre-built integration with Rapid Planning. Rapid Planning plans can be archived and published to Advanced Planning Command Center. These archived versions can then be viewed in all related reports and dashboards. The Advanced Planning Command Center’s Supply Chain Analyst dashboard supports drill-down directly into the Rapid Planning application. All Rapid Planning simulation plans can be used in the Process Automation functionality to build process flows in Advanced Planning Command Center. 3.2.4.9. Plan Versus Collected Data Comparison Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center now offers a view of key supply and demand measures based on the latest transaction data collected into the Operational Data Store. These measures are available in the Supply Chain Analyst Dashboard under the plan name of "Collections". Users can compare them with Plans to get insights into the variances between what is in a Plan (including changes introduced due to plan recommendations and user changes) and the latest real-time transactional data. An example of this type of analysis may include a comparison of expected receipts of material in the next few weeks based on the Plan versus what is currently in the execution system (as brought over to Value Chain Planning via Collections). 3.2.5. Release 12.1.3.2 3.2.5.1. New Dimension – End Item This is a new one-level dimension that enables users to build reports for analysis by the Finished Good items as derived from the pegging generated in an ASCP plan. This feature is available for ASCP plans only, and is enabled for the following two measures only: • Order Quantity • Total Supply Using the Order Quantity measure and the Order Type filter, users can analyze all upstream component supplies (such as On Hand, Shipment Receipts, Purchase Orders, and Planned Orders) and see the breakdown by End Items (Finished Goods) that are driving the component demand. This dimension is available in the seeded Advanced Planning Catalog. There are no new seeded reports that use this new dimension. Note: This dimension is enabled only when the profile option "MSC: Enable Model and End Item Dimensions in APCC" is set to Yes. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center 13
  • 21. 3.2.5.2. New Dimension – Parent Model This is a new one-level dimension that enables users to build reports for analysis of Options in ATO models by the Parent Model based on forecast explosion in an ASCP Plan. This feature is available in ASCP plans only, and is enabled for the following two measures only: • Order Quantity • Total Supply Using the Order Quantity measure and the Order Type filter, users can analyze all option supplies (such as On Hand, Shipment Receipts, Purchase Orders, and Planned Orders) and see the breakdown by Parent ATO Models that are driving this option demand. This dimension is available in the seeded Advanced Planning Catalog. There are no new seeded reports that use this new dimension. In the case where the Options are manufactured assemblies, even their components will have the break-up by the Parent Model so that end users can analyze all upstream components and understand the source of their demand by viewing the break-up by the Parent Model. Note: This dimension is enabled only for those options and key components that are assigned to a special category set. The name of the category set is based on the profile option "MSC: APCC Key Component Category Set." Note: This dimension is enabled only when the profile option "MSC: Enable Model & End Item dimensions in APCC" is set to Yes. 3.2.6. Release 12.2 3.2.6.1. Plan-specific Forecasting Measures This feature enables all forecasting measures (not just Consensus Forecast) from Demantra Demand Management and Demantra Real-time Sales and Operations Planning to be analyzed in Advanced Planning Command Center, striped by “Demand Plan”. Users can analyze, compare or finally purge these plans like any other supply plan. This enhances the analysis that users can do in APCC, as it is now possible to easily compare sales forecast, projected backlog, and financial forecast measures across scenarios. You can provide a plan name as a parameter in the new Demantra workflow processes called “Publish S&OP-APCC Measures” (for RT S&OP) and “Publish DM-APCC Measures” (for DM). These serve the same purpose as the current workflow “Export OBI-EE Data” and the concurrent program “Assign Plan Name.” 3.2.6.2. Custom Series from Demantra DM and RT S&OP You can configure the integration data profiles in Demantra to publish custom series created in either DM or RT S&OP to APCC. By default, this feature collects any 15 measures (10 forecasting measures and 5 historical measures) that you choose. You can alter the mix or add more measures by running a new concurrent program, “Collect Demantra customization information to APCC”. The selected series must not have any complex calculations or client expressions in Demantra. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center 14
  • 22. 3.2.6.3. Support for Custom Demantra Product Hierarchy You can now bring an additional product hierarchy from Demantra into APCC. For example, the product category hierarchy available in APCC as default is a two-level hierarchy. You can now create a new four-level hierarchy such as “Item < Product SubGroup < Product Group < Product Line” in Demantra and easily bring it into APCC for use in analysis. This is limited to one custom product hierarchy and supports a maximum of 10 levels. You must set the profile “MSC: Additional Demantra Item Hierarchy in APCC” to the name of the hierarchy in Demantra and then run the standard “Refresh APCC Materialized Views” concurrent program to make that custom hierarchy available in APCC. None of the seeded reports or dashboards use this custom hierarchy. 3.2.6.4. Integration with Distribution Planning In Release 12.2, DRP plans can be published to Advanced Planning Command Center. This will enable DRP users to leverage APCC to analyze DRP plans through custom reports and dashboards. The concurrent program “Archive Plan Summary” will now support DRP plan types. There is no automatic publish of DRP plans to APCC at the time of DRP plan launch. Only the following DRP plan measures will be published to APCC: • Order Quantity (all DRP order types) • Exception Count (all DRP exception types) • Exception Quantity/Value (reporting/functional currencies) • Inventory Turns • Scheduled Receipts • On Hand • Carrying Cost (reporting/functional currencies) • Purchasing Cost (reporting/functional currencies) • Total Supply Chain Cost (reporting/functional currencies) • Revenues (reporting/functional currencies) • Gross Margin (reporting/functional currencies) • Gross Margin % • Total Supply • Total Demand • Projected Available Balance (units, value and days of supply) • Fill Rate The following measures are specific to DRP plans and will also be published to APCC: • Maximum Inventory Level (Units) • Maximum Inventory Level (Days of Supply) • Target Inventory Level (Units) • Target Inventory Level (Days of Supply) The seeded reports and dashboards in APCC are not designed for DRP plans or scenarios with DRP plans. You should build custom reports or dashboards for analyzing DRP plans. You can also use the spreadsheet file upload capabilities to load DRP plan data into APCC. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center 15
  • 23. 3.3. Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning 3.3.1. Release 12.1.1 3.3.1.1. Oracle Transportation Management Integration Most planning systems have no visibility to delays in transportation and their impact to manufacturing utilization or customer service. With this release ASCP will: • Leverage Oracle Transportation Management (OTM) Supply Chain Event Management to obtain real-time, projected material arrival dates • Provide a Business Process Execution Language (BPEL) process and associated web services to consume events and generate planning exceptions to provide planners real time visibility to transportation delays • Use the updated dates in ASCP interactive planning calculations to calculate the impact of transportation delays on downstream orders and take corrective action 3.3.1.2. Optimization Enhancements Oracle ASCP enables planners to efficiently manage many products and supply chain locations by intelligently selecting alternate sources, manufacturing processes, bills of material, and substitute items. With this release, ASCP's automated decision-making capabilities have been enhanced in the following ways. 3.3.1.2.1. Day-Level Planning A new "day-level" planning mode allows ASCP to automate the selection of alternates while generating planning results at the day level of granularity. This planning mode skips the final detailed scheduling solution phase that is now undertaken with any constrained or optimized plan run. For customers for whom day-level planning results are sufficiently detailed, this is a way to run plans in a shorter amount of time than was previously possible (due to the fact that the final detailed scheduling phase is skipped). 3.3.1.2.2. More Accurate Offloading to Alternates It is often desired to offload to alternate sources or processes only once a primary source or process runs out of capacity. ASCP now does a more accurate job of offloading: it offloads primary sources and processes more fully before offloading to alternates, and planning results show fewer instances of primary source/process overloading before offloading to alternates. 3.3.1.3. Contiguous Processing In the process industries, many products need to be processed contiguously from raw materials to finished goods, because intermediate products may be unstable or because intermediate products are transported from process to process without any provision for storage in between. With this release, ASCP respects Oracle Process Manufacturing standard and max delays between routings. This allows you to cap the maximum time duration between upstream Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning 16
  • 24. and downstream make supplies and enforce contiguous processing. You can also enforce a minimum (standard) delay between make supplies in order to accurately reflect processing constraints such as cool-down periods. 3.3.1.4. Minimum Remaining Shelf Life Products such as groceries and pharmaceuticals have limited shelf lives. Customers of such products typically impose rules that dictate that when such products arrive at the customer site, they must have a certain minimum duration of remaining shelf life, so that there will be enough time for the end consumer to buy and use the products. ASCP now supports minimum remaining shelf life (MRSL) constraints specified at the item- organization, item-customer site and sales order levels. Item-organization and item- customer site-level MRSLs are specified via item attribute simulation sets. Sales order- level MRSLs can only be entered via customization that populates a new column in the MSC_SALES_ORDERS table on the planning server. 3.3.1.5. Distribution Planning Scalability Enhancements Distribution enterprises often need to manage large numbers of locations and items: the number of locations may be in the thousands; the number of items at each location may be in the tens of thousands or more. Planning in such an environment requires a focus on scalability. With this release, Distribution Planning incorporates the following scalability enhancements. First, the phase of planning that calculates the independent and dependent demands at each distribution location and allocates scarce supply to those demands has been made multi-process, in order to take advantage of the parallelization capabilities of multi-processor hardware configurations. Such a configuration can either be a single planning server with multiple processors, or multiple servers logically linked together via Real Application Clusters. The partitioning of the distribution planning problem into pieces that can be solved in parallel is done automatically. In conjunction with the above change, the load consolidation phase of Distribution Planning has been decoupled from the demand push-down and supply allocation phase mentioned above and is now also done concurrently in a multi-process fashion. Functionally, this may reduce how well Distribution Planning is able to consolidate loads relative to its base behavior in Release 12, because the consolidation calculations in downstream supply chain layers now no longer factor in the consolidation outputs from upstream layers. This is a trade-off that the user optionally makes for the sake of better performance. The above behavior is optional, and is enabled via profile options. 3.3.1.6. End Item Substitution Enhancements Use-up of on hand inventory is critical to controlling storage and obsolescence costs at many companies. One way in which ASCP helps in this regards is to recommend the use of available substitute item supplies when the demanded item is not on hand. Prior to this release, such end-item substitution recommendations made by ASCP could not be automatically released back and implemented in Order Management. With this release, the ASCP sales order release process has been enhanced to support the passing back of ASCP substitute item recommendations back to the associated sales orders in Order Management. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning 17
  • 25. ASCP also supports an option to recognize explicitly modeled item substitution relationships only and thus turn off the inference of chained substitutions. If Item B is a substitute for Item A, and Item C is a substitute for Item B, it is now possible to configure ASCP to not infer that Item C is a substitute for Item A. When searching for end-item substitute supplies, ASCP can optionally search for them in ascending order of substitution relationship date effectivity. This provides a mechanism for dictating the item order of ASCP's search for end-item substitutes. This capability is not supported for R12.0.x source instances. It is supported for R12.1.1 and 11i10 source instances. 3.3.1.7. Production Schedules as Inputs You can now publish planned orders directly from Production Scheduling into an ASCP plan. Planned orders scheduled in PS come into ASCP as firm planned orders. This allows ASCP plans to remain consistent with short-term scheduling decisions made in PS. 3.3.1.8. Safety Lead Time In lieu of generating supplies to meet target safety stock quantities, ASCP now offers the option of hedging against uncertain demand by generating supplies to meet demands ahead of time. The amount of time that demands are met ahead of time is the "safety lead time", and is specified via the Safety Stock Percent item attribute (100% per one day of safety lead time). This feature is turned on via the MSO: Use Safety Lead Time profile option. 3.3.1.9. Customization of Horizontal Plan ASCP supports the ability to customize the row labels and numbers displayed in the horizontal plan. One typical application of this capability is to display demands and supplies in alternate units of measure. A new custom row in the horizontal plan allows a user to display a custom order type (for example, Projected Available Balance Dollar Value) and label it appropriately. The custom row can be selectively displayed, by user or by preference. The logic to calculate custom order type data values must be provided by the user via a custom PL/SQL program unit that is pointed to by the profile option MSC: Horizontal Plan Extension Program. The same mechanism can be used to customize data values in standard rows of the horizontal plan. 3.3.1.10. Supply Tolerancing Enhancements In the process industries, process variability often creates supply output quantities that vary about a nominal amount. For example, a "10,000 pound" coil of aluminum sheet may actually come out to be 9,950 pounds or 10,035 pounds. The planning requirements are to be able to tolerate minor discrepancies between demand and supply so as to prevent unnecessary production and impractical supply splits. For example, a demand for 10,000 pounds should be considered to be satisfied completely by a 9,950 pound coil. When the same demand is satisfied with a 10,035 pound coil, planning should not recommend that the extra 35 pounds be split off to be used to satisfy other demands. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning 18
  • 26. ASCP supports the concept of supply tolerancing through Shortage Tolerance and Excess Tolerance Percent pegging controls that dictate when demands and supplies are considered to be fully pegged. In the example with the 9,950 pound coil above, ASCP will still generate a recommendation for an extra 10,000 pound coil to cover the supply deficit, but will peg that supply to excess so that it is moved to the end of the planning horizon. This prevents the planner from accidentally releasing unneeded work to the production floor. Supply tolerancing support where Shortage and Excess Tolerance Percentages are input as global profile option values is existing capability. New with this release is the ability for the user to optionally specify Shortage and Excess Tolerance Percentages (via customization) at the item-organization level in the staging table MSC_ST_SYSTEM_ITEMS. If these values are populated, ASCP will look at these staging table values in lieu of the profile option values. Also new is ASCP's ability to delay the satisfaction of 'small' demands until sufficient outstanding demand has accumulated to warrant the production of a standard-sized batch. 'Small' is defined to be a percentage of the Fixed Lot Multiple order modifier. This percentage can be entered (via customization) in the planner server table MSC_SYSTEM_ITEMS. 3.3.1.11. Buy Order Processing Lead Time Backward Compatibility In 11i9 the processing lead time for buy planned orders was offset based on the org manufacturing calendar. Starting in 11i10, the processing lead time for buy planned orders was offset based on the Supplier Capacity Calendar, if it was assigned on the Approved Supplier List. Otherwise the processing lead time was offset based on a 24x7 calendar. In order to preserve behavior compatibility with 11i9 for customers who may have set their buy item processing lead times assuming org manufacturing calendar offsetting and are upgrading from 11i9 to R12.1.1, a new profile option MSC: Buy Order Processing Lead Time Calendar allows you to either revert back to the 11i9 behavior (when it is set to 'Org Manufacturing Calendar') or use the 11i10 behavior (when it is set to 'Supplier Capacity Calendar'). 3.3.2. Release 12.1.2 3.3.2.1. Release Recommendations for Internal Requisitions You can now release reschedule in, reschedule out, and cancellation recommendations for internal requisitions. Previously, Oracle Purchasing did not support changes to an internal requisition after the corresponding internal sales order had been created in Oracle Order Management. This restriction has now been removed. ASCP's recommendations for internal orders can now be successfully released from the planner workbench. You can also release manual overrides of internal requisition date and quantity. 3.3.2.2. Turn Off Planned Order Creation You can turn off planned order creation for an item via the new Item Mass Maintenance item attribute "New Planned Order Creation". The permissible values are: “Create New Planned Orders” (default) and “Do Not Create New Planned Orders”. Use cases for this capability are: Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning 19
  • 27. A by-product defined in the BOM can be used as downstream component. The requirement is to ensure that while all available supplies of the by-product are consumed, no supplies for this item are purchased. In addition, Sales Orders can be taken for the by-product and shipped as supplies are available, but no new supplies should be manufactured to meet Sales Order demand. • To enable phasing out of item components and their replacement with newer ingredients, it is required that there be no new order or build for the phased out item. The existing supply of the phased out item is to be used up. • No new supplies for certain products are to be made, but available stock can be distributed and sold. This features is only available in the Constrained (Without Scheduling) and Constrained (With Scheduling) planning modes. It is also available in Distribution Planning. It is not available in the Unconstrained, Constrained (Classic), Constrained (Classic) With Decision Rules and Optimized (Classic) planning modes. 3.3.2.3. Consume Purchase Orders in First In, First Out Sequence Standard ASCP behavior matches supplies to demands in a way that minimizes inventory. For example, if within a week there is a demand of 1 on Friday, and purchase order supplies of 1 each on Monday and Thursday, ASCP would match the Thursday purchase order to the Friday demand and recommend the cancellation of the Monday purchase order. With this (optional) feature, ASCP would match the Monday purchase order to the Friday demand and recommend the cancellation of the Thursday purchase order. Use of existing purchase order supplies in this chronological fashion applies across substitute components: if the Monday and Thursday purchase orders in our example are in fact different items but substitute components, ASCP would still consume the Monday purchase order and cancel the Thursday purchase order. This feature is useful for minimizing the impact of purchase order change recommendations on suppliers. 3.3.3. Release 12.1.3 3.3.3.1. Forecast Spreading Based on Shipping Calendar Before this release ASCP supported forecast spreading based on only manufacturing calendar. In this release a new profile option “MSC: Forecast Spreading Calendar” enables users to spread forecasts based on the shipping calendar in addition to the manufacturing calendar. The list of values for this profile option includes: Organization Manufacturing Calendar – This is the default value. The system will use the organization manufacturing calendar for spreading the forecast. Organization Shipping Calendar – The system will use the organization shipping calendar for spreading the forecast. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning 20
  • 28. Note – A forecast for a non-working day in the manufacturing calendar is moved to the previous working day. Example: Consider an organization with a manufacturing calendar that has both Saturday and Sunday as non-working days. On the other hand the shipping calendar has only Sunday as the only non-working day of the week. Based on the shipping calendar, a forecast of 480 units for period 3 (March) is spread evenly to daily buckets from Monday to Saturday (total of 24 buckets). That results in the daily forecast quantity of 20 (480 / 24 = 20). Since Saturday is not a working day based on the manufacturing calendar, therefore ASCP moves and adds up the Saturdays’ forecasts to Fridays’ forecasts (20 + 20 = 40). The result is shown in the following table: Monday Tuesday Wednesda Thursda Friday Saturday Sunday y y Date 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Forecast 20 20 20 20 40 0 Date 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Forecast 20 20 20 20 40 0 Date 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Forecast 20 20 20 20 40 0 Date 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Forecast 20 20 20 20 40 0 3.3.3.1. Excluding Planned Orders from Supply Tolerancing Before this release the Shortage Tolerance Percent and Excess Tolerance Percent were applied to all order types including planned orders. With this release ASCP provides a profile option called “MSC: Apply shortage and excess tolerance percentages to planned orders”. The list of values for this profile option includes: Yes – The shortage tolerance and excess percentages are applied to all supplies including planned orders. This is the default value. No – The shortage tolerance and excess percentages are applied only to existing supplies (such as On Hand, WIP). When this profile option is set to No, it allows ASCP to generate planned orders that satisfy 100% of demand, while matching existing supplies (which may have irregular quantities due to actual process yields) to demands using a supply tolerance. Example – Consider an item with 2 demands: Demand1= 10200 Demand2= 10200 Fixed Order Quantity = 2000 Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning 21
  • 29. MSC: Demand Satisfied Percent Threshold for Pegging = 98 Shortage Tolerance Quantity = 10200 × (100 – 98) / 100 = 204 MSC: Minimum Supply/Demand Percent for Pegging = 0.0018 Excess Tolerance Quantity = 10200 × 0.0018 = 1836 If the profile option “MSC: Apply shortage and excess tolerance percentages to planned orders” is set to “No”, ASCP creates 6 planned orders of 2000 to satisfy Demand1 of 10200. In this case Demand1 is satisfied completely and the excess of 1800 (12000 – 10200) is used to satisfy Demand2 ignoring the excess tolerance percent even though 1800 < 1836. On the other hand, if the profile option is set to “Yes”, then ASCP initially creates 6 planned orders to satisfy Demand1, but it uses (pegs) only 5 of those to satisfy this demand since (10200 – 10000) < 204. In this case Demand1 is satisfied with an allowed shortage of 200. The other planned order of 2000 is used for satisfying Demand2. 3.3.3.2. Maximize Use-Up of Substitute Components With this release ASCP provides a new profile option called “MSO: Use up existing supply of primary components before substitute” that allows you to maximize usage of substitute components. The list of values for this profile option includes: Yes – ASCP uses the existing supply of primary components before substitute components. This is the default value. No – ASCP uses the existing supply of substitute components before primary components. If this profile option is set to “No”, and there is no existing supply for substitute components, ASCP generates new planned orders for the primary components before substitute components. In addition to the above profile option, you need to set the following 2 profile options to use this feature: 1 – MSO: Use Existing Supplies in Alternate BOM/Subs. Comp This profile option allows you to control how the existing supplies in substitute components / alternate BOM paths are used by ASCP. You need to set the value of this profile option to 0 (consider both existing substitute component supplies and existing alternate BOM component supplies) or 1 (consider existing substitute component supplies but not existing alternate BOM component supplies) to use this enhancement. Values 2 (consider neither existing substitute component supplies nor existing alternate BOM component supplies) and 3 (consider existing alternate BOM component supplies but not existing substitute component supplies) are not compatible with this feature. 2 – MSO: Postpone Use of Alternates to Latest Possible Time This profile option enables ASCP to plan supplies with respect to the timing of alternates’ usage. You need to set the value of this profile option to “No” to use this feature. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning 22
  • 30. ASCP behavior with respect to this feature is summarized as follows: With the feature turned off (MSO: Use up existing supply of primary components before substitute = Yes): 1. Use on hand and scheduled receipts of primary components 2. Use on hand and scheduled receipts of substitute components 3. Generate new planned orders for primary components 4. Generate new planned orders for substitute components With the feature turned on (MSO: Use up existing supply of primary components before substitute = No): 1. Use on hand and scheduled receipts of substitute components 2. Use on hand and scheduled receipts of primary components 3. Generate new planned orders for primary components 4. Generate new planned orders for substitute components Note that the on hand of a substitute component will not be used if it is less than the Minimum Order Quantity, Fixed Order Quantity, or Fixed Lot Multiplier. The on hand of a substitute component may be partially used if it is greater than the order modifiers but it is not a multiple of them. This enhancement is only available with the Constrained (Without Scheduling) planning mode. 3.3.3.3. Distribution Planning Enhanced Order Modifier Support Distribution planning now supports two more order modifiers: maximum order quantity and minimum order quantity. This is in addition to the currently supported fixed lot multiplier and round order modifiers. Users can specify maximum and minimum order quantity as an item attribute. Users can also choose to specify each newly supported order modifier on the supply allocation rule. Order modifiers specified on a supply allocation rule are applied to transfers between organizations. 3.3.4. Release 12.1.3.2 3.3.4.1. Forecast Explosion Enhancements The enhancements to the forecast explosion process in ASCP include: • While exploding forecasts of ATO Models, ASCP traces the exploded forecasts of option classes and options to the top model forecast that is the source of the original demand. This information is used for reporting and analysis in Advanced Planning Command Center. Note: When using Demantra Demand Management to feed forecasts into Advanced Supply Chain Planning, the seeded data integration profile publishes both the Model forecasts and the exploded forecasts by default. When using this Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning 23
  • 31. option to explode forecasts in ASCP, users will need to set up a custom profile to not publish the exploded forecast demand so that there is no double counting of dependent demand. • The forecast explosion process will now be able to use the Planning percentages from Demantra Demand Management (if published). If the planning percentages from Demantra are not available, the explosion will use the usages on the Bills of Material as the default. Note: The Planning Percentages need to be published from Demantra using a custom data integration profile. The seeded profile does not publish this by default. These features are valid for local and global forecasts and also in both simple, single- organization models and multi-level, multi-organization models. Both these enhancements are available only when the plan option 'Explode Forecast' is turned on and the forecast control for the Options and Option Classes is set to Consume and Derive. 3.3.5. Release 12.2 3.3.5.1. Supplier Capacity Consumption Enhancement A new profile option is introduced to control supplier capacity consumption by purchase orders. This provides more flexibility for users to decide how supplier capacity should be consumed by purchase orders inside and outside the planning time fence. The profile also allows users to decide whether to consume supplier capacity with all purchase orders or only unacknowledged purchase orders. With this enhancement, the existing profile option “MSC: Purchase Order Dock Date Calculation Preference” does not affect supplier capacity consumption. The two choices, Promise Date and Need by Date, only determine which date is selected from the purchase order to use within planning as the suggested dock date. The new profile option “MSC: Supplier Capacity Consumption by Purchase Orders” has four settings. You can select “Yes” and all purchase orders consume supplier capacity or “No Consumption” (default) and then no purchase orders consume supplier capacity. If you select “Unacknowledged Purchase Orders Only” then this behavior is similar to current behavior where purchase orders without a promise date consume supplier capacity. The newest choice is “Purchase Orders outside Lead Time Only”. With this choice, ASCP does not consume supplier capacity with any purchase order which has a dock date inside of the item or supplier-item lead time. If the purchase order dock date is outside of lead time, then the purchase order consumes supplier capacity. Users can set supplier capacity to accumulate at lead time and only purchase orders outside of lead time consume supplier capacity. The supplier capacity horizontal plan is enhanced to display the supplier capacity consumption based on the new profile option. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning 24
  • 32. 3.3.5.2. Enhanced Exception Management Prior to this enhancement, ASCP generated all exceptions for all items and resources with attached exception sets. You can now control which exceptions ASCP generates, thus saving the computational burden of generating unneeded exceptions. A new window called Exception Group allows you to select specific exceptions from a list of available exceptions. You can save the Exception Group and attach it to plans using a new plan option field. When the plan is run, ASCP generates only the exceptions listed in the Exception Group. The Exception Group allows you to further limit the number of exceptions generated by restricting the generated exceptions to only selected • Organizations • Item Categories and to those with dates within a specified • Exception Time Fence (Days) 3.4. Oracle Collaborative Planning 3.4.1. Release 12.1.1 3.4.1.1. Export Exception Details This enhancement enables the export of the Collaborative Planning Exceptions Detail screen to a .csv file that can be opened in spreadsheet and other external applications. Data can be exported for one user selected exception class at a time, or for all exception classes together. The structure of the exported data is similar to what is seen on the Exception Details screen. 3.4.1.2. Detailed Supply Commit Based on ASCP Pegging ASCP will publish supply commits to Collaborative Planning based on how end item supplies are pegged to the end item demands in the ASCP plan. Earlier, ASCP published only a single supply commit record to Collaborative Planning on the date when the demand was completely satisfied. With the new behavior, if a demand is satisfied by pegging against on hand and also a planned production batch, two supply commit records will be published, corresponding to the individual pegging quantities and dates. This new behavior is enabled by the profile option MSC: Publish Supply Commit Based on Pegging Information. 3.4.1.3. Search Exceptions by Buyer and Planner The search criteria in the exceptions detail screen have been enhanced to include "Buyer Code" and "Planner Code". Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Collaborative Planning 25
  • 33. 3.4.2. Release 12.1.2 3.4.2.1. Rich User Interface Enhancements Oracle Collaborative Planning incorporates new rich user interface capabilities of E- Business Suite 12.1.2. These include a redesigned applications home page with more efficient navigation, multi-level navigation menus with saved favorites, and "look-ahead" lists of values that automatically complete partial user entries. 3.4.3. Release 12.1.3 There are no new enhancements in Oracle Collaborative Planning in Release 12.1.3. 3.4.4. Release 12.2 There are no new enhancements in Oracle Collaborative Planning in Release 12.2. 3.5. Oracle Demand Planning 3.5.1. Release 12.1.1 3.5.1.1. Clear Data in Worksheets This feature allows the user to clear data from existing cells in a worksheet. The Fill Data dialog in the worksheet now allows a null entry. The data is replaced with a null/NA. A recalculate is required to reflect the change across all levels of the hierarchy. 3.5.1.2. Default Even Allocation Over Time This feature gives the user the ability to allocate evenly down the time dimension and use "first" allocation for other dimensions when an allocation basis is not available. The profile MSD: Use Classic Even Allocation can now have three values, one of which signifies that the fallback default allocation for the time dimension will be even. The three valid choices for the profile are: • Yes, use even allocation • No, use first allocation • No, use first allocation for all dimensions except Time 3.5.1.3. Plan Security by Responsibility and Organization This feature prevents users from one Business Unit from accessing demand plans set up for another Business Unit. The Demand Planning System Administrator can now associate Demand Plan Responsibilities with specific Organizations. Organization(s) are selected during plan definition. Users can then access only plans defined for the Organizations associated with their Responsibility. By default a Responsibility is associated with all Organizations. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Planning 26
  • 34. 3.5.1.4. Sort by Product in Planning Percentages Worksheet This feature adds a sort capability for Product to the Selector for the Planning Percentage Worksheet. The user now has the ability to sort the Product dimension in ascending or descending order to facilitate selection of models and options. 3.5.1.5. Data Selection Tools for Region Copy Selector This feature makes all the Selector tools available to the user when creating a Region Copy measure to facilitate data selection. 3.5.1.6. Prevent Planners from Editing Measures in View Scope This feature allows you to prevent planners from changing worksheet values in measures in their view scope. Planners can continue to change worksheet values in measures in their assignment scope. Whether this feature is enabled or not, only values in a demand planner's assignment scope are passed back to the shared workspace during internal collaboration. 3.5.2. Release 12.1.2 There are no new enhancements in Oracle Demand Planning in Release 12.1.2. 3.5.3. Release 12.1.3 There are no new enhancements in Oracle Demand Planning in Release 12.1.3. 3.5.4. Release 12.2 There are no new enhancements in Oracle Demand Planning in Release 12.2. 3.6. Oracle Demand Signal Repository 3.6.1. Product Overview The Oracle Demand Signal Repository (DSR) helps manufacturers collect detailed retailer and other demand data, analyze it to identify issues and opportunities, and respond via a SOA-enabled services library. Typical retail data sources include daily point-of-sale, on-hand inventory, store orders and receipts, returns, store promotions and sales/order forecasts. The DSR transforms retailer data into manufacturer terms – including manufacturer item identification, manufacturer hierarchies and calendars. A high-performance data loading facility cleanses the data and allocates it to a uniform set of dimension levels. The Demand Signal Repository data model is based upon the Oracle Data Warehouse for Retail (ODWR) data model, adapted to a manufacturer point of view. An extensive OBIEE metadata layer sits on top of the ODWR data model, and allows users to develop custom reports that combine the data in customer-specific ways. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 27
  • 35. DSR web services provide complementary applications such as Demantra Demand Management with cleansed retail point of sale, on-hand inventory and other data at daily store level, or aggregated to a higher level as needed. 3.6.2. Release 12.1.1 3.6.2.1. Customer Organization Hierarchy DSR captures customer organizational information as well as customer organizational hierarchy to allow CG Manufacturer’s to view customer data based on the customer’s perspective of their organization. The lowest level in the organization hierarchy is the Business Unit which is a single customer location. While business unit types are user-defined, the two most common types of business units are stores and customer distribution centers. DSR captures several business unit attributes such as address, general contact, and VAT information, as well as store-specific attributes such as store manager, physical properties (store size, number of window displays, restrooms, etc.). Additionally, business units can be associated with a distribution channel and/or a market area to allow analysis by channel or a market area (such as the Los Angeles market). Each business unit has a physical address. This enables the Business Unit to be analyzed by a geographic dimension, as well as the organization hierarchy. The other levels of the organization hierarchy (listed from top to bottom) include: Retail Group, Chain, Area, Region, District, and finally Business Unit. DSR allows you to aggregate fact data to any level of the customer’s organization hierarchy. The customer organization hierarchy supports the slowly changing dimension (SCD) type 2 feature. This feature keeps historical data (e.g., sales) associated with the hierarchical structure in effect at the time, to ensure proper analysis. 3.6.2.2. Multiple Calendar Support In addition to the standard Gregorian calendar, DSR also provides additional calendars types including business, fiscal, advertising, and planning calendar type. The consumer goods manufacturer can use all calendar types, whereas the only calendar type that supports customer-specific calendars is the business calendar. By having a separate business calendar for each customer, the account team or category manager can view data in terms of the customer’s week, month, etc. 3.6.2.3. Customer Item Hierarchy DSR captures customer item information as well as customer item hierarchy to allow consumer goods manufacturers to view customer data based on the manner in which the customer organizes their product groupings. The lowest level in the customer item hierarchy is the SKU. DSR captures several attributes at the SKU level including price, cost, size, color, style, variety, etc. Additionally, SKUs can be associated to a brand or group into item clusters to allow further analysis. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 28
  • 36. The other levels of the customer item hierarchy (listed from top to bottom) include: Company, Division, Group, Department, Category, Subcategory, Item and finally SKU. DSR allows you to aggregate fact data to any level of the customer’s item hierarchy. The customer item hierarchy supports the slowly changing dimension (SCD) type 2 feature. This feature keeps historical data (e.g., sales) associated with the hierarchical structure in effect at the time, to ensure proper analysis. 3.6.2.4. Manufacturer Item Hierarchy DSR captures the manufacturer’s item information as well as item hierarchy to allow consumer goods manufacturers to view data by the product categorization and descriptions used within their own company. The lowest level in the manufacturer item hierarchy is the SKU. DSR captures several attributes at the SKU level which can differ from the retailer’s SKU attribute values. The other levels of the manufacturer’s item hierarchy (listed from top to bottom) include: Company, Division, Group, Class, Subclass, Item and finally SKU. The manufacturer’s item hierarchy is seven levels deep, whereas the customer’s item hierarchy is eight levels deep (to accommodate the broad range of products carried by retailers). Like the customer item hierarchy, the manufacturer’s item hierarchy also supports the slowly changing dimension (SCD) type 2 feature. This feature keeps historical data (e.g., sales) associated with the hierarchical structure in effect at the time, to ensure proper analysis. 3.6.2.5. Multiple Currency Support Monetary values within DSR can be represented in one of two currencies. The first is the retailer’s corporate currency, whereas each retailer can have a different currency. The second is the reporting currency of the manufacturer. DSR converts values from the retailer’s currency to the manufacturer’s reporting currency based upon a conversion table. By default, reports will use the manufacturer reporting currency. If needed, the reports can be customized to replace the reporting currency with the retailer currency. 3.6.2.6. Alternate Units of Measure In DSR the typical base unit of measure is a saleable unit or “Each” (EA). DSR supports alternate units of measure (kilos, liters, stats) to address manufacturing, shipping or marketing requirements. For example, a beverage company might select volume in liters as their alternative UOM. Each SKU has a ratio to convert the primary UOM quantity to the alternate UOM quantity. 3.6.2.7. Authorized Distribution A system parameter, called discovery mode, controls whether stores must be authorized to carry an item. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 29
  • 37. When discovery mode is off, items must be pre-associated with a valid business unit (aka store) in order to successfully process sales and forecast data for that business unit/item combination. When item discovery mode is on, the data loading process will create a new authorized item/store record the first time that it encounters a SKU at a business unit (store) where it has never previously been reported. 3.6.2.8. Sales Allocation Fact data in Demand Signal Repository is always stored at the lowest level by SKU/Business Unit/Day. Data supplied at an aggregate level is allocated down to the day during the load process. For example, weekly, chain-level data must be allocated to a daily, business unit level (either store or DC). Organization and time-level allocation profiles define the percentage of the aggregate value to be allocated to each the day or location. Allocation preserves any fractional quantity, in order for a data value to be the same when re-aggregated to the level at which it was originally received. 3.6.2.9. Sales Facts The DSR sales & return process flow loads units sold, units returned and their related monetary value and cost. Data can be reported at the business unit level (e.g., store) or at a higher level in the organization for a given day or week. Sales reported at an aggregate level are allocated to the lowest level (by business unit / day). 3.6.2.10. Shipments The shipments process flow loads shipped units and monetary amount for a given business unit/item/day. Shipments are reported against a specific store or distribution center, no allocation logic is supported for shipment data. 3.6.2.11. Orders The orders process flow loads order quantity and monetary amount for a given business unit/item/day. Orders (like Shipments) are reported against a specific store or distribution center, again no allocation logic is supported for order data. 3.6.2.12. Inventory The item inventory process flow loads on-hand, received, in-transit, backordered, and quality hold quantities, net costs, and retail amounts for a given business unit/item/location/day. Item Inventory (like Shipments and Orders) are reported against a specific store or distribution center, so no allocation logic is supported for order data. 3.6.2.13. Sales Forecasts The sales forecast process flow loads forecasted sales units and their related monetary value. Like the sales and returns process flow, data can be reported at the business unit level (e.g., store) or at a higher level in the organization for a given day or week. Sales forecasted at an aggregate level are allocated to the lowest level (by business unit / day). Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 30
  • 38. 3.6.2.14. Promotion Plans The promotions plan process flow loads information on what promotions are in effect at a store for an item during a given time period, as well as whether the promotion includes an associated price discount or not. 3.6.2.15. Category Sales Analysis Dashboard The Category Management Dashboard displays key measures that are important to a Category Manager. This includes: • Retailer Net Cost to Gross Margin is a quick reference into the profitability of each product category carried by the retailer. • Category Coverage provides a breakdown of sales by retailer by product category. • Product Mix provides a breakdown of sales by product category across retailers. • Product Contribution to Profit lists the top performing products based on contribution to their respective product category. • Category Sales by Type displays the breakdown by promotional versus non- promotional sales. • Sales Growth Percent Change to Previous Period displays the growth (or decline) of this period’s sales to the prior period. Some of the key characteristics of the dashboard include: • Displaying multiple KPIs, or measures, in a single dashboard • Tracking performance relative to pre-defined thresholds • Drill-down capabilities to view supporting data • Ability to view by retailer or manufacturer hierarchy • Automatic delivery of the underlying reports via MS Office tools. 3.6.2.16. Product to Category Coverage Reports The Product to Category Coverage reports shows the percentage of category, brand or item penetration (by unit sales and monetary sales) into specific channels of distribution (e.g. grocery retail, mass merchandiser, drug, wholesale /club, etc.). Two separate reports are available: The “Product to Category Coverage by Quarter” and the “Product to Category Coverage by Period”. The available filters include: • Time (year, quarter month). • Channel (grocery retail, mass merchandiser, etc.) • Product Category or Item • Item Type (manufacturer item or retailer items) 3.6.2.17. Category Growth Analysis Reports The Category Growth Analysis reports measure category’s growth by sales volume and monetary value, across time and to the brand and item levels. Two reports are available: The “Category Growth Analysis by Volume” report and the “Category Growth Analysis by Sales” report The available filters include: • Time (year, quarter, month). Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 31
  • 39. Channel (grocery retail, mass merchandiser, etc.) • Product Category • Item Type (manufacturer item or retailer items) • Market Area 3.6.2.18. Category Sales by Type Reports The Category Sales by Type report shows category sales units and monetary sales by promotion type. Promotion Sales are sales from the retail POS system that are priced and/or based on a promotion. Regular Sales are sales from the retail POS system that are priced at standard Non-Promotion periods or pricing. Two reports are available: The “Category Sales Volume by Type: and the “Category Sales Value by Type” report. The available filters include: • Time (year, quarter, month). • Channel (grocery retail, mass merchandiser, etc.) • Product Category • Item Type (manufacturer item or retailer items) 3.6.2.19. Average Price Analysis Report The Average Price Analysis report compares unit sales and average retail sales price to the same period last year. The available filters include: • Time (year, quarter, month). • Product Category • Item Type (manufacturer item or retailer items) 3.6.2.20. Top and Bottom Performers Reports The top and bottom performers reports provide an immediate view of the top performers and bottom performers by profit or sales amount. Four reports are available: • Top Performers by Profit • Bottom Performers by Profit • Top Performers by Sales • Bottom Performers by Sales The available filters include: • Top Performer (which is the number to display, the default if left blank is 10) • Time (year, quarter, month). • Product Category • Item Type (manufacturer item or retailer items) • Customer 3.6.2.21. Ad-Hoc Reporting Demand Signal Repository leverages native OBIEE functionality to produce ad-hoc reports. This includes: Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 32
  • 40. Flexible creation of ad hoc/new reports by end users which can then be published to a wider audience • Ability to view data in multiple formats, including pivot table, graph, chart, etc. • Ability to drill down to lowest level of detail, based on existing dimensions, like retail or manufacture item or organization hierarchy • Seamless integration with MS Office tools to export to Excel, PowerPoint, etc. • And the ability to integrate geographic visualization. For example, to show sales by store, zip code, etc. on a map. 3.6.2.22. Sales Scorecard The sales scorecard is divided into four sections which the users can filter by customer and/or date. The four sections are: • “Latest Results” for the selected company (aka customer). • “Latest Results” broken down by product category • “Overall Company” YTD results. • “Overall Company” YTD results broken down by product Category The measures displayed in each of the four quadrants include Monetary Sales, Unit Sales, Category Sales, Category Share, Retailer Gross Margin, Gross Marting Percent, and Forecast Accuracy. 3.6.2.23. Supply Chain Scorecard The Supply Chain scorecard shows results against goal comparisons for seven supply- chain oriented measures. Like the Sales Scorecard, it is divided into four panels, with the left panels showing the latest results and the right panels showing values summarized by year. Also like the Sales Scorecard, the top two sections show company performance; however, the bottom two sections show performance across all manufacturer products at the customer organization’s “region” level. The measures for each of the four sections of the supply chain scorecard include Service Level, Order Cycle Time, and On-Time Delivery, Inventory Cover, On-hand Inventory, In-Stock %, and Percent returns 3.6.2.24. Operations Scorecard The operations tab is divided into two panels. Operational measures are only available at supply chain level, not at a more granular level (such as category or region). All seven measures (Perfect order %, Order change %, Invoice accuracy %, Payment days, Deduction amount, Item data synchronization % and Item data accuracy %) are external measures imported into DSR through the ETL process. 3.6.2.25. Demantra Demand Management Integration Demand Signal Repository has a pre-built outbound integration of aggregated demand signals to Demantra. Data sent from DSR to Demantra includes: • Retailer Point of Sale Sales and Forecast • Retailer On-Hand Inventory, Orders, Shipments, and Promotions • Distribution Center On Hand-Inventory, Forecast, Shipments Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 33
  • 41. 3.6.2.26. Retail Merchandising System (RMS) Integration The Retail Merchandising System (RMS) Integration provides an out-of the box integration of EDI 852 data coming from Oracle’s RMS system into Oracle’s Demand Signal Repository (DSR) module. The EDI 852 file from RMS populates DSR’s sales and return data, as well as on-hand inventory. 3.6.2.27. Web Services Integration If you desire outbound integration with other Oracle or Non-Oracle applications, Demand Signal Repository includes a standards-based web services integration to support most common access scenarios including: • Store POS, Orders, Forecasts, Shipments, and Promotions • On-Hand and In-Transit Inventory, Backorders, and Receipts 3.6.3. Release 12.1.2 3.6.3.1. Exception Management Dashboard The Exception Management Dashboard automatically sifts through vast amounts of customer data to quickly detect potential problems in key business processes. Using OBIEE’s iBot functionality, pre-built queries can be run periodically, as needed, to locate issues and create exceptions. Once exceptions have been created, the Exception Management Dashboard aggregates and displays exceptions by customer and product category, listing them in order from highest to lowest number of exception so users can address the most critical areas first. The exception types analyzed within the Exception Management Dashboard include: • Out of Stock Exception where on-hand quantity was reported as zero • Imputed Out of Stock Exception where sales are significantly below expected sales and the probability is very high that the product is out of stock. • Sales Forecast Accuracy Exception where sales forecast accuracy varies significantly from the average. • Reorder Point Exception where inventory levels (on-hand plus back order quantity) are below the customer’s reorder point. • Overstock Exception where on-hand inventory levels are above the customer’s reorder point. • New Item Not Selling Exception which reports on items introduced at the store within the last 30 days which have no sales. • In-flight Promotional Lift Exception which reports on promoted items whose sales is less than 110% of average sales. • Promotional Price Deviation Exception which reports where promotion price is discounted more than 10% of average selling price Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 34
  • 42. From each one of these exception types users have the option to view one of the following reports to get more information. • The Forecast Accuracy report shows actual versus forecasted sales, deviation between the two for the selected week as well as prior week. • The Inventory Position report shows the previous week’s ending balance, receipts, sales and both an expected ending balance and an actual ending balance. The customer’s replenishment information (min, max, reorder point, etc.) is also displayed. • The Item Distribution report shows the number of authorized stores and the number of authorized stores not selling, in addition to the average sales per store selling. • The Price Deviation report shows average sales price, promotional price, quantity sold, actual revenue and expected revenue. Exception history is retained to allow users to track trends on whether exceptions are increasing or decreasing. 3.6.3.2. All Commodity Volume (ACV) / External Measures Many companies using Demand Signal Repository purchase consumption data from syndicated data providers to analyze market penetration by retailer, geography, product and time. The set of syndicated consumption data includes pre-calculated ACV measures as well as other measures such as sales by promotion type, baseline sales, and coupon sales. Syndicated consumption data can be purchased at various levels of the product hierarchy and customer organization hierarchy, as well as geographic region or sub-region. DSR provides an initial set of 100 generic measures which are renamed during implementation to match the measures purchased. In addition, the number of measures can be extended, if needed. When loading the external measures the product and geography keys supplied by the syndicated data provider are translated into the appropriate organization, product or geography hierarchy levels. A sample set of measures along with an out-of-the-box report is available to use as is, or rename and revise based on specific customer needs. 3.6.3.3. TDLinx Store/Outlet Adapter Demand Signal Repository has created an adapter to load AC Nielsen TDLinx store/outlet data. As a result, the existing set of business unit (store) attributes were enhanced to include additional data elements, such as status, sub-channel code, retail group, as well as other attributes. The TDLinx store/outlet adapter maps data from the AC Nielson source CSV file to the Organization Business Unit Interface table. From there the existing Organization Hierarchy ETL process flow can be used to update the Organization Business Unit (DDR_R_BSNS_UNIT) target table. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 35
  • 43. 3.6.3.4. Scorecard Enhancements (Goals & Thresholds) The sales, operations and supply chain scorecards have been enhanced to improve usability (see illustration below). These enhancements include: • Driving performance indicators (red, yellow green indicators) based on externally-loaded goals and thresholds. • Monitoring weekly performance results as opposed to daily performance • Color-coded performance indicators which are based on the loaded goals and thresholds. • “Latest Results” are now based on weekly results, goals and thresholds. Previously, the latest results displayed daily values, which was too granular. • “Overall Results” are now based on YTD results. Previously, the scorecard compared a yearly goal against the associated measure (e.g., unit sales) for a given year. This allows users to monitor performance throughout the year (rather than waiting until the end of the year). In addition, the following enhancements were made to improve readability: • Both the measure value and the color-coded performance indicator are displayed on the main scorecard pages • When drilling down from the scorecard, the year filter criteria is passed to the underlying report. In addition, the associated chart is displayed first (before any table data) On the operations scorecard, the Deduction Balance measure has replaced the Deduction Amount measure. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 36
  • 44. 3.6.3.5. Store Clusters DSR supports the ability to group “like” stores (or distribution centers) together to execute strategies related to specific store formats, consumer demographics, weather zones, or other characteristics. Each business unit (store or distribution center) may be associated to one or more store clusters. The example below illustrates how stores from different retailers can be assigned to store clusters based on average income, lifestyle and geographic location. A store cluster report is available to analyze sales by store cluster type (e.g., Average income, Lifestyle, Coastal) to see breakdown of sales by each unique cluster. 3.6.3.6. Item Clusters Similar to store clusters, DSR supports the ability to group “like” SKUs together to evaluate sales strategies and promotional activities. The example below illustrates how SKUs from different product categories can be assigned to item clusters based on average container material, primary shopper and brand perception. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 37
  • 45. 3.6.3.7. Replenishment Rules DSR supports the loading of customer replenishment rules to provide visibility into the criteria used by the store or distribution center when reordering products. This information can be used to determine whether out-of-stocks or overstocks are being caused by an inappropriate inventory management policy, or to anticipate future order volumes. The replenishment rules are used by the exception management workbench to display over and under stock conditions. The replenishment rules are also accessible to the end user when building ad-hoc queries. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 38
  • 46. 3.6.3.8. Allocation Rules DSR has the ability to allocate POS and sales forecast facts received at an aggregate level to the business unit / day level. The time allocation and organization allocation percentages have been exposed in the BI Answers catalog, so end users can view the percentages that were used when allocating sales facts to the business unit or day level. 3.6.4. Release 12.1.3 3.6.4.1. Manufacturer Promotions Oracle Demand Signal Repository has been extended to include the capture and analysis of Manufacturer Promotions. The functionality within this feature includes: • The ability to load manufacturer promotion information using out of the box generic interface tables and Oracle Warehouse Builder process flows • The ability to associate sales to a manufacturer promotion to report promoted vs. non-compliant sales (e.g., sales that should have been promoted) • A new Manufacturer Promotion Dashboard which shows: o Weekly sales compliance trend broken down by promoted and non- compliant sales o Manufacturer promotion compliance by product category which displays promoted and non-promoted sales by product category o Expected vs. actual promotion sales o Expected vs. actual ACV % by manufacturer promotion Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 39
  • 47. o Expected vs. actual sales by promotion type (e.g., display, feature, etc.) to analyze results by promotion tactic o Promotion compliance by promotion type • Context sensitive drilldowns are available from the manufacturer promotion dashboard to display: o Manufacturer Promotion Summary Results which compare actual promotion results against expectations at the promotion/customer level. o Manufacturer Promotion Detail Results which compare actual promotion results against expectations at the promotion/customer/SKU level. 3.6.4.2. Manufacturer Shipments Manufacturers need visibility into products as they move downstream in the supply chain to the consumer. In previous releases, Oracle Demand Signal Repository provided visibility of products at customer locations (either distribution centers or retail stores), but did not have visibility into shipments leaving the manufacturer’s facilities. Oracle Demand Signal Repository has been enhanced to capture manufacturer shipments to provide end to end visibility of products as they leave the manufacturer’s site all the way to the store and ultimate sale to the consumer. The functionality within this feature includes: • The ability to load the manufacturer’s organization hierarchy to define locations from where product is shipped • The ability to load manufacturer shipment information using out of the box generic interface tables and Oracle Warehouse Builder process flows • A new Shipment Dashboard which shows: o Manufacturer shipment trend o Customer sales trend (to compare against manufacturer shipments) o Actual vs. forecasted customer shipments o Customer shipments vs. receipts (by product category and business unit) to spot potential product diversion issues o Customer shipment throughput of inbound shipments vs. outbound shipments 3.6.4.3. Customer Shipment Facts As part of the manufacturer shipments enhancements, customer shipment facts were also enhanced to capture ship-to location and shipment cost information. 3.6.4.4. Third Party Distributors Manufacturers may ship product to customers via third party distributors. In previous releases of Oracle Demand Signal Repository distributors were not distinguishable from other organizations (e.g., retailers). To provide better visibility into third party distributors, a new organization type has been created specifically for distributors. In addition, a new distributor dashboard has been created. The functionality within this feature includes: • Creation of a new Organization Type for distributors Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 40
  • 48. The ability to load distributor reference information using out of the box generic interface tables and Oracle Warehouse Builder process flows. This includes loading: o Distributor organization hierarchy o Distributor item hierarchy o Distributor business calendar o Distributor replenishment rules • The ability to load distributor fact information using out of the box generic interface tables and Oracle Warehouse Builder process flows. This includes loading: o Distributor shipments o Distributor inventory o Distributor shipment forecast (see Forecast Type and Purpose Code enhancement) • Creation of a new Distributor dashboard which shows: o Manufacturer shipments by distributor o Distributor shipments by customer o Weekly manufacturer shipment trend o Forecast accuracy by distributor o Distributor inventory by product category o Customer shipments by distributor o Distributor throughput (inbound and outbound shipments) by product Category o Weekly distributor throughput trend 3.6.4.5. Alternate Organization Hierarchy Since its inaugural release, Oracle Demand Signal Repository has had the ability to capture and analyze facts based on the customer’s view of their organization structure. Manufacturers and their supply chain partners (e.g., syndicated data providers) may have their own view of how the customer’s organization is structured for purposes of account management, promotion planning, collecting and aggregating consumption data, etc. This view is oftentimes different from how the customer views its organization structure. The Alternate Organization Hierarchy feature allows alternate views of the customer’s organization to co-exist within DSR along with the original customer organization hierarchy. Facts can be inquired upon using the original customer organization hierarchy, or one or more alternate organization hierarchies. The Alternate Organization Hierarchy provides a flexible organization structure, which can vary depending on the source of the data, or the type of analysis performed. For example: Example 1 – Syndicated Data Provider. Manufacturers who subscribe to a syndicated data provider service for account information can load this information into the alternate organization hierarchy and leave the original customer organization hierarchy untouched, Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 41
  • 49. so that account team’s can still talk to customers in terms of the customer’s view of their organization. Example 2 – Customer Buying Organization / Planning Hierarchy. The manufacturer’s own view of the customer’s organization may be based on how the customer’s buying organization is structured. When performing activities, such as promotion planning and execution, the promotion may apply to a level within the retailer’s organization, which represents the area for which a buyer is responsible. For example, a retail department (e.g., giftware, jewelry, etc.) or buying region (e.g., east, west, etc.). One or more of these views of the customer organization can be loaded to the alternate organization hierarchy. The business benefits to having alternate organization hierarchies include: • Ability to view customer data at aggregate levels that represent the various ways in which the manufacturer conducts business with the customer. • Ability to analyze fact data at a level that is equivalent to other systems in use by the Manufacturer. For example, to analyze and report on DSR retail demand data by planning account (i.e., a level in an alternate organization hierarchy), which would be equivalent to the planning account used in Demantra Predictive Trade Planning or Siebel Consumer Goods. The functionality within this feature includes: • The ability to define the types of alternate organization hierarchies to be used (e.g., AC Nielsen, Buying Organization, etc.) • The ability to configure the DSR repository to expose additional hierarchies and/or levels and name each level according to desired use (see additional information below) • The ability to load alternate organization hierarchy information using out of the box generic interface tables and Oracle Warehouse Builder process flows. Information loaded includes: o The types of alternate organization hierarchies in use o The attributes associated with each account within an alternate organization hierarchy, including a set of 20 user-defined attributes which can be customized, and the parent account to which each child account belongs. o The association between a business unit (e.g., store or distribution center) and an account in the alternate organization hierarchy. • The ability to associate syndicated consumption data to any account within an alternate organization hierarchy. • A sample report, called Sales Performance by Account, has been made available to illustrate how the alternate organization can be used to build other reports. Additional Information DSR ships with a sample alternate organization hierarchy exposed in the Answers web catalog which has four levels exposed. To use additional alternate organization hierarchies, the DSR repository must be modified to define the number of levels being used and the names of each level to be exposed. Up to ten levels within an alternate Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 42
  • 50. organization hierarchy can be exposed without requiring any physical data model changes. 3.6.4.6. Forecast Type and Purpose Code Prior to this release of Oracle Demand Signal Repository, forecasts were assumed to be sales related. In addition, there was no way to distinguish baseline from incremental forecast. As of this release, Oracle Demand Signal Repository has enhanced the forecast facts to provide additional types of forecast, as well as defining baseline vs. incremental forecast. The functionality within this feature includes: • The ability to capture different types of forecasts coming from the retailer/customer. In one case, the forecast may represent projected store sales, while in other cases; the forecasts may represent projected orders or shipments for the distribution centers. • To differentiate the types of forecasts provided by the retailer, the forecast data contains two additional attributes. o Forecast Purpose. The forecast purpose code indicates whether a forecast represents a projected sales quantity (for stores), order quantity (for distribution locations), shipment quantity (for distribution locations) or a projected receipt quantity (for either stores or DCs). o Forecast Type. The forecast type code indicates whether the forecast quantity includes only base demand (without promotional volumes), promotional demand only, or "total" demand (including both base and promo). • Existing out of the box reports and dashboards were modified to specify that the forecast data being displayed had a Forecast Purpose code of SALES and a Forecast Type of TOTAL. This is to maintain parity with the original intent of the reports. 3.6.4.7. User Defined Fields To provide flexibility in capturing additional attributes within Oracle Demand Signal Repository, without requiring changes to the physical data model, a set of 20 user- defined attributes (10 alphanumeric, 10 numeric) have been added to the entities listed below: • Manufacturer Item Hierarchy (all levels) • Organization Hierarchy (all levels) • Retailer Item Hierarchy (all levels) • Item Cluster Definition • Retailer Cluster Definition • Customer Promotion Plans Manufacturer’s needing to capture additional attributes against these entities can leverage the out of the box interface tables and Oracle Warehouse Builder process flows without needing to make any customizations. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demand Signal Repository 43
  • 51. 3.6.4.8. Type 2 Slowly Changing Dimensions By default, Oracle Demand Signal Repository supports Type 2 Slowly Changing Dimensions (SCD) on the following dimensions: • Organization • Manufacturer Item Hierarchy • Customer (Retail) Item Hierarchy Historically, the Type 2 SCD feature is always turned on for these three dimensions. With this release, Type 2 SCD functionality can be turned off at implementation time to give customers the option whether to use this feature or not. 3.6.5. Release 12.2 There are no new features in Oracle Demand Signal Repository in Release 12.2. 3.7. Oracle Demantra – All Products 3.7.1. Release 12.2 3.7.1.1. Calendar Month Support in Weekly System Each Oracle Demantra implementation has a core time resolution definition. This definition drives the resolution of data kept in the system, which in turns drives the Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demantra – All Products 44
  • 52. granularity of data available to users, as well as key Demantra processes. Currently this data granularity serves as the smallest building block upon which all time management and display is done. If a customer’s business requirements include support of both weeks and calendar months they cannot achieve this using a weekly system, as weeks do not aggregate wholly into calendar months. Currently the only way to support this requirement is to have a system where the lowest time resolution is daily. This release will enhance the Demantra data model to enable supporting week-to- month calendar rollups. Functionality supported: • Pre-configured Calendar Months time aggregation • View Weekly data via Calendar Months, Quarters and Years • Update data in Calendar Months, Quarters and Years 3.7.1.2. Import from Excel This release enables customers to import data directly from a file (tab-delimited Unicode format only; can be named as .xls file) into a compatible worksheet. This will enable users to quickly import data such as customer forecast, or data they have manipulated in Excel for mass updates (such as planning percentages). A template for import can be generated via an enhanced version of the Export to Excel feature. 3.7.1.3. Engine Performance Improvements This release sets engine pass through as the default configuration for the analytical engine. With this configuration, the Sales_Data_Engine will not be created for every engine branch but instead the data will be retrieved from the Sales_Data table directory. This will reduce configuration time needed to apply this configuration at key customers, improve implementation delivery times and maintain or improve engine run times. 3.7.1.4. General Engine Enhancements This release enables control of combination life-cycle parameters to be configured locally or globally. Dying_time, mature_age and hist_glob_prop will support a global configuration with local overrides. As an example of the business justification, some SKUs are promotional and are only sold every few years. In order to keep them active, dying time could be set to a very high number while in other SKUs a shorter time could be used to trigger deactivation. 3.7.1.5. Analytical Engine on Solaris 10 In this release, we extend our operating system support of the analytical engine to include Solaris 10. 3.7.1.6. Improved Multi-Language Support As a further improvement on language support, Demantra 12.2 includes support for multiple languages within a single instance. This will enable users to select from a list of supported languages at login, and review and collaborate in their selected language. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demantra – All Products 45
  • 53. 3.7.1.7. Technology Stack Demantra 12.2 aligns with the EBS Technology Stack, including the following extensions and version upgrades above existing supported technologies: • Oracle Weblogic 11g • CPLEX 12 for Trade Promotion Optimization • Oracle Connection Manager 11g (OCM) • Oracle Access Manager 11g (replaces SSO) • Internet Explorer 9 • Firefox 4 • Safari 5 • Applications Middle Tier JDK: Java 6.0 • Applications Client Runtime Java: 6.0 In addition, we will support the following version upgrades: • IBM WebSphere or WebSphere Express 7.0 • Tomcat 6.x and 7.0 3.7.1.8. Demand Variability Definition The user interface for standard error (currently erroneously labeled ‘Safety Stock’) is relocated from the Business Logic Engine (BLE) to the Business Modeler and renamed to ‘Demand Variability’. This will better consolidate all system administrator tasks into one administrative application. Further, performance of the procedures that calculate standard error is improved by implementing multi-threading. 3.7.1.9. Configure Rolling Profile Groups A new user interface is provided to define Rolling Profile Groups in the Business Modeler. This new option, as well as the definition of Rolling Data Profiles, is moved under the ‘Configuration’ menu in the Business Modeler. Previously, the configuration of Rolling Data Profiles was found under the ‘Engine’ menu. 3.7.1.10. Integration Data Profile Hints Integration Interface hints are defined in the Business Modeler for Data Profiles. System administrators will be able to define both data and population hints within the Data Profile wizard. 3.7.1.11. Database Performance Improvements Database performance can decline due to out-of-order tables or incorrectly defined primary keys. In this release we provide standard mechanisms for performing database ‘health checks’(both a quick and thorough version) and procedures to rebuild key data tables like SALES_DATA and MDP_MATRIX if necessary. This procedure will be dynamically created in Demantra and can be run either while the application server is live or during a period when the application server is down. The key focus of this design is to provide a means of assessing and addressing declines in database performance due to out-of-order tables. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demantra – All Products 46
  • 54. 3.7.1.12. Asynchronous Workflow Support Currently, workflow steps in Demantra workflows operate in a synchronous mode (i.e., they wait for the step to complete before proceeding to the next step in the workflow). This mode of operation works well for most types of workflow steps currently supported in the workflow editor. However, there are certain types of workflow steps for which an asynchronous mode of operation would be useful. Asynchronous mode of operation means the workflow will not be required to wait for the current step to complete in order to proceed to the next step in the workflow. Asynchronous support is provided for the following types of workflow steps: • Launch Workflow Step • User Step • Group Step • Exception Step Many of these steps are simply used to notify users of data to review or exceptions to take note of. Once the notification has been sent, the workflow should proceed to completion rather than wait for the user to mark as ‘Done’. 3.8. Oracle Demantra Demand Management 3.8.1. Release 12.2 3.8.1.1. Enhanced Integration with Advanced Planning Command Center Demand Management seeds integration with Oracle Advanced Planning Command Center. Demand plan measures can be published to the Advanced Planning Command Center (APCC) and used in dashboard reports. These measures are archived by plan for immediate scenario comparison to facilitate faster development of profitable demand shaping strategies. There is support for publishing custom demand series to APCC forecasting measures. For example, if customer forecasts are maintained in a Demand Management series then this forecast data can be published to a seeded, generic APCC measure. Integration is also available for a limited item hierarchy mapping between Demand Management and APCC. For example, if a custom item hierarchy has been defined in the Business Modeler (e.g. Item < Product SubGroup < Product Group < Product Line) then this structure can be replicated automatically in APCC. 3.9. Oracle Demantra Real-time Sales and Operations Planning 3.9.1. Release 12.2 3.9.1.1. Improved Cost Modeling Detailed supply cost modeling is available in S&OP. Supply cost breakdown is by transportation, storage, purchase, and manufacturing costs. Seeded integration with Strategic Network Optimization brings planning costs at the item, organization and time level by plan scenario rather than deriving total cost using standard costs in S&OP. This Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demantra Demand Management 47
  • 55. enables our customers to understand the cost trade-offs between plan scenarios for a more profitable response. For example, a SNO plan scenario may indicate higher transportation and supply costs due to outsourcing whereas an alternative plan scenario that increases resource capacity may reflect higher manufacturing and storage costs. This enhancement improves decision support through more detailed cost analysis. 3.9.1.2. Enhanced Integration with Advanced Planning Command Center Prior to this release, nearly all of the Forecasting measures from S&OP were plan independent in APCC and publishing overwrote the previous set of values. This diminished the utility of the APCC for demand data analysis. For example, there was no ability to compare sales forecast, projected backlog, and financial forecast measures between scenarios to evaluate plan differences. All Forecasting measures published from S&OP (excluding historical data series) are now striped by plan name, and can be archived and are therefore comparable between scenarios. S&OP leverages the same integration enhancements as in DM. These enhancements to S&OP-APCC integration include: • Streamlined publish process for Forecasting measures: All Forecasting measures are published in a single workflow thereby eliminating manual steps. • Publish custom measures: Support for publishing custom S&OP series to APCC. This includes both forecast and historical measures. • Item Hierarchy Mapping: Provide limited mapping of item hierarchy between the Business Modeler and APCC. For example, if a custom item hierarchy has been defined in the Business Modeler (e.g. Item < Product SubGroup < Product Group < Product Line) then this structure can be replicated automatically in APCC. 3.10. Oracle Demantra Predictive Trade Planning 3.10.1. Release 12.2 3.10.1.1. Enabling ‘Dynamic Open Link’ capabilities and Demantra Anywhere Previously, Dynamic Open Link (DOL) and Demantra Anywhere (DA) were available only if the Sales and Operations Planning component was installed. In this release, customers who have licensed Predictive Trade Planning are able to use DOL to export promotion data from Demantra into third party reporting tools such as Microsoft Excel. They will also be able to leverage the thin client of DA for promotions planning. 3.11. Oracle Demantra Trade Promotion Optimization 3.11.1. Release 12.2 3.11.1.1. Enabling Nodal Tuning Previously, nodal tuning was only available to Advanced Forecasting and Demand Modeling (AFDM) customers. In this release, we enable this advanced analytical Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Demantra Predictive Trade Planning 48
  • 56. functionality for Predictive Trade Planning customers who purchase Trade Promotion Optimization. This enables more granular control of the analytical engine. 3.11.1.2. Enhancements to Optimization A number of enhancements are introduced: • Exclusion rules: Users will be able to define a set of conditions that should not occur together in a solution. For example, you should not run a TPR simultaneously with an Ad, and discount should exclude discounts in a certain range. • Optimized buydown: Buydown is now optimized like other variables in the optimizer. In previous releases, the buydown calculation was deterministic and calculated using the minimum retailer margin constraint. In this version, buydown is now part of the optimization problem and the value is selected by the optimization process. • Vehicle cost overrides: The vehicle_cost expression has been changed to allow cost event overrides per causal and per transpose. • Control over impact of financial constraints: Provide the ability to turn off financial constraints such as minimum manufacturer or retail margins. • Define baseline: If a manual override was done to the baseline forecast, customers might require that value be used as the baseline for the promotion when calculating Revenue and Profit. In this release, we provide control over the expression denoting baseline. 3.12. Oracle Global Order Promising 3.12.1. Release 12.1.1 There are no new features in Oracle Global Order Promising in Release 12.1.1. 3.12.2. Release 12.1.2 There are no new features in Oracle Global Order Promising in Release 12.1.2. 3.12.3. Release 12.1.3 3.12.3.1. Enhanced Forward ATP Prior to this enhancement, during forward scheduling (when there is insufficient supply to promise a demand on its requested date, due to which GOP searches for supply later than the requested date), GOP would consider sources in rank order and select the first source that yielded a promise date less than or equal to the latest acceptable date. This did not guarantee that the source with the best promise date would get selected. With this enhancement, GOP returns the best possible promise date by combining availability across all sources. The enhancement is enabled by enabling the profile “MSC: Use Enhanced Forward ATP”. With this enhanced behavior, GOP uses iterative search logic to determine the most optimal promise date during forward scheduling. This feature increases the computation burden of the order promising calculation, and may impact GOP performance, especially in very constrained supply scenarios. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Global Order Promising 49
  • 57. 3.12.4. Release 12.2 There are no new features in Oracle Global Order Promising in Release 12.2. 3.13. Oracle Inventory Optimization 3.13.1. Release 12.1.1 3.13.1.1. Support for Intermittent Demands Inventory Optimization now explicitly supports forecasts that represent intermittent demands. Forecasts that are fed into IO from Service Parts Planning that have been generated using a statistical method designated as being for intermittent demands, or forecasts that are designated via plan options to be of the intermittent demand variety, will now be assumed by IO to have a more appropriate Poisson error distribution about the forecasted mean. In addition, IO intelligently distributes small calculated total safety stock targets across multiple echelons of a supply chain so that the location-specific targets are integer numbers. 3.13.2. Release 12.1.2 There are no new features in Oracle Inventory Optimization in Release 12.1.2. 3.13.3. Release 12.1.3 3.13.3.1. Enhanced Budget Constraints Prior to this release, IO did not have the ability to ensure integer valued safety stock solutions within input budget constraints. A new heuristic ensures integer valued safety stocks while respecting input budget constraints. This new heuristic is enabled by setting the profile option “MSR: Budget Heuristic” to Yes (the default value is No). A few points about the new heuristic: • It is applicable only for a single level supply chain • It is applicable only for plan level and organization level budgets • It is applicable for both intermittent and non-intermittent demand streams 3.13.4. Release 12.2 There are no new features in Oracle Inventory Optimization in Release 12.2. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Inventory Optimization 50
  • 58. 3.14. Oracle Production Scheduling 3.14.1. Release 12.1.1 3.14.1.1. Units of Measure on Items A “Unit Of Measure” has been added as an explicit attribute of every item. This enhancement provides improved visualization throughout the model and schedule views. o A global “Unit Of Measure” tab has been added to the scenario properties where users can visualize / define units of measure. o Integration processes automatically populate this list when PS is run in an integrated manner 3.14.1.2. Enhanced Alerts In PS, Alerts have been broken down into four distinct categories (Work Order, Demand, Inventory and Resource) and various types within each. These alert categories and types are added to the Model Workspace in the form of a tree control for easier navigation and summary data visualization Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 51
  • 59. The alert view is now tab based and summarized by category / type and is context sensitive to selection within the Model Workspace for easier navigation 3.14.1.3. Work Order Centric KPI Comparisons The KPI comparison view can now be viewed as either Demand centric or Work Order Centric. Via a new dropdown option, you can now understand the impact on the work order schedule when comparing scenarios. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 52
  • 60. 3.14.1.4. Access Operation and Routings from Operation Instances This usability enhancement allows the user to perform a right click on a given operation in any of the schedule Gantt charts and easily drill down to the operation and/or routing diagrams. This avoids the user having to navigate back through to the model workspace or the “where used” properties of a resource to in order to be open an operation. 3.14.1.5. Auto-create Work Orders Directly from Demands For schedule prototyping purposes, scenario simulation purposes and/or product demonstrations, users sometimes create Work Orders directly in the PS in Work Order Editor using standard functionality. (i.e. Right click | Add Production Work Order). Once the work order is created, users usually peg these back to a given sales order. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 53
  • 61. This works well, but if there are many sales orders and the user wishes to create a work order for each demand / line item combination this could potentially take quite a bit of time. A new feature has been added to PS that allows users to automatically create Work Orders for a given sales order without even navigating to the Work Order Editor. A simple right click on a demand or a folder or a subset / mixture of folders and demands (via multi-select) allows users to automatically create a work order per demand. 3.14.1.6. Find Functionality for Model Objects Find functionality is now available in PS using “CTRL-F” via the PS toolbar by selecting Edit | Find. This will launch a “Find” dialog box which provides text based searching in the PS model and the ability to drilldown to the “found” objects. You can limit the search to the following (by chosen scenario): o All (will search all model objects listed below and their description fields as well) o Supplies and Demands only o Work Orders only o All Resources o Crews only o Machines only o Tools only o Items only o Operations only o Routings only Selecting and double clicking the result (or selecting the “Open button) will drilldown to the selected object. For example, double clicking the operation code will open the operation diagram Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 54
  • 62. 3.14.1.7. Visibility to Demand Fulfilled via Starting Inventory In previous versions of PS, if an order was fulfilled from both production and either starting inventory or a supply event, the starting inventory was not simultaneously displayed in the Production Pegging view (only the Production). This release addresses this by explicitly detailing each of the pegging relationships. This applies to materials, WIP and finished goods. The demand for “Item A” shows a green diamond at the start of horizon indicating some of the order is taken from inventory. The production below it indicates the remaining quantity is from manufacturing activities. “Material 1” is consumed in operation A and pegged to both an on-hand quantity and a purchase recommendation. “Material 2” is pegged to starting inventory and an incoming purchase order, each represented with a diamond representing incoming supply 3.14.1.8. Automatic Reconciliation of Schedule Backlog It is common to see shop floor backlog in the schedule views to notify the scheduler that the shop floor is behind and action should be taken to reconcile the situation. There are a variety of different scenarios which cause backlog in the schedule for example: o Work order operations having a Firm Start Date, Firm End Date, or Firm Date Range in the past, o >1 work order operations having an Active Status on the work order routing operation step which conflicts with another work order o >1 work order operations with a “firm” status with overlapping date ranges For example, in the screen capture below, the area shaded in yellow indicates a point in time that occurs prior to the horizon start. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 55
  • 63. While this provides excellent feedback to users, it also introduces another issue – the operations can not actually be run in the past. Prior to this release of PS, reconciling the schedule was primarily performed by using Cut | Paste in the Resource Gantt. While this method worked well, it could potentially be somewhat cumbersome to do when there are many operations running behind and/or many resources in the model. This release of PS provides the user with a right click menu item “Enforce Horizon Start” on resources. Enabling this flag (or setting it in the data model) and performing a repair solve will “push forward” all operations on that resource to the start of the horizon while maintaining operation sequence and at the same time respecting upstream / downstream precedence constraints. Enabling this flag (or setting it in the data model) and performing a coldsolve will accomplish the same thing without user intervention (i.e. Auto-reconciliation). For example, in the diagram below, the operations running on Die Bonder 2 are running behind. The user selects Die Bonder 2, performs a right click, selects “Enforce Horizon Start” and performs a repair solve (or cold solve). (Users are also able to multi-select and enable this flag for all highlighted resources). The operations on the applicable resource are “pushed forward”, maintaining the original sequence. This can also be persisted in the data model for a given resource as well. Operations running in the past will be pushed to start at the beginning of the horizon. The sequence of operations on the resource will not be changed. In many cases, the operations running behind will be one of several operations that are contained within a routing. Since routings have precedence constraints between operations, moving operations from the past to horizon start may have consequences on other operations in the routing. Any upstream or downstream pegged operations of this operation will be pushed forward (if precedence constraints dictate). 3.14.1.9. Batchable Resources A “Batchable” resource can be described as a machine / oven / kiln (or similar) that can process one or more items simultaneously, but only if they share 1 or more similar “Attributes” (such as Temperature, Color, Duration etc) and “Attribute Value” such as 1 Hour @ 400 Degrees Typically, these resources have several “spots” or something equivalent in them. Items when processes within these resources consume 1 or more of these spots. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 56
  • 64. This enhancement to PS enables the following behavior: o Allows users to explicitly define a given resource as “Batchable” along with a minimum and maximum spot capacity o Define a pull forward window to allow a resource to be filled to it’s minimum spot capacity o Allow users to explicitly associate 1 or more user defined attributes and attribute values to an item. T o Automatic grouping of operations on a batchable resource by attribute o If this is 1 attribute (such as temperature), all operations will be grouped together of the same temperature up to the max capacity of the resource. o If the user groups by more than 1 attribute (for example temperature and duration), this implies that all operations sharing the same duration and temperature will be run together to the max capacity of the resource. o Manually move operations between batches if desired or manually move an entire batch. For example, if a sequence on a resource is scheduled to be 10 Hours at 500 Degrees followed by 12 Hours at 400 Degrees, the user can switch the order (via cut/paste, drag/drop, re-sequence in the resource gantt). For example, the Resource Gantt below illustrates several ovens (CC4101 -> CC4105). Each of these ovens constrain a variety of operations which are running at the same time and grouped by temperature and duration. The summary colour at the oven level indicates spot utilization. Bubble help indicates the attributes of the batch and one can utilize an option in the Toolbar which allows you to highlight only certain batches if you wish (in orange). Batches are of course applicable to regular manual scheduling activities. You can cut, paste entire batches between ovens, move operations from batch to another, resequence batches and even manually move operations into another batch which does not share the same attributes (you will be provided with a warning…). 3.14.1.10. Consistent Resource Assignment within a Portion of a Routing Alternate resources in a given manufacturing operation are very common amongst most Production Scheduling customer models. These alternate resources are modeled via the use of resource sets. In many cases, this resource set recurs in an upstream or downstream operation(s). In many cases, it is imperative that once a resource is chosen in Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 57
  • 65. an upstream operation, it must also be chosen in a downstream operation. This works well in PS and previously was a routing wide configurable option known as “Consistent Resource Assignment”. Users expressed the desire to be able to perform consistent resource assignment within only a selected group of operations within this routing - for example, operation steps 10, 20 and 30 must run on the same resource but steps 40,50 and 60 even though share a common resource with their preceding operations can run on the alternate. This enhancement in PS allows users to be able to configure PS to do just this. Consider the following manufacturing routing. To make item “A”, it must through a setup, run and cleanup operation where it is then cooled. The item passes through a recursive process - Setup(2), Run(2), and Cleanup(2). With the exception of the Cooling operation, all operations run on either M1 or M2, as illustrated for the first Run operation.  When the first setup operation occurs on either M1 or M2, resource assignment must be the same for the following 2 operation steps.  If M1 is chosen in the setup operation, it must also be chosen in the run and cleanup. (You don’t want to cleanup a machine that you didn’t run on).  The cooling process occurs in a staging area. However, after the cooling operation takes place, the same logic occurs for the next recurrence of the setup, run and cleanup operations, but a different alternate can be chosen.  The first three steps must run on the same machine and the last three steps must also run on the same machine. The user opens up the properties of the routing and creates 2 distinct group and assigns the first 3 operations to the first group and the last 3 operations to the second group as illustrated. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 58
  • 66. The user performs a solve. The first three operations are run on M1. After the cooling operation, the remaining three operations are run on M2. This could of course all be on M1 or all of M2 or in reverse order. The point is the operations in the groups share the same resource.  If operations are not assigned to groups, they are permitted to be run on any given resource.  If the user is using All of Sets (i.e. >1 Resource such as a Machine1 and Tool1 OR a Machine2 and Tool2), consistent resource assignment applies to the group. i.e. The group must be the same.  When migrating a model from previous versions, the import will detect if a routing has consistent resource assignment selected and auto-create a group and assign all operations to it. 3.14.1.11. Resource-specific Cycle Times for Campaign Run Optimization PS provides the ability to define: o Minimum cycle times in various bucket sizes. In a previous release of PS, cycle size was either a Shift, Day or a Week. Cycle sizes are now flexible. For example, a cycle can be 2 weeks, 4 days etc. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 59
  • 67. If the resource specific cycle size checkbox is selected, planners can enable this flag by CRO resource. Therefore, different lines in the plant can be on their own cycle times rather than having to adhere to global cycle. 3.14.1.12. Minimize Work Order Schedule Infeasibilities As Production Scheduling is a finite capacity scheduling application, some situations can occur which would result in an infeasible production schedule. These situations are always being monitored and resolved through improved data validation, alerting and solver handling of problematic inputs, and has drastically improved throughout the past several releases. This release continues to improve on this theme. For example, it is quite common and sometimes unavoidable to have: o >1 work order operation firmed on a same single capacity resource with overlapping date / times. o A firm date range on a work order operation which is shorter than total operation run / elapsed time In prior versions of PS: o If the dates fell within the fixed time fence, PS would reconcile the infeasibility and alert the planner that shop floor backlog exists o If these work order operations were outside of the fixed time fence this resulted in an infeasible schedule. o In this release there is an added capability for the solver to resolve conflicts of this type outside of the fixed time fence if necessary to avoid this situation. For example, take the following 2 work orders which are both firmed at the same time outside of the FTF: Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 60
  • 68. Solved in a previous version – the schedule was infeasible and the planner was provided with an error message indicative of such. In this release, the schedule is feasible. The highest priority work order is moved to start earlier in the horizon. Supporting alerts are also provided to the user to indicate the firm date violation. 3.14.1.13. Disable Units of Effort for Setup and Cleanup Operations PS has a differentiating feature introduced several releases ago which provides the ability to schedule Work Orders according to their individual “unit of effort.” This feature cross references the routing template to “break down” work order operations into the lot multiples specified on the routing. The feature can be enabled as either a global option applying to all routings, or the user can specify the feature for specific routings. For example, if this feature is leveraged, a work order is scheduled to release inventory according to every lot multiple. In the example below, inventory is moved between operations in 25 unit increments – the work order has only 3 operations listed on it, but PS will break it down according to the routing lot multiple.  Inventory Production and Consumption is accurate  Makespan is accurate  Resource usage is accurate In some cases, it is quite possible that the first operation may be a setup operation and the last operation may be a cleanup operation. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 61
  • 69. In this case, the setup & cleanup operations only need to be executed once as opposed to three times. This release of PS has the ability to specify an operation of type “Setup, Production or Cleanup”. Setup and Cleanup operations will not be broken down to their units of effort. 3.14.1.14. Resource “All of” Sets PS provides excellent resource offloading functionality within an operation (e.g. Machine 1 can be substituted for Machine 2, Crew 1 for Crew 2, etc.) via the use of “Resource Sets”. This type of set can be referred to as a “one of” type of set, meaning one of the resources within the set must be used. This release adds a new set type on operations that support resource replacement “groups” within PS ( an “All of” type of set). This means that resource exclusivity relationships can now be defined directly within a given operation as opposed to having to use Operation Sets. For example, Operator 1 can only run Line 1 and Line 3. Operator 2 can only run Line 3 and Line 2. The new operation structure within PS is depicted below. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 62
  • 70. The work order editor has a new column to indicate the name of the “all of” set. This is where manual overrides can be made to which set is attached to the work order. If an alternate set has a different number of resources, rows will be added / subtracted as appropriate. Paste targets in the Gantt charts are consistent with previous versions of PS. Offloading to an alternate set will show the target in orange. Pasting to a different time on the same set will be highlighted in light blue. A “1 of” resource set can contain a mixture of “All of” sets, plus single resources. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 63
  • 71. The “All of Sets” are shown in the Production Pegging View. The operations on the solver selected “All of Set” is summarized on the set name, so the user will have visibility into which “All of” set has been chosen without expanding all of the sets. From an offloading perspective, The overall approach is virtually the same as previous versions of PS, but the offloading calculation must be applied to all members of the set. If any one of the resources within an “All of” set have their threshold violated, all resources will be offloaded. If any one of the resources in the target “All of” set have their offload thresholds violated prior to the offloading taking place, the operation will not be offloaded to that set. At this point, an additional alternate will be evaluated - if no alternates have available capacity, no offloading should take place. If the primary is significantly overloaded, offloading will still occur to less loaded (but still overloaded) alternates. This effectively spreads the load and will help get orders met as quickly as possible. The PS “Consistent Resource Assignment” feature is also impacted by this enhancement. Prior to this release, Consistent Resource Assignment across routing steps was based on a single resource. If “Line 1” was chosen in Step 1 of a routing, it must also be chosen in a subsequent step. In this release, Consistent Resource Assignment applies to members of the “all of” set. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 64
  • 72. 3.14.1.15. Hard Links Between Work Orders This enhancement allows a “many to many” relationship amongst Work Orders along with the ability for the user to specify precedence constraints between these Work Orders. This is handy if a specific sequence is required between several work orders. The business requirements for this enhancement are best explained with a simple example. Assume the following manufacturing process. To make Item A, the following routing steps take place. The lot multiple across the manufacturing routing is 25 units. Item A is produced by Operation C. Operation A consumes an inventory “Material A”. Material A is a subassembly also manufactured in the plant as per the following process. The lot multiple across this routing is also 25 units. The material is produced by Operation C1. Assume the user creates a work order for the finished good and the material (50 units each). These Work Orders are related through inventory, so will generally schedule JIT and have some degree of overlap as illustrated below. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 65
  • 73. If the user wishes to explicitly relate these Work Orders to one another (for example for lot control, quality reasons etc), they can specify the relationship in the work order editor in the new “Related Work Orders” tab. Precedence relationships (to facilitate a cooling process, inspection etc) can also be specified, along with min / max separation constraints. Assume the user populates “Starts After End” with a minimum separation time of 5 Hours. When “Units of Effort” is used, the 5 hour minimum separation is applied to the pegged work order routing instances. In this case, the Work Orders are for 50 units each (remember, the routing has a lot multiple of 25 units), therefore there are 2 routing instances and separation is applied twice. The relationships between the Work Orders can be “many to many”. • A given work order can be linked to many “next” work orders • A given work order can have many “previous” work orders. Manual Scheduling within PS will have all appropriate precedence relationships respected. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 66
  • 74. 3.14.1.16. Dynamic Throughput Rates on Resources Some customers vary their production rates fairly dynamically and frequently. For example, the speed of a line can change daily or weekly based on available labor. The net effect of dynamic rate changes is simple – they make a given manufacturing operation take more or less time to complete in a given time interval. There are various reasons why the speed of a production line may change which may include (but by no means are limited to) areas such as: • trial manufacturing • process changes • line improvements • labour constraints • new product development • temperature / humidity variations This release of PS provides the user with the ability to specify dynamic rates on a resource (crew, machine, tool). For example, Packing Line #1 produces items, A, B, C and D. At “normal” speeds, it produces product at a rate of 100 units per hour. In this example, Item D is produced in runs of 1700 units per week. Assume due to a labour constraint, the packer now runs at the following throughput rates: • 80% in the 1st week • 100% in the 2nd week • 150% in the 3rd week The user navigates to the Packer resource properties to the “Throughput tab” and defines the appropriate dynamic percentages. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 67
  • 75. The speed at which the items are produced can clearly be seen in Gantt chart by the operation length as well as by looking at the steepness of the slope of the item graph for a given item. If >1 resource on the operation also has a dynamic throughput range, the “lowest” value for a given time interval “wins”. For example, if an operation requires both “Packer 1” and “Tool 1” and they have competing dynamic throughput rates and effective ranges. In a resource set, resources can have different throughput rates for different date ranges. If production is offloaded to an alternate resource with a different throughput, the operation duration on the alternate resource will reflect the new throughput. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 68
  • 76. If an operation is moved to a timeslot via manual scheduling (Cut | Paste, Resequencing, Remove Idle etc) that has a different throughput rate defined, the operation duration should change according to the throughput in effect. If the user offloads an operation manually to a different resource with a different rate, the operation duration will change according to the throughput in effect. If the user changes the rate on a resource and runs a repair solve, the repair solve will recognize and change the duration of the operation accordingly. 3.14.1.17. PS Data Connector Port to Sun, HP and AIX The PS SCBM / Oracle EBS data connector now runs on the following platforms:  Windows (previously supported)  Linux (previously supported)  Sun (New)  HP (New)  AIX (New) This allows for the PS connector to be deployed on a central server apart from PS if desired. All command syntaxes stays the same 3.14.1.18. Export Selected Model Data During Schedule Publish As part of the File | Publish process, users now have the ability to publish the PS model or chosen objects of the data model in XML format. (i.e. changeover rules, groups, crews, machines, tools, operations etc). This is useful if PS is to be the system of record for any data that is not available within the ERP system.  The next time a model is imported into PS, integration processes could be extended to reference the various data model elements exported from the previous scheduling session which could amend to the new model prior to import A new tab in the Publish Profiles allows users to define which data objects to publish Whenever the Publish Process is called (whether in batch or interactively), the chosen data will be exported to a user named XML file.  Interactively, the published model is based off of the approved schedule Since the schedule publish process batch file points to a named scenario, you can export the model from any given scenario which may or may not be the approved schedule. Aspects of the model can be output to a user defined filename – any object within the model can be output to this specific file. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 69
  • 77. 3.14.1.19. PS XML Model – Unique Extension The PS XML data files which can be imported and exported now have an additional extension available. The PS XML non compressed file can be the standard .xml extension or uniquely to PS as an .ops. The .ops file is still standard XML format, but will launch PS directly upon being double clicked. The PS XML compressed file can be the standard .xml.gz extension or uniquely to PS as an .opz. The .opz file is still standard compressed XML format, but will launch PS directly upon being double clicked. The icon for either is the PS standard icon. 3.14.1.20. Enhanced Auto-generated Routings The list below outlines a few typical scenarios that cause “Auto-Generation” of Operations and Routing templates based on work order structure within Production Scheduling:  Work orders which were generated in a “Configurator” program. Essentially, Work Orders are dynamically created and passed to PS. No corresponding routing exists in PS.  Non-standard crews, machines or tools included on the work order bill of resource.  Contrary to the above, sometimes the work order would be missing crews, machines or tools on work order operations.  Non-standard items included on the work order bill of material.  Missing items on the work order bill of material  Additional operations included on the work order routing.  Missing operations on the work order routing (for example, Oracle EBS does not pass “Closed” work order operations to PS).  Operation Sets specified on the work order routing Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 70
  • 78. In a previous release of PS, a new feature was added to PS which removed the PS dependency on having a routing template pre-created in the model for every work order in the application. For those scenarios outlined, PS dynamically cross references the work order routing against the routing template during the import process. If a work order meets on of the problematic scenarios outlined earlier, one can expect to see a newly created routing which directly corresponds to the work order in question. If operations differ from their standard templates, a newly created operation will be present in the routing as well. When PS was generating this routing and operation templates, it was not reading the precedence constraints on the work order routing between the operations, nor were the resource sets being constructed. This release of PS has enhanced logic in the import process which addresses these 2 issues. When generating the precedence constraints for the auto-generated routing, the import now looks at the operation codes and cross references the precedence constraints on the routing. If the work order has different precedence constraints than the routing template, the precedence constraints as specified on the work order routing will be used when the auto-generated routing is created. Similarly for resource sets - the operation template is reference to reconstruct the resource sets. 3.14.1.21. Selective Work Order Release to Production After a user approves a schedule within PS, the general business process is to publish the schedule back to ERP. The publish process within PS uses a “Release” timefence to filter out work orders from the release process. If a work order starts before the end of this timefence, it will be included in the release. If the user wishes to include / exclude individual work orders from this process (regardless of start time), this was not possible prior to this release. This new release provides a new mechanism for the user to be able to individually select which work orders are released back to ERP. For example, after analyzing the schedule, the user approves the schedule he/she is happy with. The user then performs a right click on the scenario name and selects a new option “Edit Work Order Release”. This launches a new dialog view which lists all work orders and their various attributes. The Publish Profile selected has a Release Horizon. Any Work Orders starting within this release horizon will be auto-selected. The user can override this if desired. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 71
  • 79. 3.14.2. Release 12.1.2 3.14.2.1. Resource Business Objectives From a resource perspective, Production Scheduling generically considers all crew, machine, tool capacity and calendar constraints simultaneously when sequencing operations. Focusing and resolving the most critical constraints in the scheduling horizon has been regarded as the most effective scheduling strategy to resolve multi- stage floating bottleneck problems when sequencing operations. Addressing the most critical constraints first breaks down sequencing problems into smaller sub-problems which are generally “easier” to resolve. However, it sometimes is desirable for users to be able to dictate to the Production Scheduling solver which resources to focus on first. Currently in Production Scheduling, users can dictate to the solver engine which resource or group of resources should be focused on and in what order - essentially enabling scheduling in an incremental fashion via some simple configuration in the application. However, solver objectives cannot be set changed each stage – they are set at a global level. The scope of this enhancement is to allow different solver objectives by solve stage. For example, one may wish to optimize changeovers on the injection molder, then mix the upstream materials JIT, then immediately pack the kits and assemblies from the molding using a prebuild solve strategy. This approach optimizes the bottleneck stage while minimizing WIP between upstream / downstream stages. This enhancement will allow users to: 1) Set solver objectives by group of resources (i.e. a Stage) 2) Insert breakpoints where the user can review solve progress at any given stage (and even refine the schedule as appropriate via manual scheduling and then resume the larger solve process). Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 72
  • 80. 3) Setup Multi-stage Campaign Run Optimization (CRO) – users will have the ability the utilize the CRO algorithm in a multi-stage fashion provided the stages have decoupling inventory and the CRO resource is not recursive. This enhancement will have many benefits including: • Increase PS market applicability • Address business where multi-stage strategies are necessary • Minimization of Work In Progress Inventory (Directly address make | store | pack requirements) • Reduce cost of ownership for our customers • Directly enabling user scheduling strategy this eliminating potential complex workarounds to achieve desired results • Allow multi-stage use of the Campaign Run Optimization Algorithm which also provides: • Multi-stage routing offloading • Improved alternate resource selection • Multi-level SDS minimization and min run length 3.14.2.2. Production Scheduling as a Web Service Call Production Scheduling has been enhanced to be able to be called as a service - the solver and application have been decoupled such that the import and solve process can optionally be run on the server – this includes Linux, Sun Solaris, HP-UX, and AIX platforms. The user interface continues to run on the planners windows client (includes support for Vista). This enables Production Scheduling users to have their models presolved on the server – saving time and improving efficiency. It also allows for batch solving of multiple plans (i.e. Automation of the “what if” process). The server side functionality creates a deployable solved model which includes import and solver statistics in log files which are all downloaded to the client desktop on planner request. This enhancement also includes improved application status logging and filtering - including access to various event statuses and solver statistics log from within Production Scheduling for events which took place on the server. 3.14.2.3. Undo Functionality for Manual Scheduling Manual Scheduling in Production Scheduling includes a variety of activities such as:  Cut/Paste  Resequence Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 73
  • 81. Remove idle  Change durations of operation instances  Change start or end times of operations  Change calendar events in the Gantt charts (add / remove / change)  Change resource assignment (i.e. manually offload)  Fixing / Unfixing operations (single or multiple operations)  Change lead times for Purchase Order Recommendations. Following each of these actions, there is a repair based solve action to institute the change and “repair” any upstream / downstream ramifications this change may have caused. However it is possible that the user may not accept the repaired schedule or simply made a mistake when implementing this change. This enhancement to Production Scheduling provides the ability to “Undo” these changes. The Undo action reverts back to the previous “solve state” prior to the change. Examples include: Action: {manual change} | UNDO Result: Will undo the manual change Action: {manual change} | Repair | UNDO Result: Will undo the repair and manual change Action: {manual change} | {manual change} | UNDO | … Result: Will undo both manual changes Action: {manual change} | {manual change} | Repair | UNDO Result: Will undo the repair and manual changes Action: {manual change} | Repair | {manual change} | Repair | UNDO Result: Will undo the 2nd repair and 2nd manual change Action: {manual change} | Repair | {manual change} | Repair | UNDO | UNDO Result: Will undo the both repairs and both manual changes Undo also applies to another new feature in Production Scheduling (Resource Business Objectives). Included in this feature is the ability to solve groups of resources in a “Stage” and perform manual scheduling activities between stages (i.e. At a breakpoint) in the solve process. Undo can be performed within this context as well. This includes the ability to undo manual changes in the stage itself as well as to completely undo a given “stage” of the solve process - upon which the solution will revert back to the previous solved “stage”. For example: Action: {solve stage | breakpoint} | manual change | Repair | Undo Result: Will undo the manual change Action: {solve stage} | {solve stage | breakpoint} Undo Result: Will undo the 2nd solve stage – result will revert back to the first solve stage Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 74
  • 82. 3.14.2.4. Attribute Based Sequence Dependent Setups This enhancement to Production Scheduling is two-fold: 1) Improves the current sequence dependent setup rule representation to be Attribute based rather than having to specify rules by operation code or group. Users will now have the ability to specify changeover rules by attribute type / value. For example, providing the ability to specify a Flavour Changeover (Attribute) which includes Apple -> Blueberry (Attribute Values) etc. The Production Scheduling integration to Oracle EBS will use Setup Type as an attribute and various values associated with Setup Type as the appropriate Attribute Values. 2) Extend sequence dependent setups to Batchable resources, which currently do not have these setups either represented or optimized. Operations and Groups will have attributes assigned to them. Changeover rules specified by attribute will automatically associated all operations sharing the same attribute. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 75
  • 83. This enhancement to Production Scheduling also allows the user to specify if changeovers can be concurrent or sequential if multiple attributes are specified and can be performed at once. For example – if I am performing a size changeover, can the flavor changeover be performed at the same time or does it have to follow the size changeover? 3.14.2.5. Visualization of Campaign Run Optimization Cycle Boundaries This enhancement allows users to explicitly visualize manufacturing cycle boundaries when using Campaign Run Optimization. This provides for improved visibility to changeover patterns in and across manufacturing cycle boundaries. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 76
  • 84. CRO Manufacturing Cycle Boundaries shown in brown. 3.14.2.6. New Alert Type and Drilldowns A new “Resource Utilization” alert has been introduced to indicate when resources which are not part of a bottleneck resource group have capacity violations (when capacity constraints are relaxed) Drilldowns to the Gantt charts from all resource alerts are included this new alert as well. When using Batchable resources, drilldowns are also now provided from the “Minimum Batch Violation” alerts as previous versions did not allow this. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 77
  • 85. 3.14.2.7. Drilldowns from the Work Order Editor to the Gantt Charts Additional drilldowns introduced in the application make finding work orders in the Gantt charts much easier. The drilldown from the work order editor which is launched via right click in the editor from the operation code takes the user directly to either the Production Pegging view, the Resource or Operation Gantt views. Drilldown from the Work Order Editor highlights the selected operation and performs a context sensitive zoom as well. Drilldown zooms and highlights the application operation: Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 78
  • 86. 3.14.2.8. Mass Change on Items and Resources For mass change simulations, Production Scheduling now provides the ability to mass edit item and resource properties. All item properties and resource properties can easily be changed simply by multi-selecting the appropriate items or resources in the model workspace and invoking the “change” function. Change is specific to the scenario and session only for simulation and scenario comparison purposes (changes are not sent back to ERP) Changing Item Data via right click on >1 items and selection of “Change” in the menu: Mass Change of Resource Data: Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 79
  • 87. 3.14.3. Release 12.1.3 3.14.3.1. Maintenance Work Order Scheduling The scheduling of maintenance resources at a maintenance depot can be quite complex. Several new constructs have been introduced into PS to allow for this: Visits – This new data construct allows users to associate one or more work orders, where the work orders will fall inside Visit envelope dates such as the anticipated aircraft arrival into a maintenance depot and the request date associated with the completion of the Visit. Milestones – These provide the ability to specify logical groupings of work orders within a Visit. The combination of Visits and Milestones provides a capability to define task hierarchies that flexibly group work orders together in both concurrent and sequential patterns where work can diverge and converge. Work Breakdown Structure – Several new key attributes have been added to work orders which can be used for organizing and filtering work orders. The scheduling of visits must take into consideration numerous constraints. It must account for: • Visit start / end dates • Visit milestones • Task hierarchies • Crew, machine, tool, and material constraints • Operation / work order precedence constraints • Grouping of work based on work breakdown structure To support these requirements, the following key capabilities are now available in Oracle Production Scheduling: Collection of Oracle cMRO Work Orders Production Scheduling now optionally collects Oracle CMRO maintenance work orders. New Operational Data Store Tables for Data Augmentation Six new tables, housing information such as visits, work breakdown structure, work order relationships, and milestones, have been added into the Operational Data Store (ODS) as this information is required to properly schedule cMRO work orders. Currently, this information is not available to standard planning collections from cMRO. An API into these new tables to augment collected data has been added to complement the existing collections framework as PS requires this information to generate a maintenance schedule. The overall architecture is represented in the following diagram. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 80
  • 88. Support for Visits, Milestones, and Complex Task Hierarchy Relationships Visits have been added to Oracle Production Scheduling to allow for scheduling, tracking, and grouping of tasks in the form of work orders and milestones. Visits and milestones are presented in various views in Production Scheduling and allow the planner to leverage the rich set of existing functionality to review and refine the schedule. Visits and milestones also present new constraints which govern the production schedule that is generated. Advanced Work Order Filtering Work order filters can be used to facilitate the review and analysis of the schedule and allow the planner to “slice and dice” the data in the various Gantt, Utilization, and Work Order views. This feature allows the planner to hone in on specific tasks and answer questions such as “show me all work orders in stage 3a from July 2-July 4 utilizing the Advanced Airframe and Power crew which are firm”. While this feature has been added to facilitate cMRO workflows, it will benefit many of our existing manufacturing customers as they will also be able to filter on many of the existing constructs already available in work orders. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 81
  • 89. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 82
  • 90. Representation of Work Breakdown Structure The logical grouping of work can be accomplished by leveraging the Work Breakdown Structure constructs in PS. A Display Parameter tab has been augmented in the Plan options screen with new data that can be used to create logical groupings of work orders. The work breakdown structure is populated as work order attributes and can be viewed in the work order editor. This allows for advanced filtering in Work Order Filters where they can be used to group work orders in the various views when analyzing the schedule. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 83
  • 91. Once the model is reviewed and analyzed in Production Scheduling, work order dates generated by the schedule and can than be released back to cMRO for execution. The solution may be applicable for other industries with similar requirements, but focus has been on solving aircraft short term maintenance scheduling problems. 3.14.3.2. Disable Multiple Release from the Same Plan for the Same Order This enhancement allows Production Scheduling to keep track of work orders which are sent back to source as “Released” and disable subsequent release from the same plan to Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 84
  • 92. prevent creating duplicate supplies in the ERP system. This process functions per the procedure below: • The user generates a plan and downloads to the client per standard procedures. • The user solves the model (if not already solved on the server). • The user then saves the schedule as a .dxt file (PS persistence for solved models). This is a key step, as re-importing from XML source will not preserve this information. • Once the scheduler is happy with the plan, the user will then approve or “Release” selected Work Orders to source and publish to ASCP as she/he deems appropriate (no change to existing functionality). • After this action, the user will not be able to release the same work orders from the application as the checkbox indicating which work orders to release will be grayed out. The user is also free to close the model and reopen the .dxt file as necessary. Illustration: The user selects the first four work orders for release: The user “releases” back to source: On subsequent navigation to the Release View, the Work Order Release Checkbox is no longer selectable for those work orders: Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 85
  • 93. If the user does want to release the same work orders again for some reason, they can open the original XML file that was downloaded from integration. • Any work orders not previously marked as released will still be available for release or publish (as planned orders) into ASCP. 3.14.3.3. User Defined Ideal Sequence Production Scheduling natively provides the ability to dynamically calculate an ideal operation sequence for Campaign Run Optimized Resources per manufacturing cycle. This is based on changeover cost or time (user specified) in the Scenario / Solver Options. The changeover matrix contains the applicable penalty factors of moving between different operations producing different items. The solver performs an evaluation of these penalties and computes the ideal sequence on this resource. CRO then optimally computes the tradeoff between carrying inventory, stocking out, incurring changeovers, using alternate machines, alternate routings or violating safety stock in and across manufacturing cycles and may optionally pull work forward to delay operations appropriately. In many environments, users simply wish to dictate this order of operations to the solver in lieu of having to construct a penalty matrix to influence this. While this is possible to configure using costs, this enhancement allows users to specify the sequence operations should be scheduled in CRO according to attribute. This is an alternate sequencing strategy compared to the current CRO sequencing strategies of Cost or Time, and is available for CRO resources only. Solver options are enhanced to indicate the Run Sequence as User Defined (by solve stage, as illustrated, or in the global solver options): Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 86
  • 94. The mechanism in which the “ideal” sequence is defined is by selecting and sorting of associated attributes and their attribute values on CRO resources in the model. For example, take attributes “Size” and “Grade”. Within “Size” there are 1/4 Inch, 1/3 Inch and 1/4 Inch as attribute values. Within the “Grade” attribute, there are Grades A and B. Assume the user defined Ideal Sequence is to cycle by size and grade within the size, as outlined in the following example: 1/4 Inch-Grade A -> 1/4 Inch Grade B -> 1/3 Inch-Grade A -> 1/3 Inch Grade B -> 1/2 Inch-Grade A -> 1/2 Inch Grade B. This would be setup in Production Scheduling in the Attributes tab where attributes are associated to resources. E s s e n t i a l l y , t h e “order” in which the selected attributes and attribute values in the right column are structured in the UI dictates the ideal sequence of operations (the operations must be associated to these attributes). If Grade was more important than size, then the user could move the Grade above the Size Attribute. The sequence would then cycle by Grade and then Size within the Grade. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 87
  • 95. This is a very powerful tool to help make sequencing decisions and reduce changeovers in the model. 3.14.3.4. Supply Tolerancing The Production Scheduling integration infrastructure to Oracle EBS and JD Edwards EnterpriseOne uses “Work Orders” as the vehicle to communicate production requirements and schedules between systems. When a PS plan is created, it will have Work Orders as a source of supply. Demands are created via Sales Orders, Transfer Orders Out, Forecasts, and Internal Sales Orders, etc. Since PS is a scheduling application, typically one would assume there are sufficient supply quantities generated in the form of work orders to meet the stated demand requirements for the organization being scheduled by the time you are actually scheduling your facility. However, in some cases it is acceptable for demands to be shorted by a certain quantity or percentage without the generation of additional supply requirements. For example, if you have supply (say an on-hand inventory of 134,999) and have an order quantity of 135,000 (finished good or intermediate), there may not be an additional work order created for the extra 1 unit in ASCP (lot sized of course) due to a supply tolerancing feature it has (this can be at any level in the bill of material). However, PS does not have this explicit supply tolerancing feature. The net result is that PS may recommend extra production as PS sees the need to balance supply and demand down to the unit. PS naturally uses the routing lot size to recommend new production - in some cases, this could be very large (such as 100,000lbs per run) and completely unnecessary as it is perfectly acceptable to ship 1lb less than order size. Instantiating net new production disrupts other production runs, steals capacity and materials – schedule quality is inevitably diminished. A feature has been added to Production Scheduling to be able to essentially “shut off” any PS created net new production suggestions to avoid these situations. This exists in Tools | Options | Global Settings: Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 88
  • 96. With this flag enabled, there will be no net new production recommendations generated at any level in the BOM (i.e. only work order supply production will be scheduled). If there is insufficient work order supply, inventory will be automatically added to prevent levels from falling below zero (i.e. Demand is permitted to be shorted). A PS log message is generated to indicate what inventory quantity adjustments were made. Utilizing this feature assumes work order supply is sufficient to meet demand. 3.14.3.5. Control Application of Purchase Item Order Multiples Beyond Lead Time Items marked as “Purchased” in Production Scheduling must be associated with a source of supply (i.e. a Supplier) and a corresponding order multiple must be modeled. It is key to note that Production Scheduling is not intended to plan procurement specifically, but to be constrained by lead time only. Beyond lead time, supply for these purchased items is essentially unconstrained – therefore the purchase item multiple is not especially relevant. However, customers do find these order multiples to be useful for various types of modeling approaches. A feature has been added to be able to control whether or not purchase item multiples are respected beyond supplier lead time or not. Keeping these “relaxed” helps solve performance and is generally recommended. In the PS Plan Solver Options, there is a flag entitled “Relax Purchase Items Beyond Lead Time”. Default is set to ‘Yes”. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 89
  • 97. When this flag is enabled, the order multiple is internally set to a very large value and effectively ignored beyond lead time – one will see the addition of a new red line in the item graph to represent the time of the item. Beyond the lead time, the item graph is shaded to indicate infinite supply. If the flag is set to “No”, the item graph is displayed taking into account the order multiples. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 90
  • 98. 3.14.3.6. Improved Operation Status Logic in OPM integration If an OPM Batch Operation has a “firm start” resource but is still in pending state, the PS integration code was previously interpreting this operation as Active when importing into Production Scheduling. In order to address this, VCP collections introduced a new column entitled “operation_status”. The OPM system will populate the operation status as Pending, WIP or Closed. The corresponding PS integration code has been modified to read this new status from this new column to set an operation as Open, Active or Closed in Production Scheduling. 3.14.3.7. Advanced Work Order Filtering This release provides new work order filtering capabilities which allows planners to further “slice and dice” data in the various Gantt, Utilization, and Pegging views in a multi-dimensional fashion and filter the content of these views. This feature allows the planner to hone in on specific areas of the schedule only – for example “show me all work orders in from October 25 – November 5 running on Resource (or Group) which have a Firm Start status”. The results are previewed in the bottom of the filtering view and planners can drill-down to the Work Order Editor directly from here as well if desired. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 91
  • 99. A new “Work Order Filter” view has been added to PS which is accessible off of the toolbar. Selecting the icon launch the filtering window. The user then inputs criteria. Selecting “OK” will filter out the various Gantt Charts. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Production Scheduling 92
  • 100. You can create as many filters as you like which are specific for various analysis purposes and even save them locally as a file (and send to your colleagues). This is a very useful feature which provides a very advanced level of filtering capability into an already rich user interface. 3.14.4. Release 12.2 There are no new features in Oracle Production Scheduling in Release 12.2. 3.15. Oracle Rapid Planning 3.15.1. Product Overview Oracle Rapid Planning is a fast, heuristic based engine that generates supply chain plans that span the enterprise manufacturing and distribution networks covering the supply chain from supplies to customers. Rapid Planning delivers fast, comprehensive plans that respect material and resource capacity constraints. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 93
  • 101. Oracle Rapid Planning provides users an ability to simulate and quickly evaluate impacts of various changes in demand and supply conditions. It allows planners to evaluate the consequences of these changes and also compare and contrast various alternative courses of action based upon user configurable metrics. Rapid Planning leverages the integration capabilities of the Value Chain Planning suite which means it can be deployed and integrated out-of-the-box with Oracle E-Business Suite or with heterogeneous back-end systems. Rapid Planning is integrated with Oracle E-Business Suite R12.1 and R11i10. Rapid Planning utilizes the proven Advanced Planning collections architecture to integrate your source system reference and transaction data to the Rapid Planning engine. 3.15.2. Release 12.1.3 3.15.2.1. Fast Simulation Oracle Rapid Planning uses an in-memory engine that can very quickly react and recompute the impacts of any user changes and report, in real time, the consequences across the supply chain. It also re-calculates the exceptions, key performance indicators to reflect these impacts. Rapid Planning supports input of simulation changes to master data like items, resources, bills of materials, routing operations in two ways: • Change the master data inside a particular plan and re-solve • Change the master data in a simulation set for repetitive use in more than one plan The planning engine can be invoked in three different modes • With snapshot and complete replan • Without snapshot, but complete replan • Without snapshot, but replan only incremental changes 3.15.2.2. Flexible User Interface This application enables a completely new rich-client user interface built using 11gR1 Fusion Middleware technologies and supports configurable workspaces, flexible layouts, dynamic tabs, etc. to make the user experience very productive as well as easy to use. 3.15.2.3. Simulation Sets Oracle Rapid Planning makes simulations very easy through the powerful feature of simulation sets. A simulation set is a collection of changes to the attributes of any of the following master data entities. • Items • End Item Substitution relationships • Resources • Routings and operations • Routing Operation Networks • Bill of Materials, components and substitutes • Resource Availability • Manufacturing Order Resource Requirements • Manufacturing Order Operation Networks • Calendars Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 94
  • 102. Supplier capacity This feature enables planners to do “what-if” analysis without having to make these changes permanent or without the need to make these changes in the source ERP systems and re-collect to see their impacts. This saves a lot of time and effort for the planners. These simulation sets can then be referenced in different plans through a plan option. 3.15.2.4. Mass Edits Users can make quickly make updates on a large number of rows (for example, increase the post-processing leadtime of all items in category ‘ABC’ by 10%) through the mass- edit feature. This feature is supported for almost all entities like items, resources, supplies, demands, etc. Users can update using various operators like “set value to”, “increase by”, “decrease by”, “increasy by %”, “decrease by %”, etc. Users can undo the simulation changes at an attirbute-level by using “set value to original” operator to revert to the original value. 3.15.2.5. Plan Comparisons Oracle Rapid Planning allows users to quickly make multiple copies and then use them as alternatives for corrective actions. Once the plans are run, users can compare any two plans (or one plan with its previous run) inside any of the following four views: • All analytics - reports and graphs • All exception views • Supply and Demand view • Material and Resource horizontal plans In addition, users can use order-by-order comparison view where they can compare any two plans (or a single plan with its previous run) and make the following comparions: • Was on-time, but now late • Was late, but now on-time • Was late, but now less late • Was late, but now more late 3.15.2.6. Aggregate, Editable Material Horizontal View The application supports a material plan with a layout wizard that lets the users to customize the layout including the measures displayed, time granularity, etc. Users can also specify two aggregation levels from a choice of Organization, Product Cateogry, Product Family and Item. The aggregations are done real-time and take into account all current user changes, firming, etc. Users can also update the aggregate level horizontal plans. For example, users can update forecast quantity at the product category or even at a period level. The system will allocate the updates to individual items and days. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 95
  • 103. 3.15.2.7. All-in-one Supply/Demand View Oracle Rapid Planning enables an integrated view of supply/demand orders and their associated pegging. In a single view, users can drill either upstream or downstream to view the supply chain from a single order. This enables for a consolidated view of the entire tree without having to switch between multiple views. Users can also focus an a single order upstream or downstream and then reverse direction to look at the “where-used” or the opposite views. They can then retrace the steps back to original state of the supply/demand view 3.15.2.8. Integration with Advanced Planning Command Center Oracle Rapid Planning comes with pre-built integration with Advanced Planning Command Center. Rapid Planning plans can be archived, published to Advanced Planning Command Center. These archived versions can then be viewed in all the related reports and dashboards. The Advanced Planning Command Center’s Supply Chain Analyst dashboard supports drill-down directly into the Rapid Planning Application. All Rapid Planning Simulation plans can be used in the Process Automation functionality to build process flows in Advanced Planning Command Center. 3.15.2.9. Unconstrained Planning Planners can run Rapid Planning in an unconstrained mode. The unconstrained option allows planners to see the required material availability and resource capacity to find what needs to be arranged in order to meet all demands on time. The unconstrained plan output can optionally respect the planning time fence to allow planners to freeze the plan for the initial period. Rapid Planning unconstrained planning can also calculate resource requirements to generate resource usage and resource overload data.. Rapid Planning unconstrained plans produce a full complement of exception messages to alert the planner to critical constraint violations. These exception messages include “Orders with Insufficient Lead Time”, “Resource Overloaded”, and “Supplier Capacity Violated”. In addition, problems with specific demands are highlighted by the exception messages for sales orders and forecasts at risk due to material shortages or resource shortages. 3.15.2.10. Constrained Planning Rapid Planning offers a full set of constrained planning features. Rapid Planning performs simultaneous material and resource capacity constraint based planning. Rapid Planning output is constrained by purchasing, distribution and transit lead times, by resource calendars and capacities, and by supplier capacity. Rapid Planning calculates the capacities consumed by existing WIP schedules and purchased supplies and allocates the remaining capacity to new planned orders. Constrained planning allows planners to automate many types of planning decisions and focus on the critical issues. Rapid Planning constraint based planning includes the ability to search among many alternate supply types. Rapid Planning can automatically search for and find alternates and substitutes across the supply chain and create planned orders to meet demands on time. When the primary supply source is late, Rapid Planning searches for the entire supply chain for item substitutes, alternate organizations, alternate Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 96
  • 104. suppliers, alternate BOM and routing, alternate resources and substitute components to locate the supply source that provides the delivery date closest the demand due date. 3.15.2.11. Demand Forecasts Rapid Planning utilizes forecast and demand data from Oracle Demantra. Oracle Demand Planning integration to Oracle Rapid Planning is not supported. Rapid Planning performs forecast consumption and allows the planner to optionally explode forecasts. The forecast consumption features allow the planner to include both forecasts and actual sales orders without double counting demand. Planners can select the enforce demand time fence plan option and forecasts inside the demand time fence are not included as demands in the plan. During plan definition, the planner can select forecast spreading option. For example, if the forecast is a weekly forecast, the planner can choose to spread the forecast to daily buckets and also optionally set the forecast consumption forward and backward day controls. This allows the planner to accept aggregate (weekly or period) forecasts and more accurately plan supplies in daily buckets. 3.15.2.12. Respect Demand Priority Rules Demand priority rules can be specified at the plan level, allowing the planner to easily compare results from two different plans using different demand prioritization approaches. Demand priority rules control the sequence of demand priorities assigned to all demands. The most urgent demands have the best chance of being satisfied on time. Alternatively, Rapid Planning can use externally specified demand priorities for sales orders and forecasts. 3.15.2.13. Demand and Supply Pegging Rapid Planning pegging links supplies to demands so that the planner can easily identify demand impacts when supply dates change. The planner can use pegging to trace component or resource problems up to the affected sales orders. Pegging also enables the planner to identify which supplies are linked to critical demands and ensure that those supplies remain on schedule. 3.15.2.14. Supply Chain Sourcing Rapid Planning is compatible with the sourcing rules, bills of distribution and assignment sets used by Oracle Purchasing or upload supply chain sourcing definitions via file loaders. Sourcing rules and bills of distribution determine the movement of materials between organizations in your global enterprise; these organizations include your suppliers and the materials include those items made at the manufacturing organizations. Sourcing rules and bills of distribution specify date–effective sourcing strategies, combining replenishment sources with source rankings. Users can flexibly assign sourcing rules to individual items, categories, organizations and regions to define the complete supply chain from suppliers to customers. Rapid Planning can select primary or alternate sources depending on supply constraints to provide the best demand satisfaction dates. If Rapid Planning selects an alternate Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 97
  • 105. organization to source an order, then the selection is reported by the exception message “Order Sourced from Alternate Facility”. 3.15.2.15. Supplier Capacity You can specify time–phased capacity of individual suppliers to specific items in Oracle Purchasing or upload supplier capacity via file loaders. Rapid Planning can allocate planned orders based the constraints of the suppliers. Planned orders are assigned supplier sources in respect to their capacity. Rapid Planning uses the ranking information you specify in sourcing rules and first attempts to source the planned orders with the primary sources. If the capacity to fulfill the demand is not available, alternative sources are used. If the order is sourced from an alternate supplier, then the selection is reported by the exception message “Order Sourced from Alternate Supplier”. You can specify item-supplier lead times and supplier capacity calendars. Rapid Planning recognizes the item-supplier specific parameters and applies them as sources of supply are evaluated to find supply that meets a demand on time. Users can also enter item-supplier specific order modifiers. The supplier capacity calendar governs how supplier capacity is accumulated over a period of time. Supplier capacity is only accumulated on the working days according to the supplier capacity calendar. The supplier capacity calendar also governs how the supplier processing time is calculated. 3.15.2.16. Bills of Material and BOM Effectivity Rapid Planning is integrated with Oracle BOM or you can upload bills of material and routings via file loaders. It supports single-level and multi-level bills of material. Rapid Planning recognizes and recommends substitute components when primary components are delayed or not available. Substitute component selections are reported by the exception message “Planned Order uses Substitute Component”. If alternate bills of material are specified, then the alternate bill may be recommended if there are supply constraints on the primary bill of material and routing. Alternate bills of material selections are reported by the exception message “Planned Order uses Alternate BOM/Routing”. Rapid Planning respects BOM effectivity dates. The planning engine will calculate component requirements based on the BOM effectivity date and also considering component effectivity dates. Rapid Planning evaluates the engineering change orders as of their scheduled effective date. You can order material and plan resources that you need for new revisions ahead of time. 3.15.2.17. By-products and Co-products By-products and co-products specified on the BOM are evaluated by Rapid Planning. New planned orders include by-products and co-products which can be used as supply available on the completion dates. Rapid Planning also uses existing WIP standard and non-standard job by-products and co-products as available supply. 3.15.2.18. Routing Operation and Resource Scheduling Rapid Planning constrained planning respects resource capacity and schedules new planned orders and existing discrete jobs to avoid resource capacity overloads. You can Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 98
  • 106. define routings, resources and resource capacity in Oracle BOM or upload via file loaders. You can specify simultaneous resources and set the maximum assigned units for each resource requirement to control scheduling results. Rapid Planning respects prior and next operation scheduling controls. Resource efficiency and utilization are used by Rapid Planning resource requirement calculations. If you can specify alternate resources, Rapid Planning selects alternates and schedules around constraints on primary resources to meet demands on time. Rapid Planning also chooses alternate routings when required because of constraints on the primary BOM and routing. Alternate selections reported with the exception messages “Planned Order uses Alternate Resource” and “Planned Order uses Alternate BOM/Routing”. Rapid Planning respects routing effectivity dates. Resource requirements are generated using routings which are effective on the start date of the planned order. Planners can select certain bottleneck resources to perform constrained planning. Other resources are planned in an unconstrained mode using the resource lead time during scheduling. Rapid Planning creates schedules that do not overload the selected bottleneck resources and reports overloads on the non-bottleneck resources. This allows the planner to focus on the critical bottleneck resources. 3.15.2.19. End Item Substitution Rapid Planning uses end item substitution rules to find acceptable substitute item supplies when the requested item is not available for the demand request date. Substitution is based on user-defined rules that can be effective either in one direction or in both directions; defining a chain of substitution relationships. Customer specific item substitution rules can also be specified which are respected by Rapid Planning when searching for supplies for that customer’s demands. When item substitutes are selected, Rapid Planning alerts the planning with the exception message “Demand Satisfied Using End Item Substitution”. 3.15.2.20. Lead Times and Planning Time Fence Rapid Planning respects manufacturing and purchasing lead times. Users can set pre- processing, processing and post-processing lead times. Rapid Planning constraint based planning respects these lead times. Rapid Planning respects planning time fences defined at the item organization level which allows the user to freeze the schedule during the initial periods of the plan. 3.15.2.21. Order Modifiers Rapid Planning includes the user specified order modifiers at the item organization level and creates new planned orders respecting the order modifiers. Order modifiers respected include minimum order size, maximum order size, fixed order quantity, fixed lot multiplier and round order quantity. Additionally, users can specify supplier specific order modifiers which are respected by Rapid Planning when creating new planned orders sourced from the supplier. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 99
  • 107. 3.15.2.22. Safety Stock Lead Time Rapid Planning considers safety stock lead time that is user controllable at the item organization level. Safety stock lead time is a lead time that you add to the normal lead time of make and buy items. You use it to instruct the planning engine to schedule supplies in advance of the demand due dates that peg to them. This creates an inventory buffer to protect against fluctuations in lead time, demand (for example, forecast error), and supply (for example, variable supplier lead times and irregular operation yields) 3.15.2.23. Shipping, Receiving and Carrier Calendars Rapid Planning plans a variety of supply chain activities like manufacturing, inter facility shipments, purchases, and shipment to customers. Each of these activities is controlled by a set of calendars. Manufacturing, supplier, and customer facilities may be able to ship or receive goods on specific days. Rapid Planning schedules each type of supply or demand considering the working and non working days in the appropriate set of calendars. The shipping calendar indicates the valid working days for shipment activities originating from suppliers and organizations. The planning engine does not recommend a shipment out from those facilities if the date is a non-working day. The receiving calendar governs the receiving activities at the organizations or customer sites that receive goods. The planning engine allows organizations to receive shipments only on a working day. The carrier calendar indicates the working and non-working days and times for material that is in transit using different means of transport. For example, certain methods of shipment such as parcel carriers may not work on weekends. This may cause the transit time to be stretched over the weekends. 3.15.2.24. Planner Action: Firm Existing Supplies Planners can review existing WIP jobs and purchase orders while comparing to the pegged demands. When required, the planner can pull in or push out the existing supply and firm it. Rapid Planning respects the firm flag by not changing the schedule dates and by consuming material and resource capacity before scheduling non-firm supplies. Rapid Planning reports any overload situations caused by firm supplies. 3.15.2.25. Planner Action: Firm Planned Supplies Planners can review new planned make and buy orders while comparing to the pegged demands. When required, the planner can pull in or push out the new planned orders and selectively firm the planned orders. Rapid Planning respects the firm flag by not changing the schedule dates and by consuming material and resource capacity before scheduling non-firm supplies. Rapid Planning reports any overload situations caused by firm planned orders. 3.15.2.26. Release New Planned Orders and Reschedule Recommendations Planners can easily release recommendations from Rapid Planning to execution systems. Planners can selectively release planning recommendations or choose to release all recommendations. Planners can adjust recommendation due dates and then release the new planned orders or the reschedule of existing planned orders Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 100
  • 108. New planned make orders are released with an alternate BOM/Routing recommendation. If Rapid Planning selects substitute components and alternate resources, these selections are also be released as part of the make order. Rapid Planning allows the user to specify the auto-release of planned orders within the release time fence. Users can set the release time as the item organization attribute. Auto-release of planned orders occurs immediately after the Rapid Planning plan processes complete. Rapid Planning release processes are fully integrated with Oracle Purchasing and Order WIP. The release processes also allow for integration to third party systems. 3.15.2.27. Exceptions Rapid Planning generates the following 24 exception types, and are displayed within the "Exceptions" view in Rapid Planning. • Past Due Sales Orders • Late Replenishment for Sales Order • Late Replenishment for Forecast • Demand Quantity Not Satisfied • Resource Overloaded • Exception: Supplier Capacity Overloaded • Items with a Shortage • Items below Safety Stock • Items with Excess Inventory • Past Due Orders • Orders to be rescheduled out • Orders to be cancelled • Orders to be rescheduled in • Order with Insufficient Lead Time • Sales Order/Forecast at Risk due to a resource shortage • Sales Order/Forecast at Risk due to material shortage • Late Supply pegged to Forecast • Late supply pegged to Sales Order • Planned Order uses alternate BOM/Routing • Planned Order uses Substitute Component • Planned Order uses Alternate Resource • Order Sourced from Alternate Facility • Order sourced from Alternate Supplier • Demand Satisfied Using End Item Substitution Exceptions are generated only when a plan run has completed, and are not regenerated when manual edits are made to a plan. Users can choose to enable or disable the display of specific exception types, and specify their arrangement within the Exceptions view through a configuration mechanism. Within an exception type, users can specify search criteria or filters to specify the exceptions that must be displayed. Search criteria can be saved with a user specified name for future use. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 101
  • 109. From an exception, navigation to other related Rapid Planning views has been provided in context of the exception’s attributes (Item, Org, Resource, etc). Exceptions generated in Rapid Planning can be exported to MS Excel for further analysis. When Plan Comparison is enabled in Rapid Planning, exceptions for the base plan and compared plan for an exception type are displayed in adjacent tabs. The name of the exception type also has the name of the associated plan to easily identify which plan the listed exceptions belong to. 3.15.2.28. Embedded Analytics KPI’s/Metrics are displayed in Rapid Planning in a separate “Analytics” view. Rapid Planning can display the following plan metrics: • Stock Outs (in days) • Fill Rate (%) • Inventory Turns • Safety Stock violations (in days) • Revenue • Gross margin (%) • Manufacturing Cost • Purchasing Cost • On Time Orders (%) • Resource Utilization (%) • Supplier Capacity Utilization (%) • Clear to Build (% of orders) • Clear to Build Component Availability(%) • Ready to Build (%) • Top N Shortage Components (%) In addition to the above metrics, Rapid Planning can also display different facts (Count, Quantity, Value, etc) for the supported exception types as metrics. Selection of the metrics that must be displayed, their display levels, associated filter conditions, and their layout within the Analytics view can be configured at a user level. In a Plan Comparison mode, values from both the base and the compared plans are shown together for easy visibility and comparison. The Analytics view also enables the comparison of end order satisfaction across two plans within an Order Comparison region. To easily compare end demands planned differently across the base and compared plans, seeded comparison mechanisms (e.g. “Was On Time, Now Late”) are provided. Search capabilities are also provided to restrict the comparison to a user defined selection. 3.15.2.29. Late Demand Diagnosis Rapid Planning generates, for each late demand, root cause information that can be viewed in a new Constraints view. The view tells the planner what material and resource constraints caused the demand to be satisfied late, as well as an assessment of how severe each constraint is. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 102
  • 110. For every late demand, Rapid Planning will report the following types of constraints: • Material Constraint o Lead Time Constraint o Planning Time Fence Constraint o Date Effectivity Constraint o WIP Window Constraint • Resource Constraint • Supplier Constraint These constraints will be reported along all alternate paths: alternate resources on routings, substitute components on bills of material, alternate bills of material and routings, alternate sources on sourcing rules, and end item substitutes. Each constraint will have information such as requested date, requested quantity, available quantity, shortage (both in absolute quantity and percentage terms) so that planners can immediately see what actions to take to resolve each late fulfillment of a demand. 3.15.2.30. Global Forecasting Global forecasting allows you to define forecasts without the context of a shipment organization. This is done in Oracle Demand Management. Forecasts can have reference to ship-to entities such as customer site and zone. You can choose a ship-to consumption level in Rapid Planning. You can use sourcing rules to distribute consumed global forecasts to appropriate shipment organizations. Forecast distribution is performed in an unconstrained manner based on the user defined percentages in the sourcing rules. Rapid Planning issues exception messages when a distributed forecast demand at an organization cannot be met on time by supply in that organization. 3.15.2.31. Configure to Order Rapid Planning supports configure to order environments. Rapid Planning can accept forecasts for assemble to order (ATO) models and pick to order (PTO) models as demand schedules. ATO and PTO forecasts from Oracle Demand Management and E- Business Suite R12 and R11i10 are supported. Single level and multi-level ATO models are supported by Rapid Planning. Multi-level ATO models include models at lower levels of the BOM structure. Configured to order sales orders consume model forecasts at each level of the multi-level model. Rapid Planning will plan for the unconsumed model, option and option class forecasts as well as planning for the configured items. Supplies are scheduled and created as needed for all lower levels. You can provide pre-exploded forecast values of your ATO and PTO models and components to Rapid Planning. Configured sales orders consume the model and lower level forecasts. Rapid Planning supports forecast consumption at various levels such as customer, customer site, zone (global forecasts), demand class, and item organization. Rapid Planning can also optionally explode the forecast for the top level model. Model forecasts are exploded to option, option class and component forecasts within Rapid Planning using the 'Explode Forecast' plan option. After forecast explosion, Rapid Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 103
  • 111. Planning will consume and plan supplies for the unconsumed forecast demand at each level. Multi-level multi-organization models are supported. A multi-organization model is one which contains top level or some lower-level models which are transferred between organizations. If you have multi-organization models you must use global forecasting for forecast consumption to be correct. Rapid Planning distributes global forecasts for ATO and PTO models across organizations based on the user-specified sourcing rule percentages. The global forecasts can be consumed at different levels such as Global (Item), Organization, Customer, Customer Site, and Zone. Rapid Planning plans only consider ATO sales orders after they have been progressed to include a linked configured item. This allows Rapid Planning to schedule these sales orders with all the capabilities provided for standard items - for example, to net existing supplies of pre-configured stock at any supply chain bill of material level. A forecast for a lower level ATO configuration that will be stocked will be consumed by a sales order for the top level configured model. Rapid Planning will consume the forecast for this specific configuration first. Any remaining demand will then consume the forecast for the associated ATO model. For procured configurations, Rapid Planning allows you to plan based on the aggregate capacity of the supplier-supplier site to build the base model. A supplier capacity statement for the ATO model is consumed by the ATO items that are created based on this model. KPIs illustrating supplier capacity metrics, as well as exception messages are provided to help you make an informed decision. 3.15.2.32. Default Order Sizing Rapid Planning provides support for default order sizing to improve scheduling results. Smaller order sizes improve scheduling flexibility which leads to higher fill rates and on time supplies. In the absence of order modifiers, Rapid Planning sizes orders to daily production capacity. When some capacity is consumed on a day, Rapid Planning reduces the order size to fit within the remaining capacity in a day. Users can override the default order sizing algorithm by specifying a new item- organization attribute called planning unit of work. The user can set planning unit of work to the number of hours for the duration of the maximum order size. For example, set planning unit of work to 8 hours and the resulting new planned orders will not exceed 8 hour shifts in duration. User can set the planning unit of work to larger than daily capacities and Rapid Planning will create new planned orders that typically span several days up to the specified planning unit of work. The default order sizing does not override existing item-organization order modifiers. For example, if the fixed order quantity is specified, then all order sizes equal fixed order quantity without regard to the planning unit of work. Default order sizing is only applied to new planned orders and does not affect the quantity of an existing supply. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 104
  • 112. 3.15.2.33. Inventory Reservations Rapid Planning recognizes on hand inventory reservations to sales orders. The on hand supply that is reserved to a sales order cannot be used for any other demand. Reservations for both full and partial demand quantities are supported. In the case of a partial reservation, Rapid Planning schedules supplies for the unreserved quantity of the sales order. Rapid Planning generates pegging of on-hand supply to sales orders that matches the reservations recorded in the source transaction system. In the supply and demand window, each sales order demand includes a new field which displays the quantity of on hand inventory that is reserved to the sales order. 3.15.2.34. Clear to Build A make order (planned make order, WIP job, etc.) is “Clear to Build” if all its component requirements are pegged to on-hand supply. Rapid Planning provides visibility to the Clear to Build status of Make Orders, both at the individual make order level as well as at aggregate levels through new key performance indicators (KPIs). The Clear to Build status on make orders are visible through new order level attributes: “Clear to Build Status”, “Ready to Build %”, “Clear to Build Date”, and “Clear to Build Component Availability %”. Equivalent KPIs can be configured to view these attributes at aggregate levels. Rapid Planning also allows user to control allocation of scarce on-hand component supply to make orders by explicitly prioritizing or de-prioritizing specific make orders. This can be achieved through a new Rapid Planning view called the Clear to Build Dashboard. The dashboard allows a user to: • Search for the make orders for which the user wants the Clear to Build status to be improved; • Prioritize specific make orders for Clear to Build – this results in on-hand being allocated to these make orders preferentially when the plan is launched next; • View contentions for selected make orders – contentions are other make orders that share common components; these make orders could potentially contribute to the improvement of the clear to build status of the target orders; • Selectively de-prioritize certain make orders from allocation of on-hand – these selected orders will be given lower priority when on-hand is allocated to Make Orders in the next plan run; • View how a specific component is allocated to multiple make orders, and prioritize or de-prioritize make orders for on-hand allocation based on this component allocation view. 3.15.2.35. Rapid Planning – Sales and Operations Planning Integration Rapid Planning plans will be visible in Demantra Real-time Sales and Operations Planning. The integration between Rapid Planning and Real-time Sales and Operations Planning is similar to the existing Advanced Supply Chain Planning to Real-time Sales and Operations Planning integration. You can export consensus forecast data from Real- time Sales and Operations Planning to Rapid Planning plan. You can read the supply data from a Rapid Planning plan back into Real-time Sales and Operations Planning. This data from the Rapid Planning plan will now be visible in Real-time Sales and Operations Planning worksheets. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 105
  • 113. 3.15.2.36. Rapid Planning – Global Order Promising Integration Rapid Planning plans can now be used by Global Order Promising (GOP) to promise orders. The supply from this plan is considered by GOP when promising orders if GOP is set up to promise orders against a plan output. If there are a mix of ASCP and Rapid Planning plans that have supplies for an Item/Org, GOP accords the highest preference to supply from a Rapid Planning plan. Rapid Planning – GOP integration allows an enterprise to react quickly to unforeseen events, by enabling quick integration between planning simulations and the order promising process. 24 by 7 ATP is not enabled against Rapid Planning plans. Also, any inserts that GOP makes into the plan (Sales Orders, Planned Orders, etc.) will not be visible within the Rapid Planning plan itself. Any Rapid Planning plan that is enabled for ATP will not be editable. This avoids inconsistencies between the current output of the Rapid Planning plan and the version against which GOP is promising orders. 3.15.2.37. Order Comparison In a Plan Comparison mode, Rapid Planning’s Analytics view now has an additional tab that displays “Order Comparison.” This allows users to compare demand satisfaction of sales orders across two plans intelligently. Users can view which demands were planned on time in the base plan, but are delayed in the comparison plan and vice versa, and which demands have increased or decreased their lateness in the comparison plan versus the base plan. A search region allows users to query up only sales orders of interest – for example, sales orders for specific items, or sales orders at specific organizations. 3.15.2.38. Multi-Planner Collaboration Rapid Planning allows a user to save changes made to data in Rapid Planning to a simulation set. A user can save a specific record, multiple records within a Rapid Planning view, or changes across multiple Rapid Planning views to a named simulation set through a single click action. Multiple planners can thus work on simulation copies of a base plan and save the results of their simulation to a common simulation set. When the base plan is launched again with reference to this simulation set, all the user changes will be considered in the next version of the Rapid Planning plan. 3.15.2.39. Functional and Data Security This enhancement provides Rapid Planning with: Functional Security • This is the ability to dictate which functions (Create, Update / Edit, Delete, Launch, Save, Close, Load, Copy, and Release) a responsibility should have access to. Data Security • Data access can be controlled at two levels. o Organization: Here, you can assign organizations to a responsibility. Then, users with that responsibility will have access to (i) all Plans in Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 106
  • 114. which the organizations exist and (ii) all items within those organizations. o Plan: A user creating a plan can mark the Plan as Private or Public. A Public plan is accessible by all responsibilities (and, as a result, by all users) provided they have the necessary Organization level security granted. A Private plan is only accessible by specific users to whom access has been granted (access is granted by the user who created the plan and marked it as Private). In case of Private plans, users will have access all items and organizations within that plan. However, the actions the user can take are controlled by the Function Security of the user’s responsibility. 3.15.3. Release 12.1.3.3 3.15.3.1. Demand Pull-In and Upside Processing This feature allows Rapid Planning to seek to improve on the fulfillment date of a demand while guaranteeing that no previously committed date for any demand will be made any worse. Rapid Planning can now plan considering multiple dates with different priorities on a single demand. This enables planners to maximize revenue by trying to meet new, revised Request Dates from customers, but when they cannot, fall back to previously committed dates - including preserving the supply allocation (pegging). This feature enables Rapid Planning to better utilize excess inventory and potentially improve fill rates. It lets planners improve responsiveness by providing the ability to improve to request date, but guarantee promise date / commit date. In the example illustrated above, a demand is initially committed for week 7. There is excess inventory from weeks 3 to 6. If the customer comes up with a request to satisfy the demand by week 2, Rapid Planning will now try to satisfy the demand on the feasible date closest to the new request date, in this case week 3. In the cases where it cannot improve the earlier commit date, the earlier commit date is preserved. Rapid Planning generates two new exceptions: • Late Replenishment for a Pull-in Sales Order/Forecast: Generated whenever any partial quantity of the demand is met after the revised demand date. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 107
  • 115. Sales Order / Forecast Pulled in: Generated whenever the demand is satisfied prior to the original demand satisfied date. If a demand is partially met on a revised demand date and partially met on the earlier commit date, both the above exceptions will be generated for that demand. Based on the above two exceptions, Rapid Planning also generates the following new measures for analysis that users can use to create graphs in the analytics tab of the Rapid Planning workbench. • Late Replenishment for a Pull-in Sales Order (Count, Value, Days, Quantity) • Late Replenishment for a Pull-in Forecast (Count, Value, Days, Quantity) • Sales Order Pulled-in (Count, Value, Quantity by Demand Date, Quantity by Revised Date) • Forecasts Pulled-in (Count, Value, Quantity by Demand Date, Quantity by Revised Date) Based on the successful pull-ins, planners can now also release the changes to sales orders from the workbench to the source system's Order Management application to send the updates to quantity and the scheduled ship date. 3.15.3.2. Favorite Lists This feature allows users to create user-defined lists of items, resources and suppliers and save them as favorite lists that can be used later as a shortcut to all the related information about those items, resources or suppliers. Users can have multiple named lists per user, accessible across plans. They can access the lists from the left navigator pane and drill using an easy, single-click navigation to Material/Resource Plans, Exceptions, Supplies and Demands for multiple items, resources or suppliers. Static Lists Users can create a list with an enumerated list of items, resources and/or suppliers by saving to a favorite list from other views in the workbench including Items, Resources, Suppliers, and Supplies and Demands. Users can organize the order of the list to reflect supply chain structure by using move up/down actions. This will enable navigation to the Material Plan that places items in supply chain bill order: for example, assembly, sub-assembly, then components. Dynamic Lists Users can also create lists based on certain conditions that then construct the list dynamically every time. For example, users can create a list based on a condition like 'Bottom 10 items based on fill rate %'. Users will then see the resultant list based on the plan. Users can use any of the following measures to create these dynamic lists • Fill Rate % Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 108
  • 116. Inventory Turns • On time Orders % • Late Replenishment for Sales Order / Forecast (value) • Demand Quantity not Satisfied (value) • Resource Utilization % • Supplier Capacity Utilization % • Purchasing Cost Users can create these dynamic lists by creating a metric in the analytics tab using any of the above measures with any of these applicable dimensions ("view by") - Item, Organization, Resource or Supplier. 3.15.3.3. Safety Stock Enhancements This enhancement enables users to view an item’s safety stock profile in quantity (units) even though the planning was done using a safety stock lead time approach. It also lets planners use time-phased safety stock quantity (units) as input to calculate the safety stock lead time. This enables Rapid Planning to be easily integrated with other applications that generate safety stock quantity in units. It also provides an easy to understand view of supply and demand that includes the safety stock (target and actual) expressed in quantity (units). The safety stock lead time is calculated from the safety stock quantity using a simple formula: Safety Stock Lead Time (Days) = Avg (Safety Stock Quantity) / Avg Daily Demand in the Plan The material plan displays two additional measures: • Target Safety Stock: This is the time-phased safety stock quantity that is defined by the user or collected from a source system. • Actual Safety Stock: This is the safety stock quantity that the plan has planned for. Though the plan has actually planned using a safety lead time approach, it is displayed in terms of quantity by converting the safety lead time into safety stock quantity (not time phased) using the formula above. Users can enable this behavior of deriving the safety stock lead time from the quantity (instead from the safety stock %) using a new plan option called Safety Stock Lead Time Method. In addition to the above, users also have the option to input a non-time phased safety stock quantity for each item using a new item attribute called 'Target Safety Stock Override'. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 109
  • 117. 3.15.3.4. Simulation Edits of Additional Item Attributes Users can now do what-if simulation based on more item attributes listed below: • Planning Time Fence Days • Release Time Fence Days • Demand Time Fence Days • Selling Price • Standard Cost • Discount % Users can edit these and see the impacts on plan recommendations and cost metrics after running a simulation. Edits to Demand Time Fence Days and Release Time Fence Days are only applicable in plan inputs mode using simulation sets. For all the above attributes users can use the standard mass update features like Increase by, Decrease by, Increase by %, Decrease by %, Set Value To, Reset to Original. The impact of these user changes on the time fence attributes and the cost/price attributes can be seen (after running the plan) on exceptions such as ‘Orders to be Rescheduled In’ and measures such as Revenues and Gross Margin. 3.15.3.5. Simulation Edits of Approved Supplier Lists and Supplier Capacity Users can now do what-if simulation based on attributes of Approved Supplier Lists and Supplier Capacity as listed below. • Approved Supplier List attributes o Processing Lead Time o Min Order Qty o Fixed Lot Multiplier o Supplier Price • Supplier Capacity attributes o From Date o To Date o Capacity Users can simulate changes to these attributes in a specific plan or as part of a simulation set that can be used across plans. However, users cannot add a new Approved Supplier (Item-Supplier) entry that does not already exist. Also this is still applicable only for global Approved Supplier Lists: any update to a single org propagates to all orgs. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 110
  • 118. Users can view the impact of these simulation changes in all related measures. For example, a what-if change to supplier price impacts related purchasing metrics. 3.15.3.6. Simulation Edits of Processes Users can now do what-if simulation based on changes to their manufacturing processes (routings). Users can copy (duplicate) an existing operation or activity and edit any of the following attributes to either create a new operation and/or activity in that operation. However, users cannot create new routings. The following attributes of the routing operations and activities can be updated: • Disable Date (operation) • Effective Date (operation) • Operation Yield • Resource • Assigned Units • Rate or Amount Users can use these attributes to simulate changes to their manufacturing processes in a specific plan or as part of a simulation set that can be used across plans. 3.15.3.7. Mass Update Enhancements for Resource Availability Mass updates to the fields From Time and To Time now support additional operators: 'Decrease by' and 'Increase by'. In addition, mass updates to To Time also support the relative date/time operator 'From Time+'. This takes a positive or a negative number (say 'n') and sets the To Time to 'n' hours relative to the From Time. This lets users to do actions such as ‘shorten all shifts in a week by 1 hour’ in a single update even though there are multiple shifts with different To Time's. Whenever the action results in the To Time being earlier than From Time, it will be interpreted as a shift ending the next day. These mass update actions are available in both plans and plan inputs. 3.15.3.8. Mass Update Enhancements for Firm Date on Demands and Supplies Mass updates to the field Firm Date now support additional operators: 'Decrease by', 'Increase by', 'Request Date+' and 'Suggested Due Date+'. The last two operators take a positive or a negative number (say 'n') and set the Firm Date to 'n' days relative to the Request Date or the Suggested Due Date. This lets users to do actions like firm all Sales Order demands for an item to their respective request dates in a single update even though the dates are all different. All Date operations in this mass update are based on calendar (24x7) days and not working days. These mass update actions are available in both plans and plan inputs. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 111
  • 119. 3.15.3.9. Scheduling Rapid Planning Runs in Batch Mode Prior to this release, plans in Rapid Planning could be launched only in interactive mode. This feature lets users to schedule the Rapid Planning plan run in the background using a new concurrent program “Launch Simulation Planner”. While launching this program, users have the option to either calculate the lateness constraints or not; and to save the plan (to the database), close the plan (in which case it would not be immediately available for simulation), or do nothing (keep the plan available for simulation). Plans launched in this mode are always launched with refresh snapshot. 3.15.3.10. Enhanced Search Capability This enhancement enables additional search operators for fields Item and Resource in all views. The search operators will now include, apart from the standard 'Equal To' operator, the 'Starts With' and 'Contains' operators. In addition, in the Material Plan and Resource Plan views, these two fields Item and Resource have a new 'Among' operator where users can select multiple items or resources to be displayed in the results. 3.15.3.11. Material Plan Display Order This enhancement supports display of Material Plan in a user-defined item order. The sequence of items listed in the Material Plan will be derived from the sort order seen in the view that the user is coming into the Material Plan from (including Favorites List, Items, Supply and Demand, Bill of Materials, and Exceptions.). If the default Material Plan layout for the user is set to Category or Category-Org, the Material Plan is displayed in the order of the categories corresponding to the sorted selected items. This lets users to structure the Material Plan views in the same order as their supply chain structure starting from the assembly all the way down to the components. 3.15.3.12. Display of Decimal Precision This feature enables users to have control on the maximum number of decimal digits displayed for different types of numeric fields displayed in the workbench using a set of responsibility-level profile options. Here is the list of profile options and the types of fields they control. • MSC: Max display decimals for Quantity • MSC: Max display decimals for Time • MSC: Max display decimals for Quantity (aggregates) • MSC: Max display decimals for Time (aggregates) • MSC: Max display decimals for Currency • MSC: Max display decimals for Ratios/Percentages Profile option (3) above controls the display of all aggregate quantities especially in the Material Plan and in Analytics, and profile option (4) above controls the display of all Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 112
  • 120. aggregate time/hours in the Resource Plan and in Analytics. The rest of the profiles control the display of decimals in all other views for the type of fields indicated above. These profiles are only for display purposes and do not control the precision of the internal values or the editable decimal precision. 3.15.3.13. Last Saved Information for Plan Options The plan options window now displays the fields Last Saved By and Last Saved Date to indicate who last updated the plan and when the plan was last updated. These fields are also updated when a plan is run with the details of time of plan run and the user that ran the plan. 3.15.3.14. Blow Through Phantom Items in Clear to Build The Clear to Build workbench’s Component Allocation View has been enhanced to display the actual components required by a make order by blowing through the make item’s phantom sub-assemblies. This provides visibility into the real component requirements for the make order and allows the user to reallocate scarce component availability as required. 3.15.3.15. Global Forecasting Display in the Material Plan Global forecasting allows you to define forecasts without the context of a shipment organization. You can use sourcing rules to distribute consumed global forecasts to appropriate shipment organizations. Forecast distribution is performed in an unconstrained manner based on the user defined percentages in the sourcing rules. With this release of Rapid Planning, the Material Plan has been enhanced to display global forecasts. This provides users with the ability to view the original global forecast quantities, forecast consumption and the distribution of the global forecasts to specific organizations. The Material Plan view of global forecasts also shows the spreading of forecasts to the various time buckets. 3.15.3.16. Auto-release of Planning Recommendations Rapid Planning now supports the auto-release of new planned orders. This is controlled with a new plan option, “Enable Auto Release.” Users can set the release time fence by editing an item-organization attribute. Rapid Planning will automatically release new planned orders when the suggested start date is inside the release time fence. Rapid Planning also supports the auto-release of reschedules and cancelations. This is controlled with a new plan option, “Auto Release Reschedules.” The release time fence item attribute also determines when auto release of reschedules and cancelations is performed. Simulation planning in Rapid Planning has been enhanced to work seamlessly with the release of planned orders and reschedules. If recommendations are released, the simulation plan ‘remembers’ what was released and does not create duplicate supplies. As planners release planned orders and then simulate new conditions, the plan has a record of what has already been released. The simulation plan treats the released plan orders as firm supplies. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Rapid Planning 113
  • 121. 3.15.3.17. Natural Time Fence Rapid Planning now supports the natural time fence. A new plan option called Create Time Fence has been provided in the Advanced tab of plan options. When checked, the planning engine will evaluate existing firm supplies for an item and use the latest completion date as the new planning time fence date for the item. This allows the planner or the shop floor scheduler or purchasing agent to firm a schedule of supplies, and new planned orders will not be created earlier than the firmed supplies. Two additional profile options are provided in the Advanced tab to extend the use of the natural time fence. The option Firm Planned Order Time Fence instructs the planning engine to create a natural time fence on the completion date of the latest firm planned order. The option Firm Internal Requisition Time Fence instructs the planning engine to create a natural time fence on the completion date of the latest firm internal requisition. 3.15.4. Release 12.2 There are no new features in Oracle Rapid Planning in Release 12.2. 3.16. Oracle Service Parts Planning 3.16.1. Product Overview Oracle Service Parts Planning (SPP) brings advanced multi-echelon supply chain planning to a service supply chain consisting of internal warehouses, emergency stocking locations, internal repair depots, external repair vendors, and external new buy vendors. Oracle SPP is a new product dedicated to the service parts planning domain. It offers an integrated forecasting and replenishment planning workbench, planning logic dedicated to the unique characteristics of the service parts planning domain (such as reverse logistics, multiple part conditions, and part supersession), and seamless integration to Oracle Supply Chain Management and Oracle Service (Spares Management and Depot Repair) applications to support execution of planned replenishment actions, including external and internal repair. 3.16.2. Release 12.1.1 3.16.2.1. Integrated Demand and Supply Planning By running a single Service Plan, you can regenerate both the forecasts and the replenishment recommendations (procurement, transfer, and repair) for an entire service supply chain. A service parts planning workbench lets you view and manipulate forecasts as well as transfer, and new buy and repair recommendations and transactions. All demand/supply, exception, item attribute and comments pertaining to a service part are visible in a single screen, creating a very efficient user experience for the planner. 3.16.2.2. Service Parts Planning Workbench In service environments, it is common for planning responsibility to be divided across planners by item, and for planners to analyze, change, and execute plans on an item by Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Service Parts Planning 114
  • 122. item basis. To support this practice, a new SPP screen shows in a single window the following information about an item: • Values of key item attributes • Horizontal supply and demand plan • Planner comments relating to the item • Exceptions relating to the item • Demand history and forecast The SPP Workbench can display demand and supply information at the level of a single item, or aggregated across multiple revisions of the item’s supersession chain. It can display demand and supply information at a single location, or aggregated across user- defined groups of locations (inventory organizations). 3.16.2.3. Integration to Spares Management for External Repairs SPP plans for repair of defective spare parts at external vendors. Movement of defective parts to the repair vendor, repair lead times and yields at the repair vendor, and movement of repaired (good) parts back to an internal warehouse are considered. The repair vendor must be modeled as an inventory organization. Upon release of a recommendation for external repair, integration with Oracle Spares Management automatically creates the repair purchase order to the repair vendor, the internal sales order to move defectives to the repair vendor, and the underlying work orders necessary to progress the repair through the repair vendor. (Management of the work orders is automatic and does not require user intervention.) Tracking of repair progress is done through a workbench in Oracle Spares Management. 3.16.2.4. Integration to Depot Repair for Internal Repairs SPP plans for repair of defective spare parts at internal repair depots. Movement of defective parts to the repair vendor, repair lead times and yields at the repair vendor, and movement of repaired (good) parts back to an internal warehouse are considered. The repair depot must be modeled as an inventory organization. Upon release of a recommendation for internal repair, integration with Oracle Depot Repair automatically creates the transfer order to move defectives to the internal repair depot, the repair work order at the repair depot, and the transfer order to move the repaired spare parts back to a warehouse. Tracking of repair progress is done through a workbench in Oracle Depot Repair. 3.16.2.5. Support for Part Condition SPP distinguishes between supplies of a single spare part that are of different conditions: good and defective. This allows SPP to recommend appropriate repairs to satisfy demand for good spare parts. 3.16.2.6. Criticality Matrix You can group items into various criticalities on the basis of a flexible number of attributes such as cost, order frequency, reliability, and impact of failure. You can then specify forecasting methods and service level targets by criticality. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Service Parts Planning 115
  • 123. 3.16.2.7. Support for Supersessions SPP automatically uses supplies of later revisions of an item to satisfy demand for earlier revisions of the item. Forecasts are automatically created for the latest item revision in a supersession chain on the basis of the combined histories of the latest item revision and all previous item revisions. Revisions are defined via supersession item relationships in either Oracle Inventory or Oracle Spares Management. 3.16.2.8. Returns Forecasts Forecasts of returns of defectives from the field are recognized as supply during the planning process. Recommendations for repairs will not exceed the forecasted and available supply of defective spare parts. 3.16.2.9. Minimize New Buys SPP exhausts on-hand supplies of substitutable item revisions and options for repair of defective supplies before recommending, as a last resort, purchase of new spare parts to satisfy spares demand. 3.16.2.10. Life Time Buys When a service part is obsoleted in advance of the end of the useful life of the products that require it for service, a last or 'life time buy' must be undertaken. SPP recognizes life time buy events as defined in the item attribute simulation set and recommends appropriate 'life time buys' that fulfill demand anticipated to fall between the life time buy date and the end of life date. (The latter date may be well beyond the end of the planning horizon.) 3.16.2.11. Planner Work Lists SPP can generate a personal work list for each planner that dynamically lists items controlled by the planner that have important exceptions (for example, late replenishments where the number of days late is greater than 3) and those that have key recommendations (for example, new buy orders that need to be released within the next 5 days). The type and severity of exceptions that qualify items for the work list and the type of recommendations that qualify for the work list can be specified by the planner. The work list shows the most important to-dos (items to replan, recommendations to release) that each planner must take care of at any given time. 3.16.2.12. Integration with Collaborative Planning SPP supports the publishing of new buy order forecasts to new buy suppliers and repair order forecasts to external repair suppliers. Suppliers can view and respond to these order forecasts through Collaborative Planning (CP). External repair suppliers can also view in CP forecasts of defective shipments to their facilities as planned in SPP. SPP can receive supply commits uploaded to CP from new buy suppliers and trigger exception messages when those commit levels are exceeded. 3.16.2.13. Supersession Chain-Specific Replanning When a planner is working on a service part in the planner workbench, he or she can initiate a quick replan of just the supersession chain involving the part on display. This allows the planner to perform adjustments such as expediting repair or purchase orders, Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Service Parts Planning 116
  • 124. or changing the forecast either manually or by switching statistical forecasting methods, then quickly recalibrate the supply / demand balance of the part being worked. The replan can include forecasting and replenishment planning, or just one of those. The planner's replanning action will not affect the planning results of any other part in other supersession chains. Multiple planners can therefore work concurrently on the same SPP plan, each on their own parts, without impacting each other's work. 3.16.2.14. Execution Net Change Planning Service parts planning environments are characterized by high part and location counts. Scalability of planning calculations is a primary concern. On the functional side, SPP enhances scalability by planning parts only when necessary, and while leaving the pre- existing planning results of other parts intact. If the "Net Change" launch option of SPP toggled to Yes, SPP will only generate fresh plan results for new parts or those parts that have experienced net changes in demand/supply, item attributes, supersession or repair to relationships, or supplier capacity; it will overlay those plan results on top of pre-existing plan results for other items. This feature operates in conjunction with net change collections. 3.16.3. Release 12.1.2 3.16.3.1. Multi-process Inline Forecasting The performance of Inline Forecasting in Oracle Service Parts Planning (SPP) has been significantly enhanced through the introduction of a new profile option "MSO: Number of processes for Inline Forecast". While previously a single 'Memory Based Forecaster' process was launched to generate a forecast for all items in the plan, you can now launch multiple processes, so that forecasts for different item-chains are generated in parallel. This profile determines the number of such processes that are launched in parallel for forecasting. 3.16.3.2. Intermittent Demand Flag Whether the history data for an item is intermittent or not determines: • the forecast methods that Oracle Service Parts Planning (SPP) employs to generate a 'Blended' (Bayesian weighted average) forecast, and • the safety stock calculation method used by Oracle Inventory Optimization (IO). IO assumes Poisson-distributed demand variability for intermittent demands, normally-distributed demand variability for non-intermittent demands. Previously the SPP Forecast Rule screen had an option to specify whether the history data was intermittent or not. This approach this had two inherent issues: (i) the forecast rule is independent of item and (ii) non-SPP users of Oracle Inventory Optimization needed to set up SPP Forecast Rules in order to trigger IO's intermittent demand calculations. Release 12.1.2 has an enhanced Item Attribute Mass Maintenance (IMM) form, with a new item attribute 'Intermittent Demand' added. This attribute will be used to specify whether the history pattern is intermittent or not, and will be referred to by the SPP forecasting engine, and by IO. This will be available both on the Item-Organization and Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Service Parts Planning 117
  • 125. Item-Zone tab of the IMM. The options on the Forecast Rule screen to specify whether history is intermittent or not have been removed. 3.16.3.3. Planner Worklist Enhancement Oracle Service Parts Planning already had a 'Planner Worklist' that could be set up for each planner so that it dynamically lists important exceptions / key recommendations on his items. This shows the most important to-dos that each planner must take care of at any given time. The Planner Worklist has been further enhanced in Oracle Service Parts Planning 12.1.2. The grouping of exceptions and recommendations has been rationalized so that the results are presented in a more concise manner, and it is easier to drill down from this prioritized list of tasks to details regarding each. 3.16.4. Release 12.1.3 3.16.4.1. Re-order Point-based Parts Planning Reorder point based planning is a widely adopted method of planning replenishments for service parts. It uses demand forecasts and item lead times to decide when to place a new order in order to avoid dipping into safety stock. Orders are usually created for the economic order quantity, in order to strike a balance between purchasing and carrying costs. PAB Profile Q u a Re-order n Quantity t i t Safety y Stock Time Demand Supply Oracle Service Parts Planning 12.1.3 has been enhanced to support Re-order point based planning. SPP computes the safety stock target for a part based on mean absolute deviation (for parts with regular demand) or assuming a Poisson distribution (for parts with intermittent demand), or reads in safety stock targets from other sources (like Inventory Optimization). It then dynamically determines when to place an order, depending on this safety stock target and future demand. SPP also computes the Economic Order Quantity using the standard formula, so that new orders are placed for this quantity. The user also has the option to override the system computed values. The values of safety stock and EOQ can be recalculated during a planning run, or they can be retained at their existing values. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Service Parts Planning 118
  • 126. 3.16.4.2. Import into a Simulation Set The Simulation Set in SPP is used by planners for mass maintenance of data. This is however difficult to use when the planner has to manually enter or edit values for each attribute in the forms UI. SPP 12.1.3 has been enhanced to support a mass upload of item attribute values into the simulation set. A standard format spreadsheet template is provided as part of legacy collections flat file loads. The planner can use this template to enter / edit / delete attribute values, and then upload the spreadsheet file to mass update the values for the respective attributes on the items. The Planner Workbench (Supply Demand Analysis) screen has also been enhanced to enable update of item attributes that will then be considered in an online replan. 3.16.4.3. Integration with Advanced Supply Chain Planning An OEM manufacturing products often manufactures spare parts for them too. Typically the OEM would have a distinct service supply chain, where defective products are returned and repaired. In case there is not sufficient supply of defective parts (that can be repaired) in the service supply chain, new parts may have to be manufactured. Thus the manufacturing facility that manufactures the parts will have two sets of demands – one coming from the manufacturing supply chain, and the second coming from the service supply chain. Oracle Advanced Supply Chain Planning (ASCP) plans for the manufacturing supply chain and currently handles the first stream of demand. ASCP is now integrated with Oracle Service Parts Planning (SPP) which plans for the service supply chain. Thus SPP would take in demand from the Service supply chain and try to meet these demands through repair of defective parts. In case all demands cannot be met in this manner, SPP can source parts from the manufacturing supply chain. This ‘demand’ for spare parts from SPP is read in by ASCP (by virtue of the SPP plan being a demand schedule in the ASCP plan). ASCP then plans the manufacture. 3.16.4.4. Integration with APCC - Service Parts Planner Dashboard A new Service Parts Planner dashboard is now available in Advanced Planning Command Center. Service Parts Plans can be archived and published to Advanced Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Service Parts Planning 119
  • 127. Planning Command Center. The archived versions can then be viewed in reports and dashboards. The Service Parts Planner dashboard is structured to address the typical questions that a parts planner would have and includes a number of service-specific measures and KPIs, such as repairs versus new buys, internal versus external repairs, service contracts performance. The SPP dashboard has five pages: the first, a Plan Health summary, summarizes demand and supply, exceptions, and service agreements. The Demand and Supply page enables the planner to start with an overall view of demand satisfaction in the service supply chain, and drill down all the way into the SPP planner workbench. The Exceptions page of the Service Parts Planner dashboard highlights key exceptions in the service parts plan and enables the planner to investigate their causes. The Service Level Agreement Analysis page is meant for evaluating service contracts. The planner can see compliance to service contracts, and review costs, revenues, profitability and achieved versus target safety stocks. The reports on this page are based on Inventory Optimization plans. Finally the Historical Performance page gives the planner a picture of how the plan is tracking against actuals. The planner can compare how actuals for measures such as shipments and returns, compare against SPP plan output. 3.16.5. Release 12.1.3.2 3.16.5.1. Fair Share In case of constrained supplies, Oracle Service Parts Planning (SPP) previously allocated the available supplies to the first demand. However, planners may prefer to fair share constrained supplies among competing demands of the same priority from different organizations. SPP has therefore been enhanced in release 12.1.3.2 to support this. A ‘Supply Allocation Rule’ screen has been added to SPP to specify the organizations whose demands can compete for constrained supplies at a source organization. SPP allocates supplies to demands based on the demand priority. If there is insufficient supply and there are multiple competing demands of the same priority in the ‘allocation bucket’, supplies at the source organization are fair shared amongst them in the ratio of the ‘current demand.’ In case of a tie, the organization priority specified in the Supply Allocation Rule is used as a tiebreaker. SPP considers demands across the supersession chain while fair sharing supplies. Supplies are also fair shared among safety stock demands, after reserving a portion of the supplies to meet the source organization safety stock target. The SPP Supply Demand Analysis window has been enhanced to add an ‘Unconstrained Demand’ row, so that the planner can identify the various demands that are competing for constrained supplies within a time bucket. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Service Parts Planning 120
  • 128. 3.16.5.2. Query-based Auto-release Service supply chains often have millions of parts that are planned for, and therefore an even higher number of planned orders. As a result, manually releasing planned orders to execution is often not an option. Previously, SPP provided the option to auto-release all orders within the release time fence. However, the planner may want to be alerted in specific scenarios (for example, when a single order is for a very large value) before the order is released. SPP has therefore been enhanced in release 12.1.3.2 to enable ‘Query-based Auto- release’. The planner can now define queries, and then specify whether (a) the records returned by the query should be released or (b) the records returned by the query (say ones that cause an exception) should be blocked from release, and all other orders be released. Further, an ‘Applied-to’ column has been added, so that the release action is applied to all orders for the particular item/supersession, or to all orders for that item/supersession in that organization. In addition to these, certain forecasting related metrics (like MAPE) are computed in Demantra and exported to SPP. These metrics have been enabled for inclusion in queries, so that, say orders for items can be blocked from release if the forecast accuracy is too low. 3.16.5.3. Collect Installed Base under Contract A planner might want to forecast the demand for service parts that is likely to arise in the future, in order to service the Installed Base of products that are covered under contracts. The Oracle Value Chain Planning Server Parts Planning solution has been enhanced in Release 12.1.3.2 to provide this capability. You can now collect a new entity, ‘Installed Base under Contract.’ When this is entity is collected, the installed base history and contract history are examined, and, for each period, the number of installed units that were under contract is determined. A profile option has been added to specify the period for which this information must be collected. This information is then used, along with the computed failure rate of each service part in the Installed Base item, to determine the service parts forecast. 3.16.5.4. Collect Field Replaceable Unit Bills of Material Forecasting the requirement of parts to service an Installed Base under contract (as detailed above) requires information on the various components (called Field Replaceable Units) in the install base item that are eligible for service. In Release 12.1.3.2, when you collect the Installed Base under Contract, the Field Replaceable Units (FRU) BOM can be automatically derived. In order to enable this, all FRUs have to be included in a designated category set. FRU BOMs are then derived based on parts belonging to this category set: (a) that are part of the manufacturing BOM of the Install Base item; or (b) if the debrief on a service request for the Installed Base item includes a part belonging to this category set. This FRU BOM is then used in Demantra Demand Management to compute the failure rate of parts, which is then used in computing the service parts forecast. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Service Parts Planning 121
  • 129. 3.16.5.5. Supersession Notes Customers often require the ability to add free form notes while creating a supersession relationship. These notes usually contain detailed information about the relationship, for example, information about when the supersession is for dangerous goods. The notes are created in Oracle Spares Management while defining the relationship. These notes must then be visible to a planner in Service Parts Planning. Oracle Service Parts Planning has been enhanced in Release 12.1.3.2 to pull in the notes that are created in Spares Management, and display them on the key screens where a planner may review the supersession: the Planner Worklist, Supply Demand Analysis, and Supersession screens. 3.16.6. Release 12.2 3.16.6.1. Support Multiple Move-in / Move-out Lines for a Repair Order In case the depot organization is different from the central warehouse and defectives are not at the depot organization, Oracle Service Parts Planning (SPP) generates three separate planned order recommendations for internal repair. They are: 1. Order to move defectives in for repair (move-in line); 2. Non Standard repair work order to repair the part (repair work order); 3. Order to move usable inventory to the demanding organization (move-out line). During the release process, the SPP release code calls an Oracle Depot Repair API, which creates execution documents for the move-in line, repair order and the move-out line. Until Release 12.2, the Depot Repair API did not support multiple move-in and/or move-out lines for a repair order. This meant that there had to be a one to one to one pegging between the move-in line, the repair order and the move-out line in the SPP engine. The Depot Rapair API is being enhanced in Release 12.2 to support multiple move-in / move-out lines for a repair order. Corresponding to this, the SPP release capability is being enhanced to support this situation. SPP therefore will no longer enforce one to one to one pegging between the move-in line, the repair order and the move-out line. 3.17. Oracle Strategic Network Optimization 3.17.1. Release 12.1.1 3.17.1.1. Supply Chain Risk Management Due to the dynamic nature of the global business environment, companies are searching for ways to improve their supply chains in order to absorb disruptions that occur unexpectedly. While providing other substantial benefits, Just-in-time, and Lean Manufacturing initiatives have hindered many business's ability to absorb the impact of unexpected events. Slack in the supply chain - usually in the form of inventory - is no longer an acceptable hedging strategy and a sudden change such as a missed supply, can Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Strategic Network Optimization 122
  • 130. have an immediate impact on a companies' operations. As an example, recent hurricanes have proved disastrous and exposed many weaknesses and companies' existing supply chain. Less sensational events, such as an unexpected line shutdown can also have a material impact to the business. The ability to run simulations for these unexpected events is necessary for companies to manage risk and these capabilities are now available in Strategic Network Optimization. While most advanced planning software packages have simulation capabilities, considering the unexpected nature of an event is absent. As an example, the simulation of an unexpected plant shutdown in the future will trigger inventory pre-build in anticipation of this event in most software packages. Since this event occurs unexpectedly, this is not a realistic hedging strategy. Strategic Network Optimization will simulate the surprise nature of this event and will present realistic options should such and event occur. These simulations can also be run proactively to determine the potential exposure, or risk, that your company faces. The following enhancement will allow planners to analyze and mitigate risk by:  The Ability to consider unplanned, and planned events and it’s impact on the supply chain  Easily compare scenarios using various Key Performance Indicators  Ability to consider multiple demand series and safety stock plans Vital to this enhancement is the concept of unplanned events. In order to simulate the unpredictable nature of such events, the element of surprise needs to be reflected in the solution. For example, if a plant is unexpectedly shut down due to a natural disaster the solver should not pre-build inventory in anticipation of this event. This requirement will be a key differentiator for the Strategic Network Optimization and strengthen its position in the marketplace as the leader in Supply Chain Risk Management decision support systems. 3.17.1.2. Alerts Alerts are used to assist the planner with identifying and resolving exceptions after solving the model. The current mechanism to view and manage alerts in SNO is by using the Over and Under User Sets. While this is useful, the generic Over/Under categorization makes it difficult for users to quickly identify exceptions of a certain type. Reports (Smart graphs) are typically created to supplement the Sets and present the information in a more useful format. Reports require set up beforehand and multiple reports are needed to identify exceptions of different types. Introducing an alert framework in SNO alleviates the need to use both Sets and reports to manage and review exceptions in the model. It will also provide a familiar alert workflow that is typical in many planning applications. Because of it flexibility, SNO is often used to solve non-traditional supply chain problems. This enhancement focuses on the traditional strategic and tactical manufacturing & distribution use of the application. Consideration for a more flexible framework to support non-traditional uses will be considered in the future. Alerts are categorized based on the business area. Within each category, the type of alert violation will be identified. This provides the planner with the ability to quickly identify Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Strategic Network Optimization 123
  • 131. and focus on the area of interest. The ability to drill-down and easily navigate to the node or arc of interest is also an important requirement that is addressed. Alerts will provide the following benefits:  Alerts provide an immediate visual representation of exceptions, which are faster and more informative than using sets to identify exception.  You can drill-down to the exact location of the exception within a node or arc.  Alert categorization is more specific than Over and Under User Sets categorization.  Little set up is required to use alerts. This image shows the new Alerts area at the bottom of the Strategic Network Optimization main user interface: The number and type of alerts is displayed in the Model Workspace area. In the Model Workspace tree, at the root level of Alerts, the number of alerts is displayed in brackets and the word Alerts is displayed in bold font. If no exceptions are found in the model, Alerts has no number in brackets next to it and the font is not bolded. In the example above, total of (68) exceptions were found when the model was solved. Within Alerts, there are six different alert categories. The number of exception found within each type of alert is displayed next to the alert category in the Model Workspace area. In the example above, (42) Demand alerts, (22) Inventory alerts, and (4) Transportation alerts were found for a total of (68). Within each alert category, there are several specific types of exceptions. If an exception is found, a red exclamation mark is displayed next to the exception type and if no exceptions are found, a green checkmark is displayed next to the exception type, as seen in the example above. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Strategic Network Optimization 124
  • 132. The Alerts section can be displayed across the bottom of the main user interface, as seen in the example above. This section can be shown, expanded, or collapsed, using the up and down arrows at the top of the section. If you double-click an Alerts folder in the Model Workspace tree, the Alerts section at the bottom of the main user interface expands. Single-clicking on an item in the Alerts section of the Model Workspace tree displays the alert in the Alerts section at the bottom of the main user interface. The six tabs; Demand, Inventory, Manufacturing, Transportation, Supply, and Other reflect the alerts results and match the Alerts section in the Model Workspace tree. When using alerts, each node or arc that you want to be alerted about is assigned an alert category. To assign an alert category, a new Category drop-down list was added to nodes and arcs: 3.17.1.3. Key Performance Indicators After running a scenario, Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) can help you make detailed scenario comparisons. They provide you with graphical representation of various metrics in a model. KPIs can show you which scenario is most efficient at filling demand, minimizing inventory costs, or providing the highest percentage of machine utilization. Costs are categorized based on the types of costs in the nodes and arcs and are summed across the whole planning horizon, not by period. KPIs are only visible in Key Performance Indicators view. An example of the Key Performance Indicators View Strategic Network Optimization has nine different KPIs: Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Strategic Network Optimization 125
  • 133. Total Cost - The sum of all costs in the model.  Transportation Cost - The sum of all costs for any node or arc in the model where Category is set to Transportation.  Production Cost - The sum of all costs for any node or arc in the model where Category is set to Manufacturing.  Supply Cost - The sum of all costs for any node or arc in the model where Category is set to Supply.  Inventory Cost - The sum of all costs for any node or arc in the model where Category is set to Inventory.  Other Cost - The sum of all costs for any node or arc in the model where Category is null.  Labor Utilization % - Labor utilization expressed as a percentage.  Machine Utilization % - Machine utilization expressed as a percentage.  Demand Fill Rate % - Demand Fill Rate expressed as a percentage. By default, Key Performance Indicator data is displayed in bar chart format. However, the data can also be displayed in pie chart format or polar format by clicking the Pie or Polar tabs. A polar chart displays points in a graph based on data in the scenario. An example of a polar chart can be seen here below: = Polar chart By default, each scenario defined in the Model Workspace appears in the Key Performance Indicators view. However, you can use the KPI Selection Dialog to choose which key performance indicators scenarios are displayed. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Strategic Network Optimization 126
  • 134. KPI Selection Dialog The concept of scenarios was introduced in previous versions of Strategic Network Optimization. However, scenarios are now created and run from the Model Workspace tree as seen below: Scenarios & Events in the Model Workspace Tree The concept of events is new to this version of Strategic Network Optimization. Events are individual occurrences which impact the supply chain. Events are created and then added to scenarios. They specify the find and replace functions which are performed within the model. Each scenario should have at least one event assigned to it. If you run a scenario with no events in it, the model baseline solves. Several events can be added to the same scenario. There are two kinds of events:  Unplanned  Planned Unplanned events have been added to support Supply Chain Risk Management, they are complete surprises. They are used when there is no warning that the event will occur. A sudden change such as a missed supply can have an immediate impact on a company’s operations. Unplanned events allow you to incorporate the concept of surprise into your model’s solution. Examples of unplanned events which can massively interrupt supply chain operations include natural disasters such as hurricanes and floods. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Strategic Network Optimization 127
  • 135. Planned events are not surprises and there is at least some react time involved. With this advance warning, there is at least some time to make other supply arrangements and activate contingency plans. Examples of planned events include seasonal supply chain interruptions, anticipated shortages, and increases in demand caused by promotions. 3.17.1.4. Usability Enhancements The investment in usability continues with this release. In addition to the Alerts, and KPI view the following enhancements have been incorporated to improve the overall user experience: Improved Find and Replace Find, Replace, and Find Export are essential tools required by consultants, pre-sales, and customers. The purpose for initiating any of these utilities are many – from model creation, navigation, and data editing to name a few. While each function serves a distinct purpose, there is some overlap and the fact that they each have similar, yet different dialogs is confusing. The usability suffers further as the number of modal dialogs that pop up can be many. For example, a simple Find query with an ensuing replace opens up to seven dialog boxes which must than be closed. This enhancement provides the following in SNO:  Combined dialog boxes for Find, Replace, and Find Export  Ability to access the dialog boxes with shortcuts versus the multi-nested menus  Improved usability with a more intuitive graphical user interface Quick access to common functions in the toolbar Commonly used functions have been added to the toolbar for easy access. These include:  Find & Replace  Hide Nodes  Hide Arcs  Fat Arcs  Align Nodes in Columns  Align Nodes in Rows  Select Adjacent nodes  Show/hide map legend Improved Map Legend The map legend has been improved to provide the ability to move the legend outside of the map view to prevent the legend from covering up key areas of the map. The ability to specify a shape and color has also been added in this release. Overall Look and Feel Node icons have replaced the dated node symbols to make the nodes easier to identify. The node color has also been changed to match the color of the application and block images have been updated in the sample models. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Strategic Network Optimization 128
  • 136. 3.17.2. Release 12.1.2 3.17.2.1. Aggregate Assignment Set and Lane Definition When setting up a Strategic Plan, assignment sets and lanes are required to be defined for each item that needs to be considered in a plan. For assignment sets the number of item- organization combinations can potentially be very large since many of the aggregate assignment levels are currently not supported. Similarly, when setting up lanes from organization to customers each individual lane needs to be defined for every item- organization-customer site-ship method combination. The setup for this can become very tedious and error prone. A simple example will illustrate the current challenge. Number of customer sites =100 Average Number of DC’s per customer site=2 Number of ship methods (rail, truck)=2 For this small supply chain 2 x 100 x 2 = 400 individual lanes would need to be entered. The purpose of this enhancement is to ease the set-up required when defining strategic plans. This is achieved by:  Support all available assignment type levels for input assignment sets.  Support for specificity rules to allow for defaulting. For example, a sourcing rule at the item-organization level will override a previously defined assignment at the category-organization level.  Support lane definition for regions or zones This enhancement will ensure consistency with the other planning products and greatly improve usability. This will also decrease the number of initial setup problems since the most common problem is missing one of the many assignments or lanes that need to be defined. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Strategic Network Optimization 129
  • 137. 3.17.3. Release 12.1.3 There are no new enhancements in Oracle Strategic Network Optimization in Release 12.1.3. 3.17.4. Release 12.2 3.17.4.1. Specify Scenario File in the Plan Options This enhancement improves the usability and robustness of Strategic Network Optimization when deployed leveraging the standard integration to Oracle EBS or EnterpriseOne. In many cases it is necessary to augment the model that is created using the standard integrated process as the information may not be available in the source system or the modeling constructs might need to be altered to satisfy specific business requirements. Some examples include • Adjusting node-specific penalty costs • Considering future currencies • Modeling unique supply chain constraints • Leveraging Risk Adjusted Costs These types of changes may be accommodated leveraging Strategic Network Optimization’s import file. The plan options have been modified to allow the specification of one or more scenario files (import files) to the plan. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Strategic Network Optimization 130
  • 138. Currently this can only be accomplished on the server side by expert users and requires access to the server, appropriate server permissions and knowledge of the back end file structure, scripts, and Strategic Network Optimization batch import commands. Server side customizations will still be available and is the recommended approach for significant customizations. The following diagram illustrates this enhancement in context of the overall architecture. Providing the ability to attach scenario files to the plan options will: • Lower the Total Cost of Ownership by providing an easy mechanism to import model customizations • Improve usability and adoption in the field • Decrease data and model errors as the appropriate version of the scenario/import file can be attached to the plan • Expand the relevance of the standard integrated model 3.17.4.2. Solver Upgrade Strategic Network Optimization leverages linear optimization in combination with a number of heuristics to solve long term supply chain planning problems. SNO leverages the industry standard CPLEX solver which is capable of solving large scale Linear Programming problems. In this release, the CPLEX version has been upgraded from version 10.0 to 12.2, which enables the SNO solver to run significantly faster while requiring less memory. This will be especially valuable to our customers with larger SNO models. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Strategic Network Optimization 131
  • 139. The new CPLEX version also comes bundled with a Mixed Integer Programming (MIP) solver which allows SNO to provide better (lower cost) solutions for go/no-go problems, including Capital Asset Management. Typical Capital Asset Management problems include: • How many facilities (Plants/DC’s) should I have? • Where should my facilities be located? • What impact will off shoring have on my supply chain • Can I rationalize my facilities without compromising my ability to meet demand? • How can I mitigate supply chain risk? • When should I open/close my facilities? Leveraging the MIP algorithm will better align SNO with current cost-driven objectives used in facility planning. Oracle E-Business Suite Releases 12.1 and 12.2 Release Content Document Oracle Strategic Network Optimization 132